vol. 54, no. 2, 2012 Published by NTEU
ISSN 0818–8068
AUR
Australian Universities’Review
AUR Editor Dr Ian R Dobson, University of Helsinki
AUR Editorial Board Jeannie Rea, NTEU National President Professor Timo Aarrevaara, University of Helsinki Professor Walter Bloom, Murdoch University Dr Anita Devos, Monash University Dr Jamie Doughney, Victoria University Professor Leo Goedegebuure, University of Melbourne Professor Ralph Hall, University of New South Wales Professor Dr Simon Marginson, University of Melbourne Mr Grahame McCulloch, NTEU General Secretary Dr Alex Millmow, University of Ballarat Dr Neil Mudford, UNSW@ADFA Professor Paul Rodan, Swinburne University of Technology Dr Leesa Wheelahan, University of Melbourne
Production Design & layout: Paul Clifton Editorial support: Anastasia Kotaidis Cover photograph: RMIT University, Melbourne. Chris Orr, © 2012,
Contact Details Australian Universities’ Review, c/- NTEU National Office, PO Box 1323, South Melbourne VIC Australia 3205
Editorial Policy
Book Reviews
The Australian Universities’ Review (AUR, formerly Vestes) is published by the National Tertiary Education Union (NTEU) to encourage debate and discussion about issues in higher education and its contribution to Australian public life, with an emphasis on those matters of concern to NTEU members.
Books for review should be sent to the Editor. Our policy is to review books dealing either with tertiary education or with matters pertinent to issues in tertiary education. Book reviews should be between 200 and 1200 words; review essays may be longer.
Editorial decisions are made by the Editor, assisted by the AUR Editorial Board. The views expressed in articles in this publication, unless otherwise stated, are those of the authors and do not necessarily represent the views of the Editor, the Editorial Board or the publisher. Although some contributions are solicited by the Editor or the Editorial Board, AUR is anxious to receive contributions independently from staff and students in the higher education sector and other readers. AUR publishes both articles and other contributions, including short commentary and satire. Articles will be assessed by independent referees before publication. Priority is given to contributions which are substantial, lively, original and have a broad appeal. Responses to previously published contributions are encouraged. AUR is listed on the DIISR (formerly DEEWR and DEST) register of refereed journals.
Contributions Please adhere to the style notes outlined on this page. Contributors should send digital manuscripts in Word format, preferably by email to editor@aur.org.au. Contributions on CD or PC disk will also be accepted. Contributions should normally be between 1,000 and 5,000 words, although longer articles will be considered. All articles should be accompanied by an abstract that would not usually be longer than 150 words.
Satire Do you have something satirical to say about the Australian higher education sector? Send it in!
Replies and letters AUR welcomes letters of response to articles published in the journal. Longer responses to articles are also encouraged. Responses should be a maximum of 1,000 words, and should be received within a month after the publication of the journal so that they can be properly considered by the Editor and the Editorial Board for the following issue.
Subscriptions AUR is free to NTEU members on an opt-in basis. Full details at www.aur.org.au/subscription.html. Annual subscription rates (inclusive of GST where applicable): Australia and NZ $71.50 AUD Overseas airmail $86 AUD Overseas payments should be made by credit card or bank draft in Australian currency.
Advertising AUR is published twice a year, in February and September. The current hard copy circulation is approximately 8,000 per issue. Rates are available on application to National Publications Coordinator, NTEU (email aur@nteu.org.au).
The author’s full contact details should be provided, including email address, telephone and fax.
Archive
Contributions are sent to a minimum of two referees, in accordance with DIISR requirements for blind peer review.
This issue and previous issues of AUR can be viewed online at www.aur.org.au.
Phone: +613 9254 1910 Fax: +613 9254 1915 Email: editor@aur.org.au
Website www.aur.org.au
For a web reference:
Style Style should follow the APA Referencing Guide, 6th edition. Style sheet available at www.aur.org.au/submissions References in the text should be given in the author-date style: King (2004) argues... or as various authors argue (King, 2004; Markwell, 2007). Page references should be thus: (King, 2004, p. 314).
In accordance with NTEU policy to reduce our impact on the natural environment, this journal is printed on a 30% recycled stock, manufactured by a PEFC Certified mill, which is ECF Certified Chlorine Free. AUR is also available online as an e-book and PDF. Visit www.aur.org.au for details. NTEU members may opt for ‘soft delivery’ (email notification rather than printed copy) for all NTEU magazines. To access your membership details, login to the members’ area at www.nteu.org.au.
Markwell, D. (2007). The challenge of student engagement. http://www.catl.uwa.edu.au/__data/page/95565/Student_ engagement_-_Don_Markwell_-_30_Jan_2007.pdf For URLs, do not include retrieval dates unless the source material may change over time (e.g. wikis). Sub-headings should be typed in lower case, ranged left, with relative importance indicated by A, B etc.
Page references should be used for direct quotations.
Single quotation marks only should be used, except for quotes within quotes. All quotes of more than 50 words should be indented and placed in a separate paragraph.
The reference list should be placed in alphabetical order at the end of the paper, utilising the author-date system.
Dates thus: 30 June 2010.
For a reference to a book:
‘ise’ should be used rather than ‘ize’, e.g. organise not organize.
Gall, M., Gall, J. & Borg, W. (2003). Education Research: An introduction (7th ed.). Allyn and Bacon, New York For a journal reference: King, D.A. (2004). What different countries get for their research spending. Nature 430, pp. 311-316. For a reference to a chapter in a collection: McCollow, J. & Knight, J. (2005). Higher Education in Australia: An Historical Overview, in M. Bella, J. McCollow & J. Knight (eds), Higher Education in Transition, University of Queensland, Brisbane.
‘per cent’ should be used rather than ‘%’ in the text. Abbreviations should be avoided, but if their use is necessary, they should be explained at their first use. Neither male nor female pronouns should be used to refer to groups containing persons of both sexes. Figures, photographs and illustrations should be provided in high resolution (300dpi) EPS, PDF, JPEG or TIFF format, numbered consecutively in the order in which they appear (or are cited). Figures should be drawn precisely and boldly.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012 Published by NTEU
ISSN 0818–8068
Australian Universities’ Review 2
Letter from the editor Ian R Dobson
65 Grand crews: tasting notes on the Group of Eight universities Arthur O’Neill
ARTICLES 3
Academic zombies: a failure of resistance or a means of survival?
Quaffing, tasting panels and tasting notes of the fruit of the vine provide a metaphorical method for picking a university to study at. 71 Uncapped university
Suzanne Ryan
Andee Jones
A zombie is a ‘hypnotised person bereft of consciousness and selfawareness, yet ambulant and able to respond to surrounding stimuli’. Does this sound like an academic near you?
Never before has there been so much talk of ‘excellence and quality assurance’ and never before has there been so little concern for either.
12 Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia: student satisfaction with the learning environment Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
International students: do they like the transnational education Australian universities provide? 22 All beer and skittles? A qualitative pilot study of the role of alcohol in university college life Clarissa Hughes
Is it my shout? Residential college students tend to regard drinking alcohol as an entrenched and highly valued aspect of college culture. 29 Covering the gap: social inclusion, international students and the role of local government Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
Local government could be instrumental in ensuring the social inclusion of international students in our communities. 40 Recession-oscopy: can universities be the light at the end? Steve Mackey
We can avert disaster by thinking! 44 The managerialist university: an economic interpretation Tony Aspromourgos
The shift in the political atmosphere since the end of the 1970s has been the key factor in the changing role of the public sector. 50 Placing a value on academic work: the development and implementation of a timebased academic workload model John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
Do more with less! Time-based workload models are political and transparency is a must. OPINION 61 Transfer of teaching materials between universities Matthias Maiwald & Kathy Harrington
Intellectual property rights: universities must take the lead in both legal and moral aspects.
73 Déjà vu all over again: what next for universities? Warren Bebbington
From Unter den Linden to North Terrace: a saunter through time and space. ‘The way forward is going back to Humboldt’s ideal’ 78 Quality in teaching and learning: one path to improvement Geoff Sharrock
Student feedback for fun and profit. REVIEWS 85 Am I still yearning? University Unlimited: The Monash Story by Graeme Davison & Kate Murphy Review by Jim McGrath
89 Multicultural muddles Transforming a ‘White Australia’: Issues of Racism and Immigration by L Jayasuriya. Review by Katharine Betts
91 Every home should have one! The Joy of English: 100 illuminating conversations about the English language by Jesse Karjalainen Review by Ian R Dobson
92 Inter (sic) the future? Interdisciplinary Higher Education: Perspectives and Practicalities by Martin Davies, Marcia Devlin & Malcolm Tight (Eds) Review by Neil Mudford
94 Hil of discontent Whackademia: An insider’s account of the troubled university by Richard Hil Review by Ian R Dobson
95 Keeping it in the family Europeanizing Education: Governing a new policy space by Martin Lawn & Sotiria Grek Review by Raj Sharma
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Letter from the editor Ian R Dobson
This is the second and final edition of AUR for 2012. It rep-
notes that the emergence of an academic managerial class,
resents a return to business as usual, the last issue having
one that ‘must create a semblance of work for itself’, in
been a special edition on PhD education, produced under
light of the ‘tendency to over-regulation and excessive
the watchful eyes of guest editors Anita Devos and Cath-
bureaucratisation’. Who could disagree!
erine Manathunga.
This issue also incorporates an interesting collection of
This issue includes articles and opinion covering a
opinion, in addition to Arthur O’Neill’s oenological obser-
number of contemporary areas of higher education. Two
vations, mentioned earlier. Matthias Maiwald and Kathy
articles have a focus on international students, with a
Harrington present an interesting piece about moral
paper on transnational education and student satisfaction
intellectual property rights. Is this a form of institutional
in South-East Asia by Iwona Miliszewska and Ewa Sztendur
plagiarism? Universities have to get this right every time
and another on the role of local government in assisting
if they wish to take the moral high ground on others’
with social inclusion, by Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson and
alleged plagiarism.
Jan Schapper.
Andee Jones’ piece Uncapped University has some
Clarissa Hughes’ paper on alcohol and college life is
interesting overlaps with some of the papers in this issue.
based on a pilot study on the subject. Drinking was per-
‘With a cut, cut here, a cut, cut there….’ (funds per student;
ceived as ‘an entrenched and highly valued aspect of col-
entry scores; academic staff at the University of Sydney;
lege culture’. No surprises there! Based on related raw
et cetera).
materials, Arthur O’Neill’s opinion piece ‘Grand Crews…’
Newish VC Warren Bebbington looks into the crystal
provides tasting notes on Group of Eight universities. A
ball to see where we might be headed. This paper is his
fruity little paper, with just enough irony to suit most pal-
inaugural address as vice-chancellor, delivered in Adelaide
ates, I’m sure you will agree.
on 18 July 2012.
Several items in this issue relate to goings-on in the aca-
Finally, Geoff Sharrock has produced a piece that adds
demic world. Suzanne Ryan discusses aspects of the con-
to the discussion started by John Buchanan in the pages
temporary academy, built on the zombie metaphor: the
of AUR last year. He suggests that there can be light at the
place of the living dead in our universities. As she says,
end of the student feedback tunnel. See what you think!
‘Applying the zombie metaphor to academics and their
And then….book reviews: six of them.
response to change seems most apt given our apparent
The last issue’s guest editors finished their Letter from
helplessness in the face of overwhelming change. … what
the editors with several acknowledgements, something
are we doing about it’. What indeed!
I don’t recall having done in the past. In order to atone
Other papers also consider where we are now. John Kenny, Andrew Fluck and Tim Jetson present an interest-
for this oversight, in future and starting with this issue, I intend to follow suit.
ing paper on the implementation of an academic work-
The much-increased demand to be published, to
load model. In the managerialist university, everything
meet all manner of university and government whims
can be quantified (apparently). The need for fairness and
has placed an increased burden on editors and edito-
transparency is paramount. Steve Mackey’s article links
rial boards, but it also means an additional load on peer
academic performance pay, the measurement of research
reviewers and journal production staff.Therefore, I should
output and what he describes as ‘the astonishing pay
like to thank all those responsible for getting this issue to
levels of vice-chancellors to the global financial crisis’. Is
press.Thank you!
this a fair observation? You should decide. Tony Aspromourgas’ article provides an economic interpretation of the managerialist university. Interestingly, he
2
Letter from the editor, Ian R Dobson
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Academic zombies A failure of resistance or a means of survival? Suzanne Ryan University of Newcastle
Successive waves of neoliberal reforms to higher education have taken their toll on the academy. This paper uses the zombie metaphor to discuss the causes and consequences of organisational change on Australian academics as a background to exploring zombiefication as a form of passive resistance and survival. The paper uses the literature and empirical research to chronicle the disintegration of the academic workforce and with it, the idea of a university as a social institution. The paper concludes with the author’s reflection of her own desire to be emancipated from zombiedom.
Universities are increasingly populated by the undead: a listless population of academics, managers, administrators, and students, all shuffling to the beat of the corporatist drum.... In this bleak landscape the source of the zombie contagion lurks in the form of bland, mechanical speech .... peppered with affectless references to citation indices, ERA rankings, ARC applications, FoR codes, AUQA reviews, and the like. ...Many zombies appear incapable of responding meaningfully to the tyranny of performance indicators, shifting promotion criteria, escalating workload demands and endless audits, evaluations and reviews. Try as they may to resist, zombies merely acquiesce to the corporatist line (Gora & Whelan, 2003).
academic resistance to change before reviewing the main
Zombies are the living dead, the undead. The term is figu-
expected to reflect on their situation, take a view, and take
ratively applied to describe a ‘hypnotised person bereft of
action if necessary (Trowler, 1998). There is no dearth of
consciousness and self-awareness, yet ambulant and able
complaints about what is happening in higher education
to respond to surrounding stimuli’ (Wikipedia).This paper
(Lorenz, 2012; Parker, 2012; Parker & Guthrie, 2010), how-
was inspired by a forthcoming book edited by Andrew
ever, over the past one and a half decades research and
Whelan, Chris Moore and Ruth Walker, ‘Zombies in the
commentary suggests that academic resistance is weak,
Academy: Living Death in Higher Education’, the title of
generally relying on individual withdrawal rather than
which struck accord with my own research and obser-
organised action (Anderson, 2008; Parker & Jary, 1995;
vation. Applying the zombie metaphor to academics and
Willmott, 1995).Among the first to consider the academic
their response to change seems most apt given our appar-
response to winds of neoliberal change,Willmott (1995, p.
ent helplessness in the face of overwhelming change.
1002) notes that the erosion of wages, conditions and dis-
However, the real question is why have we allowed this
cretion only managed to generate ‘simmering resentment
to happen and what are we doing about it. Thus the aim
and individual withdrawal from unmonitored responsibili-
of the paper is to explore adaptation and resistance to
ties rather than organised resistance’. The reasons for this
zombiedom. The paper proceeds with an overview of
are not always clear. Parker and Jary (1995) explain it in
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
sources of zombiefication: governance; audit; workload; workforce; and an acquiescent leadership. Forms of adaptation and resistance are then examined and exemplified with research results. The final section explores future options for dealing with the next wave of reform and concludes zombiedom as a form of resistance to change may be the only but not the optimal option.
Academic resistance and change Academics, more than other professional groups, could be
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
3
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
terms of academics gaining a greater sense of worth from
worst of ‘managerialism and measurement’, the sources of
their students and peers than from management while
zombiefication.
Willmott (1995) links lack of organised resistance to academics considering themselves ‘professional’ and ‘above’
Sources of zombiefication
industrial action that in any case is ‘rarely disruptive’. Lack of academic resistance is further accorded to ignorance of
Over the past three decades, Australian higher education
what is happening, academics being ‘ill equipped to inter-
has experienced four major waves of change and is now
pret the significance of change’ let alone resist govern-
undergoing a fifth.The four waves of government induced
ment funding and ‘the management of higher education’
policy and funding reform included massification during
(Willmott, 1995, p. 1023). Individual withdrawal is most
the 1980s, marketisation in the early 1990s, corporatisa-
often in the ‘invisible’ but ‘highly meaningful and valued
tion in the late 1990s and early 2000s, and a fourth wave
activities such as close and continuous staff-student inter-
from 2003 to 2007 marked by increased managerialism,
action’ (Willmott, 1995, p. 1013) as well as the ‘service’
greater efficiencies, compliance, quality and research
areas of academic work.
measurements (Ryan, Guthrie & Neumann, 2008). We are
More recently, in a study of resistance among Austral-
now into a new wave of change, marked by an uncapped
ian academics,Anderson (2008) finds that individual with-
student system, a powerful watchdog,TEQSA, and a second
drawal is the most common form of resistance and also an effective means of protecting values and identity. Respondents in Anderson’s research were angered by managerial discourse and practices but generally refused to engage with them, preferring to com-
generation of Excellence in
The success of these mechanisms [‘bureaucratisation’ and ‘monetarisation’] in ‘reforming’ higher education is seen in the current ‘crisis of authoritarianism’, a crisis engendering fear so that fear becomes a form of paralysis, of zombiedom.
plain to trusted colleagues, or
Research Australia (ERA), all accompanied by even more external and internal measurement, surveillance and control over universities and their academic workforce. Each successive wave has brought with it increased political and economic steer-
refusing or avoiding partici-
ing through what Habermas
pation in managerial directives. At best, academics would
(1984) refers to as the mechanisms of ‘bureaucratisation’
minimise their involvement, complying with the letter,
and ‘monetarisation’, managerialism and money.
but not the spirit, of particular requirements.
The success of these mechanisms in ‘reforming’ higher
Student evaluation processes and performance apprais-
education is seen in the current ‘crisis of authoritarian-
als were frequently mentioned as examples of minimal
ism’ (Giroux 2006), a crisis engendering fear so that fear
compliance. Subversive participation in performance
becomes a form of paralysis, of zombiedom. Just as the
appraisals often involved the cooperation of supervisors
government applies ‘bureaucratisation’ and ‘monetarisa-
who themselves saw the process as a ‘joke’ (Benmore,
tion’ to steer institutions, so in turn institutional managers
cited in Anderson, 2008). On the few occasions that
apply the same mechanisms to control their institutions
Anderson’s participants publicly voiced their complaints
(Marginson & Considine, 2000). Five major causes of zom-
to senior academic managers, their experience was one
biefication arising from the internal application of these
of feeling ‘dismissed and erased and reminded of their
mechanisms are identified, in cause-effect order, as: gov-
disempowerment’ (Anderson, 2008, p. 259). Anderson
ernance; audit and surveillance; workload, workforce; and
concludes that the resistance, although individual, is suf-
the acquiescence of academic leadership.
ficient to prevent managerialism from becoming embedded because it is framed by an understanding of academic
Governance
culture and values that attempt ‘to limit the process of col-
The long held concept of ‘shared governance’ has been
onisation implicit in the managerial project’ (Anderson,
undermined by former colleagues, now managers and
2008, p. 267). In other words, zombiefication is a form of
executives, who have replaced taking the advice of aca-
both resistance and survival. Others, however, are not so
demic bodies with a preference to treat the academic
optimistic believing that long term exposure to the worst
voice with lip service, a necessary inconvenience (Aro-
of managerialism and measurement ultimately ends with
nowitz, 2006). The appointment rather than election
compliance or exit. The following section reviews the
of academic ‘leaders’ combined with their Key Perfor-
4
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
mance Indicators and bonuses, have stifled the collec-
‘routine diagnosis, classification and treatment decisions’
tive voice of academics and reduced them to workers
are sinister and Orwellian (McWilliam, 2004, p. 156) or
instructed from above (Aronowitz, 2006; Pritchard &
even ‘occult’ (Wood, 2010), they are deadening, zombify-
Willmott, 1997). This is a downward spiralling process
ing. Consequences of surveillance by audit are cited as a
whereby the more compliance academics demonstrate
major cause of stress among academics. Indeed, academ-
with these disempowering processes, the stronger the
ics are increasingly viewed as a highly stressed popula-
power imbalance between academics and managers, and
tion whose work and identity are being disfigured by the
the less interested managers become in empowering
‘unwillingness or inability of managers to protect [them]
faculty (Aronowitz, 2006). ‘A lot of top managers enjoy
from the chill winds’ of decreased funding and increased
cruelty.There’s no doubt that we are in a period in which
audit (McWilliam, 2004, p. 161).As the tidiness of the audit
you are a hero if you are cruel’ (Schartz & Kelly, 2005, p.
imperative triumphs over the messiness of academic life,
109). Of course not all our managers are cruel; some are
we become more and more undead. Nor is it possible to
benevolent dictators, themselves the victims of orders
hide. To sit outside the performance culture is to cease
from above. But if academics fail to cooperate voluntarily,
to be recognised or valued (McWilliam, 2004), to be fur-
then managers resort to more authoritarian measures to
ther deadened by exclusion. In addition to being deadly
gain compliance. Reports of bullying and harassment are
weapons, audit and surveillance increase the time and
increasing within the academy, their spread being linked
pressures on academic work.
to the rise of managerialism, increased financial pressures and the increasing numbers of academics at the bottom
Workloads
of the power ladder: the casuals, the probationers, the
Under the burden of increased student numbers and
post-doctoral and the contract academics (Cox & Good-
diversity, supervision of contingent academics and pres-
man, 2005; Thornton, 2004; Lewis, 1999). Although such
sures to research while all the time being measured and
victimisation is the beginning of fear, the onset of zom-
ranked, academic workloads have become unmanageable.
biefication, the real arsenal in colonising the academy are
Metaphors of dying from workload underline the zombie
the accountability measures supplied to university man-
status: ‘swamped’, ‘drowning’, ‘head above water’, ‘buried’
agers by successive governments.
(Jacobs, 2004). Burgeoning academic workloads are cross-
Audit and surveillance
ing the line from being simply ‘productivity’ increases to becoming occupational health and safety risks (Hull,
It is in the changing rules and the measurement regimes
2006; McWilliam, 2004). Increasingly the appeal of control
that we are most zombiefied, infected by measurement
over time is being outweighed by the lack of control over
madness, the audit culture, surveillance. The expres-
workload and decision making. New technologies have
sion, ‘evidence-based’, usually reserved for scientific and
the effect of intensifying work but not reducing it (Jacobs
research endeavours, has been thrown back at academ-
2004). A fundamental change in the nature of academic
ics in the guise of accountability requirements (Shah-
work has been large increases in the proportion of time
jahan, 2011). The effect of the contagion is widespread
spent of administration (Tight, 2010).
as it reduces ‘students to test scores, future slots in the
The growth in expenditure on administration and
labour market .... and teachers to technicians and supervi-
administrators has been noted in Australia (Dobson, 2009;
sors in the education assembly line... [it] is fundamentally
2010) and throughout the world, a growth that Tight
about the negation of human agency, despite the good
(2010, p. 214) views as indicative of ‘the decreasing trust
intentions of individuals at all levels’ (Lipman cited in
in academics’. The ‘administrative bloat’ phenomenon is a
Shahjahan, 2011, p. 196). The discourse that defines evi-
direct consequence of neoliberalist demands that institu-
dence-based accountability, words such as impact, learn-
tions be entrepreneurial, market-orientated, cost-effective
ing outcomes, teaching evaluations, is ‘ultimately shaped
and most of all, accountable (Hogan, 2011). Paradoxically,
by material relations of power that are colonising’ in their
the greater presence of administrators has burdened
effect as they strive to ‘control and tame education .....to
rather than freed academics from administration as their
meet neoliberal ends’ (Shahjahan, 2011, p. 197). Students
work becomes increasingly ‘unbundled’ (Macfarlane,
and academics are rushed through these standardising
2011a), a process whereby academic work is taken apart
processes in a way that leaves little time for ‘reflection,
and given to others. In particular decision-making powers
authenticity, and healing’ (Shahjahan 2011, p. 197). The
to do with curriculum, entry standards, and student
consequences of academic work being subjected to
advice are surrendered to professional administrators
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
5
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
(Hogan, 2011). Without understanding what is happening
a shrinking permanent workforce. Despite these dramatic
and in an attempt to manage our workloads, we inadvert-
changes in the nature of the academic workforce, our
ently begin to develop and dispute among ourselves ‘fair’
institutional leaders remain silent. There are no succes-
and ‘transparent’ workload allocation models, instruments
sion plans to replace the elderly nor new entry points for
that allow work to be further scrutinised, measured,
the young (Larkin & Neumann, 2011; Neumann & Larkin,
and controlled (Hull, 2006). Does our active collusion
2011). Many of those waiting to enter academe are the
in undermining our own interests indicate the depth of
same age as those about to exit (Ryan, Bhattacharyya &
zombiefication to which we have sunk, or is it simply a
McNeil, 2011). However, within this squeeze on entry and
symptom of a stressed and shrinking workforce?
progression, the proportion of the professoriate, our academic leaders, not managers, has grown (May, 2011). But
Workforce
Just as workload and work life have changed, so too has
what has it done to resist?
our workforce. The two waves of reform since the 1990s
Acquiescent academic leadership
were particularly harsh on the composition of the aca-
The idea of a university and the values it incorporates are
demic workforce. Not only are we growing old because
crumbling. The idea that a university should be a place
we haven’t been replaced for a generation and a half
‘in which nothing is beyond question, not even the cur-
(Hugo & Morris, 2010; Hugo, 2008), but we have become
rent and determined figure of democracy’ (Derrida, 2001,
casualised, contingent, insecure, invisible. It is estimated
p. 253) means the university should be a site of resistance
that for every full-time academic, there are almost two
and challenge in which the academic’s role is ‘not to con-
casual or sessionally employed academics (May, 2011) and
solidate authority, but understand, interpret, and question
further, that 50 per cent of all teaching is carried out by
it’ (Giroux, 2006, p. 75).This happens privately among aca-
this army of contingently employed academics (Percy &
demics but our voices rarely go beyond the hallowed halls
Beaumont, 2008).
of academe. Why is this? In a self-reflection on the failure
What does this mean? Firstly, the workload of perma-
of the professoriate to lead the movement against malevo-
nently employed academics has increased, ‘the exploita-
lent change, Barney (2010, p. 382) asks what might it take
tion of part-timers is linked to the excessive demands on
‘to rescue the institution from its final instrumentalisation
full-timers’ (Jacobs, 2004, p. 15). Second, full-time academ-
under the auspice of technological neoliberalism and to
ics have been cushioned from the more unpleasant effects
instead orient it toward...the humanistic ideal’. His answer
of change by an ‘underclass’ of contingent academics.The
lies in the necessity of political intervention in the form of
expansion of this underclass ‘has offered tenured academ-
active resistance led by the professoriate, but he then goes
ics short term relief from the degradation of their work’
on to explain why this will never happen. First, the very
(Willmott, 1995, p. 1003). Additionally, career paths have
nature of politics is a deterrent. Engagement in politics
been blocked. Despite the long queue of contingently and
is ‘exceptional, disruptive, antagonistic, risky and danger-
precariously employed academics such as qualified ses-
ous .... it is not joyful, festive, or fun; it is work, onerous,
sionals, higher degree and post-doctoral students, bang-
dangerous work’ (p. 383). Second, the professoriate enjoys
ing on the door to gain entry into zombieland, the door
the university, including the suffering and pain necessarily
remains resolutely bolted (Edwards, Bexley & Richardson,
endured as a consequence of being part of the university.
2011; Coates & Goedegebuure, 2010). Why they wish to enter this half world is a curious matter, open only to conjecture, not evidence: perhaps as an escape from insecurity? Perhaps passion for a potential promise of free thought? We really don’t know. We do know, however, that for those with a foot in the door, the post docs and probationers, there is pain. The hurdles to entry are continually revised upwards, a doctoral qualifica-
There is nothing that an academic enjoys more than their suffering: careerist students who can’t read and can’t write and can’t think; colleagues who are lazy and insufferable; granting agencies that are biased against our work; incompetent, corrupt, bean counting administrators; governments run by philistines. We enjoy them all. We could not live without them. Our suffering is what distinguishes us (Barney, 2010, p. 384).
tion is no longer sufficient, publications in the ‘right’ jour-
Political action and resistance would not only disrupt
nals are becoming mandatory, the door keeps squeezing
this enjoyment but threaten an obsession with personal
closed. For those of us already in zombieland, our careers
security defined by the ‘reliability of our conventional
our being divided by mysterious means into teaching or
identities, relationships, responsibilities, and rewards’ (p.
research, thus increasing the burden for both functions on
385). The third and final barrier to professorial resistance
6
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
is the fear of insecurity that leads the professoriate to
is has occurred through a process of sedimentation, the
become ‘pragmatic calculators who weigh the potential
speed of which affects various groups within the uni-
costs of resistance and action against its uncertain ben-
versity differently.
efits and decide the risks are too great to bear next to
Evidence for Bleiklie’s concept of sedimentation as a
the certainty of an anaemic, but at least stable, present’ (p.
response to change is found in De Zilwa’s (2007) study of
386). Barney concludes that, in view of these three obsta-
the impact of academic unit culture on adaptive change
cles and in order to assuage guilt, professors’ customary
to external and internal pressures in Australia. De Zilwa
response is to ‘retreat into the consolation of thought .....
found different academic units adapted in different ways
a retreat into enlightenment’ (p. 386). In doing so, they
and to different extents to external pressure. However,
provide a role model for individual withdrawal, zom-
those units most pro-active in their adaptation, the pro-
biedom, as the means to survival within the academy. A
fessional, multidisciplinary and heterogeneous units, had
kinder view of the professoriate is presented by Macfar-
changed their modes of operation and developed new
lane (2011b) as he depicts the professoriate as the victim
markets in teaching and research. Although these units
of disempowerment by mechanisms of bureaucratisation
displayed cultures encouraging of ‘intellectual fervour,
and monetarisation, processes that undermine their abil-
innovation, flexibility [and] risk-taking’ (De Zilwa, 2007, p.
ity and opportunity to lead.
571), they were also most aligned to the university goals with natural markets for the development of research and
Adaptation and resistance
teaching. On the other hand, academic units least able to adapt were those with strongly homogeneous organi-
When academic culture is weakened and shared beliefs
sational cultures but lacking in their managers’ ‘zeal for
are seriously threatened, ‘the result can be destructive
marketisation and entrepreneurialism’ (p. 571) and were
conflicts between faculties, loss of personal morale and
completely reliant on student fees. Both types of units
personal alienation’ (Dill, 1982, p. 304). Like politics, most
were conscious of conflicts arising from the university’s
of us want to avoid such consequences and so we can
drive for revenue and the unit’s desire to maintain qual-
be persuaded to accept new organisational values and
ity and standards in addition to the general lack of trust
identities if we understand them as perpetuating what
between university managers and academic units. Results
had previously given meaning and a ‘sense of distinctive-
from De Zilwa’s study suggest that those in the interdisci-
ness to [our] working environment (and so feed into
plinary units and the professional fields found adaptation
[our] sense of identity)’ (Henkel, 2005, p. 159). This pro-
easier than those in the more traditional discipline-based
cess is explained by Bleiklie (2005, p. 200) as a process
units who were more likely to ignore or resist change. But
of ‘sedimentation’ whereby ‘new ideals are layered on top
for how long will this distinction continue as the mania
of existing ones’ in a form of organic growth that absorbs
for market and money is overlaid with more recent imper-
new values without shedding the old. He argues that insti-
atives to publish?
tutional and individual autonomy previously sustained
My own research reflects the findings of De Zilwa, at
each other so that institutional autonomy was necessary
least in the pre-2003 environment. But I also found that
to ‘allow the maturation and promotion of values. Insti-
adaptation could not be sustained following the fourth
tutional autonomy is not found in specific administrative
and most brutal wave of reform. I interviewed 21 academ-
arrangements, but in how the institution functions to pro-
ics about their lives and values in three graduate schools
tect its values. In the past, the focus was internal and the
of business in 2002/2003 and the same individuals again
collegial body was the means of functioning, including
in 2008 in the wake of the fourth wave of reform. For
negotiating conflicts between individual and institutional
ethical reasons, the three schools were combined into the
autonomy. Once the institution begins to serve the needs
one school, under the pseudonym, the Australian Graduate
of external stakeholders such as government and industry,
School of Business (AGSB).The results for the two periods
both institutional and individual autonomy are circum-
were stunningly different. I used storytelling based on the
scribed by the needs of others and value shifts occur.
average participant’s story to present the results in a way
Current imperatives to commodify teaching, to
that would touch a nerve with readers (Ryan, 2010). The
commercialise research had no part in the traditional
story opens with senior lecturer, Bill, the average partici-
academic value set but are now a part of our daily dis-
pant, living a busy but contented life within a strong col-
course. Because new values are not clearly articulated,
legial but entrepreneurial school whose success is a direct
the change cannot be said to have been radical, rather
result of earlier changes to the higher education system.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
7
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
His view of life responds well to De Zilva’s adaptive aca-
undead, zombiefied. But once undead, where do we go
demic units, he was riding the crest of an entrepreneurial
to from here?
wave, enjoying the excitement and inclusion of breaking new barriers in interdisciplinarity (Ryan & Neumann,
Options for dealing with future change
2011) and entrepreneurialism (Ryan & Guthrie, 2009). In the subsequent five to six years, Associate Professor Bill,
Right now we stand on the brink of a new wave of reform.
as he had become, is increasingly unhappy and detached
We can expect more students, more diverse students,
as his institution’s managerialism increasingly affects his
more competition, more audits, more performance based
everyday life and identity. While marketisation and corpo-
funding, more ERA, more pathways, more private provid-
ratisation initially allowed Bill to live an exciting academic
ers, more work, more unbundling of our work. But can we
life, the fourth wave of change, managerialism and micro-
expect more academics? More casually employed academ-
management, signalled the end to excitement, instead
ics, yes indeed; otherwise the new reforms are silent on
challenging his values and identity. The following extract
the academic workforce. So what are our options? adapt-
from the story of Bill in 2008 demonstrates his decline
ing? awakening? leaving? or withdrawing further in zom-
into zombiedom.
biedom? Possibilities of adaptation or conversion to the
On the subject of academic managers, Bill no longer believes that the AGSB culture is stronger than the deans that pass through it. In recent years there has been a high turnover of deans, some were on the side of the University and trying to bring the AGSB under control while others fought against University control. Either way, the University management won out, with or without the help of the deans. The AGSB culture was forced to change as so many of its academics abandoned ship, including the deans who had fought to maintain its autonomy. Collegiality and entrepreneurialism no longer come to mind when Bill describes the new culture. He now uses words like alienated, disengaged, and transactional. Although still valuing the freedom over what and how he teaches and researches and uses his time, Bill has lost his feeling of ownership and belonging toward to the AGSB, withdrawing into his own work and world. The obsession with making money and measuring publications has undermined his understanding of ‘quality’ in teaching and research and intensified his cynicism of official versions of ‘quality’. The departure of colleagues along with changes to governance structures altered the School’s culture to the point where Bill feels like a factory employee rather than an academic colleague. The passion for his School has turned to indifference. Despite his continual search for a new position outside the AGSB, Bill is held back from ever following through with an application. In the back of his mind rings the comment of former colleagues that it’s not very different elsewhere, it’s just that the pain of change came earlier in other places so it is easier to get on with life (Ryan 2010, p. 11).
current round of change are offered in the form of devel-
As can be seen from this extract, exit was a common
corporatisation of higher education has had the effect of
strategy for dealing with unwanted change, followed by
turning universities into machine bureaucracies, factories,
individual withdrawal. Of the original 21 academics in
Fordist production lines, the very antithesis of the sup-
my study, only four remained in the same school in 2011,
posedly ‘agile’ organisation (Parker & Jary, 1995; Pritchard
albeit in larger, merged business schools. Initially, adapta-
& Willmott, 1997). Structural obstacles aside, the rhetoric
tion suited this multidisciplinary professional school but
of ‘agile leadership’ relies on a workforce whose agility
eventually the level of sedimentation reached a limit,
comes from fear, insecurity and an absence of ethos (Gil-
a limit no longer tolerable without resort to becoming
lies, 2011). Hence, rather than be resurrected by ‘agility’,
8
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
opment, either individual self-development and/or the development of agile leadership. Since the mid-1990s, the commencement of our steepest decent into zombiedom, our institutions have offered us the salvation of self-development courses and workshops, opportunities to adapt to change better. We are given workshopping opportunities to learn how to teach, to present, to write, to count, to supervise, to research, to resolve conflicts, to manage our time, our stress, our health, and finally, to even apply for promotion (McWilliam, 2004). Given it takes an average of ten years to prepare for an academic career (Coates & Goedegebuure, 2010), these workshops present as somewhat redundant or simply therapeutic (McWilliam, 2004). In any case, we have little time to indulge in these ‘adaptation’ exercises. Agile leadership and organisation is an alternative to facilitate adaptation. Indeed for some, the resurrection of the zombie will come through ‘agile’ leadership and organisation, leaders who are not only flexible but go a step further to be dynamic and proactive in the face of ever changing landscapes (Billot & Codling, 2011). The term ‘agility’, once reserved for the manufacturing sector has found its way into education. Rules, regulations, traditions and hierarchies are an anathema to the ‘agile’ company that is instead ‘robust, resilient, responsive, flexible, innovative, and adaptable’ (Gillies, 2011, p. 210). Ironically,
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
academics risk being further deadened by it, but then
2005) which would tend to indicate a diminishing future
again, perhaps this is the plan. More optimistically, the
for the profession, an unwillingness to replenish the
discourse of agility is simply a means of ‘fabricating and
workforce with anything else but contingent labour. This
representing, of constructing that which it wishes to see’
in turn begs the question of whether the younger gen-
(Gillies, 2010, p. 211), an illusion. Its false promise as a
eration of academics is an accepting product of the new
form of adaptation is too transparent, even for a fearful
system or able to recognise and resist its failures. Archer
academic.
(2008a; 2008b), in a rich but limited study, finds young
Our second option for dealing with the future is to
academics to be fully aware of and resistant to the del-
‘voice’ our frustrations, to resist collectively, to go beyond
eterious effects of managerialism on their behaviour and
whinging among ourselves in the corridors and confer-
health. Unfortunately their resistance takes the same form
ences, and speak out to broader and more powerful audi-
as their older colleagues, withdrawal. Despite this knowl-
ences. Aside from the odd industrial dispute over wages,
edge, large scale surveys inexplicably suggest tens of
we have generally avoided this form of resistance, how-
thousands of higher degree students and contingent aca-
ever there are some small signs of change. The econo-
demics (Edwards et al., 2010; Junor, 2004), want to enter
mists are beginning to stir, finally realising that having
the profession on a permanent basis. Hence, for each exit,
contributed to the current state of higher education; they
the long queue of contingent academics provides but
have used the wrong model and rectification is required.
another opportunity for further casualising the profes-
They are at last turning their theories to the failures of
sion. As an option for dealing with change, exit is simply a
higher education and more importantly they are gaining
form of individual escape, a form that exacerbates rather
the attention of the public media (Bennett, 2011). The
than addresses the underlying issues.
media is important, especially if the public is sympathetic.
Thus we are left with the fourth, final, and ongoing
During the previous two decades of severe change, most
option, ever greater individual withdrawal into zombie-
of us believed what the politicians told us, there were no
dom. But just how effective is this strategy? Gora and
votes in higher education, nothing to be gained by invest-
Whelan, (2010) see zombiefication as a possible means
ing in rather than controlling the system (Aronowitz,
of survival, but not necessarily change: ‘occasionally it
2006; Willmott, 1995). That may have changed. A recent
is necessary .....to pass as undead to survive. Paradoxi-
survey of the Australian public shows concern about what
cally, it is the unthinking intellectual rigor mortis of the
it perceives as a deterioration of an important social insti-
present bureaucratic plague that enables some to survive
tution, higher education (NTEU, 2011). Such concern pro-
the worst aspects of zombification’. More scholarly sup-
vides an important audience for our voice, if we can use it.
port for this possibility comes from our peer reviewed
Collective action through industrial disputation over pay
literature. Concluding a paper on the impacts of emerging
claims has rarely met with public sympathy; however, the
knowledge regimes, Bleiklie (2005, p. 209) observes that
public might feel better disposed if industrial action were
‘academic capitalism has had a stronger impact on ideol-
centred on our health, on issues of occupational health
ogy and discourse than on the way in which universities
and safety arising from workload (Trounson, 2011) and
are operated’. Similarly, Krucken’s (2003) investigation
issues around ensuring a sustainable higher education
of change among German universities found the general
system. Unhealthy zombies are not good for business, so
pace of university reform was well behind the political
governments and university managements might just be
rhetoric and ‘best practice’ case studies. Krucken argues
open to hearing about cures. Overall, the possibilities of
that the ‘idea of a university was an ‘organisational myth’
the ‘voice’ option being exercised on any large scale are
divorced from the reality of organisational life. Despite
slim but as Gora and Whelan (2010) point out,‘pockets of
the idea not being a reality, it is a vision that lies at the
resistance’ will continue: ‘the most curious aspect of this
heart of every academic and university, providing ‘mean-
zombie plague is not its devastating effects on those who
ing through reference to a commonly shared identity’ and
stagger through the intellectual rubble but the pockets of
creating boundaries against external influences (Krucken,
resistance that it fails to quash’.
2003, p. 327).
The exit option, leaving the academy, is an interesting
This notion is echoed in the words of a respondent
one. On one hand, escapes from zombieland are difficult
from my own research: ‘my values about the worth of
except through retirement (Dany, Louvet & Valette, 2011).
what academics do for the community have not dimin-
On the other hand, there are more exits than there are
ished but my behaviour has’. As comforting as this might
entries into the permanent academic workforce (Hugo,
seem, there is always the danger that values must ulti-
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
9
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
mately align with behaviour. Indeed, Davies and Petersen (2005) argue that it is not possible to do without being, that a failure to resist actively is a symptom of having been attacked by the neoliberal plague. The plague forestalls resistance ‘by persuading each individual academic to treat the effects of neoliberalism as personal successes, responsibilities and failings rather than as a form of institutional practice in need of critique and transformation’ (Davies & Petersen, 2005, p.77).
Conclusion Personally, I am not convinced that withdrawal works well as a successful means of resistance over the long term, especially if it simply allows us to survive as zombies rather than escape the plague. How long can one tolerate the cognitive dissonance from behaving in one way while thinking in another? Like the participants in my research, I yearn for action, in Habermasian terms, for ‘emancipation’, for a way out of zombiedom. I’ve been around long enough not to respect authority dressed up in titles and positions, I know there are academics at all levels who command authority through integrity and belief in a better system. I am in my 50s and experience all those feelings of frustration captured so well in the work of Larkin and Neumann (2011). I don’t want to give up that desire for resistance, for a different form of academic life, for questioning accepted truths, for finding a humanitarian not utilitarian end to the academy. I don’t just want to turn up at symposiums and conferences and publish for the enjoyment of like-minded masochistic academics. I want to be involved in challenge and change. Whenever I feel myself shuffling to the zombie beat, I take heart from the words of another of my research respondents: ‘although we’ve been crushed, I think there is still a kernel of desire to return’. So, perhaps zombiedom can be construed as an effective form of resistance, a form that goes beyond survival to protecting and hopefully nourishing that kernel of desire for future emancipation. But the questions remain as to whether we can we survive by simply sheltering away, waiting for the neoliberal storm to pass? And, even if we do, will we have the memory, the energy, the identity left to reactivate the academy as we would like it? Suzanne Ryan is an associate professor at the Newcastle Business School, University of Newcastle, Australia
10
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
References Anderson, G. (2008). Mapping academic resistance in the managerial university, Organization, 15(2), 251-270. Archer, L. (2008a). Younger academics’ constructions of ‘authenticity’, ‘success’ and professional identity, Studies in Higher Education, 33(4), 385-403. Archer, L. (2008b). The new neoliberal subjects? Young/er academics’ constructions of professional identity, Journal of Education Policy, 23(3), 265–85. Aronowitz, S. (2006). Should Academic Unions Get Involved in Governance, Liberal Education, 92 (4), 22-27. Barney, D. (2010). Miserable Priests and Ordinary Cowards: On Being a Professor, T.O.P.I.A. Canadian Journal of Cultural Studies, 23-24(Fall), 381-387. Bennett, J. (2011). Academonics Hard to say but here to stay, Campus Review, July 18. Billot, J. & Codling, A. (2011). The Tertiary Research Milieu: Agile Management for Positive Engagement. In K. Krause, M. Buckridge, C. Grimmer & S. PurbrickIllek (eds) Research and Development in Higher Education: Reshaping Higher Education, 34, Gold Coast, Australia, 4 – 7 July, 5—60. Bleiklie, I. (2005). Academic Leadership and Emerging Knowledge Regimes, in I. Bleiklie & M. Henkel (eds), Governing Knowledge: A Study of Continuity and Change in Higher Education – A Festchrift in Honour of Maurice Kogan, Springer, The Netherlands, 189-212. Coates, H. & Goedegebuure, L. (2010). Research Briefing: The Real Academic Revolution, L H Martin Institute on Higher Education Leadership and Management. Cox, E. & Goodman, J. (2005). Belittled; The state of play on bullying, Australian Universities’ Review, 48 (1), 28-34. Dany, F., Louvel, S. & Valette, A. (2011). Academic Careers: The limits of the ‘boundaryless’ approach and the power of promotion scripts, Human Relations, 64 (7), 971-996. Davies, B. & Bendix, E. (2005). Neo-liberal discourse in the Academy: The forestalling of (collective) resistance, LATISS – Learning and Teaching in the Social Sciences, 2(2), 77-98. De Zilwa, D. (2007). Organisational culture and values and the adaptation of academic units to Australian universities, Higher Education, 54 (4), 557-574. Derrida, J. (2001). The Future of the Profession or the Unconditional University, in L. Simmons & H. Worth (eds) Derrida Down Under, Dunmarra Press, Auckland, NZ. Dill, D. (1982). The management of academic culture: Notes on the management of meaning and social integration, Higher Education, 11 (3), 303-320 Dobson, I. (2009). Hey Big Spender! An analysis of Australian universities and how much they pay their general staff, Australian Universities’ Review, 51(1), 39-47. Dobson, I. (2010). Uneven development: The disjointed growth of university staffing since Dawkins, People and Place, 18(1), 31-38. Edwards, D. Bexley, E. & Richardson, S. (2010). Regenerating the Academic Workforce: The careers, intentions and motivations of research higher degree students in Australia, ACER. Gillies, D. (2011). Agile bodies: a new imperative in neoliberal governance, Journal of Education Policy, 26 (2), 207-223. Giroux, H. A. (2006). Higher Education Under Siege: Implications for Public Intellectuals, Thought and Action, Fall, 63- 78. Gora, J. & Whelan, A. (2010). Invasion of the aca-zombies, The Australian Higher Education Supplement, 3 November.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
Habermas, J. (1984). The Theory of Communicative Action, Volume One, Reason and the rationalisation of society, T. McCarthy (transl), Beacon Press, Boston. Henkel, M. (2005). Academic Identity and Autonomy in a Changing Policy Environment, Higher Education, 49 (1-2), 155-176. Hogan, J. (2011). Is higher education spending more on adminstration and, if so, why? Perspectives: Policy and Practice in Higher Education, 15 (1), 7-13. Hug,o G. (2008). The demographic outlook for Australian universities’ academic staff. CHASS Occasional Paper No. 6, Council for the Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, Retrieved from http://www.chass.org.au/papers/ PAP20081101GH.php Hugo, G. & Morriss, A. (2010). Investigating the Ageing Academic Workforce: Stocktake, University of Adelaide, Adelaide. Hull, R. (2006). Workload allocation models and ‘collegiality’ in academic departments, Journal of Organisational Change Management, 19 (1), 38-53. Jacobs, J. A. (2004). The Faculty Time Divide, Sociological Forum, 19 (1), 3-27. Junor, A. (2004). Casual university work: choice, risk, inequity and the case for regulation, Economic and Labour Relations Review, 14(2), 276-304. Krucken, G. (2003). Learning the ‘new, new thing’: On the role of path dependency in university structures, Higher Education, 46, 315-339. Larkin, J. & Neumann, R. (2011). Perception of Australian academics aged in their 50s: Performance management and psychological contract challenges, paper presented at the Irish Academy of Management Conference 2011, Dublin, Ireland, August-September.
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Parker, L. & Guthrie, J. (2010). Business Schools in an age of globalisation, Accounting, Auditing and Accountability Journal, 23 (1), 5-13. Parker, M. & Jary, D. (1995). The McUniversity: organisation, management and academic subjectivity, Organization, 2(2), 319-338. Percy, A. & Beaumont, R. (2008). The casualisation of teaching and the subject at risk, Studies in Continuing Education 30(2), 145-157. Pritchard, C. & Willmott, H. (1997). Just How Managed is the McUniversity? Organization Studies, 18 (2), 287-316. Ryan, S. (2010). Storytelling in Critical Research: The tale of a business school, paper presented at ANZAAM 2010 Conference, Melbourne, 4-8 December. Ryan, S., Battacharyya, A. & McNeil, K. (2011). Academic Work: A sessionalised future? Paper submitted to ANZAAM 2011 Conference, Wellington, December. Ryan, S. & Guthrie, J. (2009) Collegial entrepreneurialism: Australian graduate schools of business, Public Management Review, 11 (317-344). Ryan, S., Guthrie, J. & Neumann, R. (2008). ‘The Case of Australian Higher Education: Performance, Markets and Government Control’, Chapter 9 in C. Mazza, P. Quattrone and A. Riccaboni (eds), European Universities in Transition: Issues, Models and Cases, Edward Elgar, London, 171-187. Ryan, S. & Neumann, R. (2011). Interdisciplinarity in an era of new public management: a case study of graduate business schools, Studies in Higher Education, doi10.1080/03075079.2011.571669 Shahjahan, R.A. (2011). Decolonising the evidence-based education and policy movement: revealing the colonial vestiges in education policy, research and neoliberal reform, Journal of Education Policy, 26 (2), 181-206.
Lewis, D. (1999). Workplace bullying: interim findings of a study in further and higher education in Wales, International Journal of Manpower, 20(1-2), 106-118.
Schwartz, P. & Kelly, K. (2005) A cantankerous interview with Peter Schwartz and Kevin Kelly, in J. C. Wood & M. C. Wood (eds) Peter F Drucker: Critical Evaluations in Business and Management, Routledge, UK, 106-113.
Lorenz, C. (2012) If You’re So Smart, Why Are You under Surveillance? Universities, Neoliberalism, and New Public Management, Critical Inquiry, 38 (3): 599-629.
Thornton, M. (2004). Corrosive Leadership (Or Bullying by Another Name): A Corollary of the Corporatised Academy? Australian Journal of Labour Law, 17(2), pp. 161–184.
Macfarlane, B. (2011a). The Morphing of Academic Practice: Unbundling and the Rise of the Para-academic, Higher Education Quarterly, 65(1): 59-73.
Tight, M. (2010). Are academic workloads increasing? The post-war survey evidence in the UK, Higher Education Quarterly, 64 (2), 200-215.
Macfarlane, B. (2011b). Professors as intellectual leaders: formation, identity and role, Studies in Higher Education, 36(1), 57-73.
Trounson, A. (2011). ‘Nursing staff’s heavier burden’, The Australian Higher Education Supplement, June 8, p. 37.
Marginson, S. & Considine, M. (2000). The Enterprise University: Power, Governance and Reinvention in Australia, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Trowler, P. (1998). Academics Responding to Change, New Higher Education Frameworks and Academic Cultures, SRHE and Open University Press: Buckingham.
May, R. (2011). Casualisation; here to stay? The modern university and its divided workforce, 25th AIRAANZ Conference 2011. Auckland, New Zealand.
Wikipedia (n.d.). Retrieved from http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zombie
May R., Strachan G., Broadbent, K. & Peetz, D. (2011). The Casual Approach to University Teaching; Time for a Re-Think? , in K. Krause, M. Buckridge, C. Grimmer & S. Purbrick-Illek (eds) Research and Development in Higher Education: Reshaping Higher Education 34, Higher Education Research and Development Society of Australasia, Inc., Gold Coast, Australia, 4 – 7 July.
Willmott, H. (1995). Managing the Academics: Commodification and Control in the Development of University Education in the U.K., Human Relations, 48(9), 993-1027. Winefield, T., Boyd, C., Saebel, J. & Pignata, S. (2008). Update on National University Stress Study, Australian Universities’ Review, 50 (1), 20-29.
McWilliam, E. L. (2004). Changing the Academic Subject, Studies in Higher Education, 29 (2), 151-163. Neumann, R. & Larkin, J. (2011). Universities and the Aging Academic Workforce: Where is the Leadership? Paper presented at the 2011 European Academic Conference, Barcelona, Spain, July. National Tertiary Education Union (NTEU). (2011). Media Release: Survey says Govt should pay more for university education, 21 June, Retrieved on 2 July 2011 from http://www.nteu.org.au/media/releases Parker, L. D. (2012). From Privatised to Hybrid Corporatised Higher Education: A Global Financial Management Discourse, Financial Accountability & Management, 28 (3), 247-268.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Academic zombies, Suzanne Ryan
11
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia Student satisfaction with the learning environment Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur Victoria University, Australia
In view of the strong growth of transnational education programmes in Australian universities, there is growing interest in the experiences of students participating in such programmes. This article reports on the perceived student satisfaction with several aspects of their transnational programmes, including instructors, technology, and programme management and administration. Data for the study were collected from approximately five hundred transnational students participating in eight programmes offered by four Australian universities in Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore and Vietnam. The article outlines the findings of the study, highlighting the need for incorporating student perspectives in the provision of transnational education programmes. The article concludes by discussing the potential application of its findings in reviewing existing and planning new transnational education programmes.
Introduction
pating in eight programmes offered by four Australian universities in Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore and Vietnam.
Transnational education, often referred to as offshore education, describes all programmes in which the learners are located in a country different from the one where the
Australian transnational education – perspectives and characteristics
awarding institution is based. With rapid expansion of the transnational education market, more and more universi-
There are a great number of different relationships
ties join the ranks of transnational education providers,
between different types of transnational education pro-
or expand their transnational education offerings. For
viders, delivery mechanisms, and programmes/awards.
Australia, one of the main providers of transnational edu-
Charting these is a difficult task, as the constantly evolv-
cation in South East Asia (Banks et al., 2010), satisfying
ing, highly complex situation includes an array of part-
the needs of the highest demand disciplines in the region
nerships, consortia, articulation agreements, modes of
– computing and business – is of vital importance. Thus,
delivery, public, private, off-shore, for-profit and corporate
there is growing interest in the experiences of the par-
elements. Various models of teaching can also be found,
ticipating transnational students. This article responds to
ranging from full programme delivery at an offshore
this interest and presents the transnational students’ per-
campus, combined face-to-face and flexible delivery
spectives on their transnational education programmes; it
option, and e-learning (Dunn & Wallace, 2006; McBurnie
relates the views of nearly five hundred students partici-
& Ziguras, 2007; Miliszewska & Sztendur, 2010).
12
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
In terms of demand, it is estimated that the demand for transnational higher education in Asian countries
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Student perspectives on transnational education programme effectiveness
(excluding China) will reach nearly 500,000 students by 2020 (OECD, 2009). This presents both a challenge
In view of the strong growth of transnational programmes
and an opportunity for Australian universities, who are
in Australian universities (Universities Australia 2009),
key transnational providers in the region. The Australian
there is growing interest in the experiences of students
Department of Education, Science and Training estimates
participating in the transnational programmes. According
that, already approximately one in every four interna-
to Chapman and Pyvis (2005, 40), no one is in a better
tional students in the Australian education and train-
position to comment on these experiences than students
ing system is enrolled offshore (DEST, 2005, 7). In 2007,
themselves: they are the ultimate ‘insiders and experts’;
almost all (93 per cent) of the 71,000 Australian transna-
yet, the voice of the student is conspicuously missing
tional higher education students were internal students at
from research literature. In consideration of this need, a
an offshore campus – only 4.6 per cent were external (dis-
research study was conducted in 2007-2008 to examine
tance education) and 2.4 per cent were multi-modal (AEI,
the issue of transnational programme effectiveness from
2009). In terms of mode of attendance, only 65 per cent
the student perspective (Miliszewska & Sztendur, 2010).
of offshore students were studying full time. The top five sources of offshore students were Singapore, Malaysia,
Methodology
China, Hong Kong and Vietnam (AEI, 2009). While Singapore, Malaysia and Hong Kong have dominated transna-
The study involved students in eight transnational com-
tional education provision by Australian universities over
puting programmes offered in Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singa-
the years, recently China and Vietnam have emerged as
pore and Vietnam by Australian universities; 469 students
key offshore markets (Banks et al., 2010).
participated. Table 1 presents a breakdown of student
A typical transnational programme offered by Australian
numbers across providing universities, locales and pro-
universities is in the field of study of business, information
grammes; it also includes information about the mode of
technology, and education (Denman, 2009); in the past
study (part-time ‘p/t’, full-time ‘f/t’) and the mode of teach-
few years, health has also emerged as a popular field of
ing (both Australian and local staff are involved in face-to-
study for transnational students (AVCC, 2005). In terms
face teaching ‘both’, or local staff only ‘local’).
of delivery mode, a typical programme relies on face-to-
The choice of locales was deliberate: Hong Kong and
face teaching or supported distance education. The pro-
Singapore are important markets for Australian transna-
gramme involves a partner which is a private education
tional programmes, and are also well-developed territo-
institution or public education institution, and awards an
ries where English is commonly spoken; hence, students
Australian qualification. Such programmes are offered in
participating in the study were likely to have the benefit
Singapore, Malaysia, China and Hong Kong (Universities
of suitable technological infrastructure and adequate lin-
Australia, 2009). These countries host the largest number
guistic skills. Malaysia and Vietnam were chosen to check
of Australian transnational programmes, and provide the
if limited technological infrastructure and language pro-
largest number of transnational students; together these markets account for more than 70 per cent of
Table 1: Number of students participating in the study
all transnational programmes of Australian universities (Universities Australia, 2009).
Hong Kong
Malaysia
is responsible for curriculum, teaching and assess-
University1 Programme1 (N=131) p/t, both
Programme2 (N=44) f/t, both
ment, and quality assurance; the responsibility for
University2
Programme3 (N=69) f/t, local
programme, partner institutions, overseas govern-
University3 Programme6 (N=44) p/t, both
Programme7 (N=32) f/t, local
ments, and international organisations also partici-
University4
In terms of responsibility, the Australian university
provision of study location, marketing, promotion and financial administration rests with the offshore partner. Although, on the whole, the Australian university is responsible for the quality assurance of the
pate in this responsibility (Banks et al., 2010).
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Singapore
Vietnam
Programme4 (N=46) p/t, local
Programme5 (N=33) f/t, local
Programme8 (N=70) p/t, both
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
13
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
ficiency would have a bearing on student perceptions.
when the probability of obtaining the observed differ-
Similarly, the choice of computing programmes was also
ence by chance is small, compared to a significance level;
deliberate: the intention was to seek the views of students
the most commonly used significance levels are 0.05,
who were technology savvy; hence, they were less likely
0.01, and 0.001. It should be noted that to protect the ano-
to have negative perceptions of the use of technology in
nymity and the privacy of Australian universities and their
their programmes because of techno-phobia alone.
transnational partners, this article does not provide any
The programmes operating in part-time mode involved
specific information about the participating institutions.
students who had previous approved tertiary qualifications. Students were normally in full-time employment, and usually studied six subjects per year – two subjects
Findings and discussion
per term. The full-time programmes typically involved stu-
Student satisfaction with current programmes
dents who were high school leavers. In the programmes
This section reports on perceived student satisfaction with
where teaching was shared by Australian and local aca-
several aspects of their transnational programmes, includ-
demics, lecturers from Australia were responsible for the
ing: instructors, technology, programme management and
design of curriculum, detailed teaching plans, continuous
coordination, and overall programme effectiveness. It high-
and final assessment, as well as face-to-face delivery of
lights the issue of differing levels of satisfaction with Uni-
twenty five per cent of the programmes; local lecturers
versity (Australian) and local (offshore) instructors among
taught the remaining part of the programmes. The pro-
students of the evaluated programmes where both types of
grammes relied on the Internet for communication, e.g.
instructors participated in teaching. The section also pre-
subject Web sites, bulletin boards, and email. Students met
sents analyses of student satisfaction with the programmes
with lecturers and fellow students through face-to-face
in relation to offering institution, overseas location, and
sessions, and benefited from Web-based support between
types of instructors involved in programme delivery.
sessions. Programmes taught exclusively by local staff fol-
Table 2 presents a summary of an overall student satisfac-
lowed the curriculum detailed by the host university from
tion with various attributes of their current programmes,
Australia and accessed online resources provided by the
grouped in three broad categories of Instruction/Instruc-
host university; however, Australian lecturers did not par-
tor, Technology, and Programme management and coordi-
ticipate in face-to-face teaching.
nation; the satisfaction was measured using a five-point
Data were collected through a quantitative survey to
Likert scale, where 1 indicated very poor, 2 – poor, 3 –
allow participants to note which elements of the learning
average, 4 – good, and 5 indicated very good.
experience contributed to, or limited, their satisfaction on an ordinal (ranked) scale, hence non-parametric tests,
Student satisfaction with instructors and instruction
such as the Wilcoxon signed-rank test and the Friedman
The average ranked scores related to students’ satisfaction
test, were used to analyse the data. The Wilcoxon signed-
with attributes in the Instructor/Instruction category are
rank test is used to determine whether there is a statisti-
reported in Table 3. For each programme, the Friedman test
cally significant difference between two related samples
was used to determine whether there were significant dif-
or two repeated measurements, and the Friedman test is
ferences in student satisfaction with the attributes in this
appropriate for three or more related samples or repeated
category. Student level of satisfaction varied significantly
measurements. A difference is statistically significant
across the attributes in all programmes except Prog7.
with the programme. Student satisfaction was measured
Table 2: Average student satisfaction with current programmes University & local instructors
Local instructors only
Prog1 Hong Kong
Prog6 Hong Kong
Prog2 Malaysia
Prog8 Singapore
Prog3 Malaysia
Prog7 Malaysia
Prog4 Singapore
Prog5 Vietnam
Instructor/ Instruction
3.40
3.45
3.27
3.65
3.39
3.41
3.32
3.76
Technology
3.29
3.07
3.04
3.64
3.22
3.26
3.23
3.56
Management
3.13
3.13
3.17
3.62
3.21
3.42
3.15
3.50
Total satisfaction 3.27
3.22
3.15
3.64
3.27
3.36
3.23
3.61
14
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Table 3: Average satisfaction with Instructor/Instruction University & local instructors
Local instructors only
Prog1 HK
Prog6 HK
Prog2 Mal
Prog8 Sin
Prog3 Mal
Prog7 Mal
Prog4 Sin
Prog5 Viet
Clarity of programme objectives, requirements, and assessments.
12.96
14.85
15.13
13.88
10.04
9.64
11.18
10.71
Time given in classes to copy down the presented lecture material.
11.26
10.98
13.14
10.83
10.18
8.14
10.23
9.02
Production quality of the lecture presentations.
12.16
14.67
15.29
13.42
11.03
10.36
10.61
8.12
Use of electronic media in lecture presentations.
12.63
14.22
12.75
13.31
11.63
12.00
9.75
10.90
Usefulness of lecture presentations in understanding the programme content.
12.42
11.52
15.93
12.81
11.76
9.47
10.75
8.87
Time taken to mark and return tests and written assignments.
10.06
6.81
11.04
8.64
7.65
9.93
8.68
6.83
Use of electronic media for assignment submission and feedback.
10.23
12.30
10.57
12.10
9.81
10.76
7.14
11.48
Use of instruction that helped you better understand the programme material.
12.64
11.93
12.38
11.40
8.08
8.98
9.92
8.69
Quality of the classrooms environment (e.g.noise)
13.40
14.42
11.23
14.00
6.73
9.47
8.83
9.23
Extent to which instructors made you feel that you were part of the class.
12.96
14.25
12.17
13.83
9.46
9.66
10.64
10.75
Instructors’ communication skills.
14.41
14.49
16.70
15.07
11.65
11.19
11.81
12.12
University instructors’ organisation and preparation for classes.
13.78
13.34
15.33
14.32
Local instructors’ organisation and preparation for classes.
12.64
13.92
10.21
13.82
12.46
9.88
11.11
9.23
University instructors’ dedication to students and teaching.
14.03
14.73
15.70
13.23
Local instructors’ dedication to students and teaching.
14.32
14.55
11.02
14.73
11.78
11.34
11.99
11.62
University instructors’ teaching ability.
16.15
14.57
16.54
15.39
Local instructors’ teaching ability.
13.79
13.30
10.06
14.57
11.03
11.12
10.76
10.44
University instructors’ encouragement to participate in class.
15.32
11.82
14.81
12.25
Local instructors’ encouragement to participate in class.
14.53
13.47
11.38
13.25
10.87
8.67
9.95
9.71
Telephone/email accessibility of the University instructors outside of classes.
10.60
12.84
10.86
12.93
Telephone/email accessibility of the Local instructors outside of classes.
12.68
11.24
10.98
12.81
8.02
10.40
8.79
10.85
Degree to which instructors encouraged communication between students, and between students and instructors.
12.11
11.22
11.42
11.56
8.43
9.86
9.61
10.10
Extent to which the programme material was sufficient to support study at home.
11.13
10.89
12.99
10.20
8.55
9.02
8.04
11.04
Overall, the University instructors were:
14.89
15.01
17.39
13.43
Overall, the Local instructors were:
13.92
13.69
9.99
13.26
10.85
10.12
10.23
10.31
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
Significant at: α=0.01 (**), α=0.05 (*)
Attribute with 1st or 2nd highest level of satisfaction.
Attribute with lowest level of satisfaction.
Attribute does not apply. vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
15
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
The table distinguishes between programmes where
2001), and various university quality policies include that
both Australian and local instructors were involved in
requirement. Table 4 shows the results of the compari-
face-to-face delivery (Prog1, Prog6, Prog2, and Prog8),
son in student satisfaction between Australian and local
and programmes delivered entirely by local instructors
instructors.
(Prog3, Prog7, Prog4, Prog5). For each programme, two
In terms of instructor attributes, students in all pro-
attributes with the highest level of satisfaction are high-
grammes reported higher levels of satisfaction with the
lighted in dark grey, and an attribute with the lowest level
University instructors’ teaching ability and overall perfor-
of satisfaction is highlighted in light grey.
mance; only some of these differences were statistically
Satisfaction with the various attributes of instructors
significant.
and instruction varied across programmes. However, some
It appears that within individual programmes Univer-
of the attributes recorded the highest level of satisfaction
sity instructors also attracted higher levels of satisfaction.
in several programmes – for example, the instructors’
However, in Prog2 these differences were statistically
communication skills (Prog2, Prog8, Prog4, and Prog5) or
significant for all but one (accessibility outside classes)
the local instructors’ dedication to students and teaching
aspects.This sentiment was also reflected in written com-
(Prog3, Prog7, Prog4, and Prog5); it should be noted, that
ments provided by the students:
the latter attribute scored highest only in programmes
‘Although University lecturers are very good with their respective subjects, they leave too soon. After that, the local lecturer might not be as good as the University lecturer, which affects the overall understanding of the subject. Ms X [University instructor] made the subject well understood.’
delivered entirely by local instructors. Interestingly, in programmes delivered by both Australian and local instructors, students reported the highest levels of satisfaction with attributes related to the Australian instructors. With respect to the lowest level of satisfaction, students
‘It [the programme] would be more effective if the lecturers from Australia came more often.’
in different programmes were least satisfied with different attributes. However, ‘the time taken to mark and return
‘Some [local] lecturers are not 100 per cent committed to teaching students’ lack of confidence toward quality decrease interest in studies. No motivations [local] lecturers use harsh words and raise their voice to show anger.’
tests and written assignments’ recorded the lowest scores in four programmes (Prog1, Prog6, Prog8, and Prog5). A comparison of student satisfaction with the Australian instructors and the local instructors was also of interest, since four of the participating programmes (Prog1, Prog6, Prog2, and Prog8) involved Australian, as well as
Student satisfaction with technology
local instructors. This was important in view of the argument that transnational programmes should be of equivalent standard to the same programmes offered by the
The average ranked scores related to students’ satisfaction
university at home (Biggs 2001; Hyam 2003; Van Damme
with attributes in the Technology category are reported
Table 4: Student satisfaction with University & Local instructors (incl. preferred instructors and significance of preference) Prog1 Hong Kong
Prog6 Hong Kong
Prog2 Malaysia
Prog8 Singapore
Organisation and preparation for classes.
University1 p=0.08
Local p=0.90
University1 p<0.001
University4 p=0.35
Dedication to students and teaching.
Local p=0.99
University3 p=0.96
University1 p<0.001
Local p=0.13
Teaching ability.
University1 p<0.001
University3 p=0.39
University1 p<0.001
University4 p=0.26
Encouragement of class participation.
University1 p=0.11
Local p=0.14
University1 p=0.004
Local p=0.18
Telephone/email accessibility outside of classes.
Local p<0.001
University3 p=0.11
University1 p=0.85
Local p=0.82
Overall satisfaction.
University1 p=0.18
University3 p=0.34
University1 p<0.001
University4 p=0.49
Shading indicates a significantly greater level of satisfaction (p<0.05, using Wilcoxon test).
16
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Table 5: Student satisfaction with technology University & local instructors
Local instructors only
Prog1 HK
Prog6 HK
Prog2 Mal
Prog8 Sin
Prog3 Mal
Prog7 Mal
Prog4 Sin
Prog5 Viet
The quality of the technology used in classes.
4.23
4.70
3.60
3.49
3.86
3.40
3.74
3.94
The ease of use of technology.
4.26
4.22
4.10
3.58
4.19
3.32
3.93
3.98
The extent of programme’s reliance on the use of technology in the classroom or the college.
3.91
4.02
4.18
3.73
4.21
3.66
3.83
3.93
The extent to which the programme relied on the use of technology at home.
4.04
3.88
4.32
3.98
4.24
4.35
4.43
3.41
The degree of confidence you had that classes would not be interrupted or cancelled due to technical problems.
4.16
4.31
4.01
4.78
3.87
4.44
4.41
3.96
The quality of technical support provided.
3.76
3.27
3.36
4.03
3.55
3.77
3.77
3.97
The overall usefulness of programme Websites.
3.64
3.60
4.42
4.40
4.08
5.05
3.88
4.80
**
**
*
**
Significant at: α=0.01 (**), α=0.05 (*)
Attribute with 1st or 2nd highest level of satisfaction.
in Table 5. For each of the programmes, the Friedman test was used to determine whether there were significant dif-
**
Attribute with lowest level of satisfaction.
Student satisfaction with programme management and administration
ferences in student satisfaction with the attributes in this category. Student level of satisfaction varied significantly
The average ranked scores related to students’ satisfac-
across the attributes in five of the programmes.
tion with attributes in the Programme management
Satisfaction with the various attributes related to the
and administration category are reported in Table 6. For
use of technology varied across programmes. However,
each of the programmes, the Friedman test was used to
two attributes recorded the highest level of satisfaction
determine whether there were significant differences in
in four programmes; the attributes were the degree of
student satisfaction with the attributes in this category.
confidence in the reliability of technology used in class
Student level of satisfaction varied significantly across the
(Prog6, Prog8, Prog7, and Prog4), and the overall useful-
attributes in four of the programmes.
ness of programme Websites (Prog2, Prog8, Prog7, and Prog5).
Satisfaction with the various attributes related to programme management and administration varied across
With respect to the lowest level of satisfaction, students
programmes. However, students in four programmes
in different programmes were least satisfied with different
(Prog2, Prog8, Prog7, and Prog5) were highly satisfied
attributes. However, ‘the quality of technical support pro-
with their ability to access the university programme
vided’ recorded the lowest scores in three programmes
coordinator when needed. Students in three pro-
(Prog6, Prog2, and Prog3).
grammes (Prog2, Prog3, and Prog7 – all offered in Malay-
Surprisingly, there were considerable differences in stu-
sia) were also highly satisfied with their ability to access
dent satisfaction with the quality of the technology used
the university library and other student resources; yet,
in classes among programmes offered in technologically
students in two other programmes, Prog1 in Hong Kong
advanced countries. While students in programmes Prog1
and Prog8 in Singapore, were least satisfied with this
and Prog6 offered in Hong Kong reported highest levels
very attribute.
of satisfaction with this attribute, students in programmes
Among all the attributes related to programme manage-
Prog8 and Prog4, offered in an equally technologically
ment and administration, students in three programmes
advanced Singapore, were least satisfied with the qual-
(Prog6, Prog7, and Prog5) rated lowest their ‘ability to
ity of the technology used in classes in comparison with
access a computer when, and if, needed’.
other technology-related attributes of their programmes. vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
17
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Table 6: Student satisfaction with programme management and administration University & local instructors
Local instructors only
Prog1 HK
Prog6 HK
Prog2 Mal
Prog8 Sin
Prog3 Mal
Prog7 Mal
Prog4 Sin
Prog5 Viet
The present means of exchanging programme material between you and the instructors.
6.26
6.53
5.74
5.97
6.13
6.06
6.10
5.96
Your ability to access the university library and other student resources.
5.13
5.38
7.40
4.26
7.28
6.76
6.02
6.23
Your ability to access a computer when, and if, needed.
6.20
4.89
6.74
6.26
5.94
5.40
6.24
4.33
The general attitude of the administrative/technical staff, e.g. in delivering materials, maintaining classrooms.
6.22
7.00
5.32
6.70
5.60
5.45
5.82
6.19
The accessibility of administrative/technical staff.
6.46
7.00
5.42
6.53
5.23
5.76
4.84
6.23
The promptness of delivery of programme materials.
5.88
6.28
5.66
6.42
6.31
5.55
5.99
6.83
Your ability to access the university programme coordinator when needed.
6.11
6.72
6.78
7.02
5.96
6.77
6.01
6.67
Class enrolment and registration procedures.
6.06
6.35
6.41
6.06
6.01
6.45
6.26
5.98
Your opportunity to evaluate the programme.
5.94
5.63
6.01
5.64
6.37
5.85
6.38
5.92
The extent to which, in your opinion, the university responds to evaluations.
5.62
5.03
5.17
5.05
5.46
5.69
6.11
5.63
The degree of organisational support.
6.12
5.19
5.35
6.08
5.71
6.24
6.23
6.02
**
**
**
**
Significant at: α=0.01 (**), α=0.05 (*)
Attribute with 1st or 2nd highest level of satisfaction.
Attribute with lowest level of satisfaction.
Comparative analysis of student satisfaction with the current programmes It was important to determine if, and how, student satisfaction with the various aspects of their transnational programmes differed across all programmes. The two independent variables were: ‘Programme’ (with 8 levels: Prog1, Prog2, … , and Prog8), and ‘Category’ (with 3 levels: Instructor/Instruction, Technology, and Programme management and administration). Each of the levels in the variable ‘Category’ represented a composite variable; for example, Instructor/Instruction represented the mean satisfaction of each student with all attributes related to instructor and instruction. Considering that ‘Programme’ was a between-subjects variable, and ‘Category’ was a within-subject variable, a mixed design ANOVA was used to test if there were significant differences in student satisfaction with the
Figure 1: Student satisfaction with current programmes, by category
three aspects of transnational programmes across all
ment (Instructor/Instruction,Technology, and Programme
programmes considered in this study.
management and administration) and the participating
A mixed design ANOVA showed a significant interac-
programmes, F(13.9, 812) = 4.33, p < .001 (as illustrated
tion between various aspects of the educational environ-
in Figure 1). Students in programmes Prog8 and Prog5
18
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
Table 7: Differences between the highest-ranking programmes
Infrastructure English proficiency
Prog8
Prog5
Well-developed (Singapore)
Developing (Vietnam)
High
Limited
Mode of study (students) Part-time
Full-time
Mode of teaching (instructors)
Both Australian & local
Local only
Australian institution
University4
University2
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
gramme structure and flexibility, and relevance to job and career were named as determining factors: ‘Flexibility of time and subject management.’ S8 ‘I can work and study at the same time to earn a degree.’ S8 ‘Provided a lot of useful knowledge that is required by recruiters.’ S5 ‘It [the programme] provides proper materials in order for me to pursue a career in this field.’ S3 ‘Useful in my job.’ S2
reported significantly higher levels of satisfaction than
(S1 refers to a student in Prog1, S2 identifies a student
students in other programmes, with the exception of
in Prog2, and so on.)
Prog7 where the difference was not significant.
Many students appreciated the opportunity to obtain
Interestingly, programmes Prog8 and Prog5 differed in
a foreign degree without leaving their country or experi-
many respects, as illustrated in Table 7.
ence Western teaching methods:
The students in Prog8 were almost equally satisfied
‘Allows to study in a foreign country without leaving our country.’ S2
with all three aspects of their programmes; on the other hand, students in Prog5 were most satisfied with their
‘Gives the study opportunity for students who can’t study full time in Australia.’ S8
instructors and the quality of instruction and somewhat less satisfied with technology and programme manage-
‘It eliminates the need to spend the entire course duration overseas which many cannot afford.’ S3
ment and administration. Surprisingly, students in Prog4 which, like Prog8, was also delivered in Singapore and, like Prog5, was offered by
‘Because it applied Western teaching methods.’ S5
University2, reported significantly lower levels of satisfac-
‘These types of programmes are better taught by the foreign university than the local uni.’ S2
tion than their counterparts in Prog8 and Prog5.
Perceived programme effectiveness
‘I had the opportunity to learn new skills which I may not have in my home country.’ S3
This section reports on student perceptions of programme effectiveness which was measured in three ways:
Others valued the status of the Australian host univer-
one, students deemed their current programme effec-
sity:
tive/non-effective; two, students stated if they would be
‘It is a highly accredited university.’ S8
willing to participate in this type of programme (that is,
‘Quality education from a recognised university is important.’ S8
transnational) in the future; and three, they stated if the programme was worthwhile – Table 8. The section cites
‘Prestige.’ S5
student reasons for deeming their programmes effective/ not effective, and worthwhile/not worthwhile (derived
‘Good university.’ S3
from the qualitative part of the student survey).
‘Good reputation.’ S7
The majority of students in all programmes regarded their programmes as effective and worthwhile. Pro-
Table 8: Perceived effectiveness of current programmes (percentage of students who agreed) University & local instructors
Local instructors only
Prog1 HK
Prog6 HK
Prog2 Mal
Prog8 Sin
Prog3 Mal
Prog7 Mal
Prog4 Sin
Prog5 Viet
Is the programme effective?
85
75
73
94
82
91
84
91
Would you participate in a similar programme again?
55
21
68
90
75
84
78
77
Is the programme worthwhile?
86
84
94
97
97
85
82
89
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
19
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
For some students, short programme duration leading
in defining what constitutes its effectiveness.The reported
to a formal qualification defined programme effectiveness:
findings might assist academics, designers, and administra-
‘I can complete the programme in a short time.’ S1
tors involved in teaching, developing, and managing such
‘Short.’ S7 ‘It is quick and effective.’ S1 ‘Fast to obtain a degree (express route).’ S4
programmes to gain insights into programme effectiveness as perceived by transnational students. • Satisfaction with instructors in the evaluated programmes was high; however, in the four programmes taught by both University and local instructors, stu-
The approving assessment of the effectiveness of cur-
dents reported higher levels of satisfaction with Uni-
rent programmes generally corresponded to the students’
versity instructors in terms of overall satisfaction and
willingness to participate in a similar type of programme
the instructors’ teaching ability; in two programmes, the
(that is, transnational) in the future; however, only 21 per
differences were statistically significant.
cent of students in Prog6 declared their potential will-
• Slow feedback on assessment tasks emerged as a
ingness. Those students in Prog6 who were not willing
major problem in all evaluated programmes. Students
to participate often cited reasons that did not reflect on
identified the tardiness with which tests and written
the quality of the programme or its type of delivery, but
assignments were marked and returned as the least sat-
related to the students’ lack of time, family circumstances,
isfactory aspect associated with instructors and instruc-
and financial constraints. ‘I will use more time with my family and my work after I finish this course.’ ‘I will have a break after I finish this programme. I am very tired to study at night.’
tion. • Students were highly satisfied with the reliability of technology used in class and the overall usefulness of programme Web sites. On the other hand, the quality of the available technical support was found to be lacking. • The majority of students regarded their programmes
‘Very tired at night and working in daytime.’
as effective and worthwhile. Students named the fol-
‘Too expensive.’
lowing determinants of programme effectiveness: programme structure and flexibility, relevance to job and
Other students in this programme cited disappoint-
career, opportunity to obtain a foreign degree without
ment with the demanding programme schedule, frequent
leaving their country, opportunity to experience West-
and unexpected schedule changes, lack of adequate
ern teaching methods, high status of Australian Uni-
course material and support, and emphasis on self-study
versities, and short programme duration leading to a
as reasons for not trusting similar types of programmes
formal qualification.
in the future. ‘Schedule too tight. Not enough time provided for good preparation in the study period.’ ‘Too much to study, too many topics, no time for revision; not easy to get a high mark.’
In terms of assisting in the design, development, and review of transnational programmes, the findings presented in this article could be pertinent to staff involved in those programmes, as well as to university administrators. For staff, they could provide a platform for reflection on what is ‘right’ or ‘wrong’ with a programme, and which
‘I don’t have time to ask comments, suggestions from the professor face to face.’
practices are effective or non-effective. Understanding of
‘Not enough materials or demo to make it easier for the students.’
learners might enable staff to consider and implement
‘The schedule is too condensed, 4 times a week, which is very difficult to fit in daily work and the schedule is changed quite often.’
failure of the programmes to deliver timely feedback on
how the learning experience discourages or frustrates constructive changes. For instance, the reported perceived assignments identifies one aspect of the programmes that calls for attention. For university administrators, the reported findings
Conclusion
could provide assistance in reviewing the quality and consistency of their transnational offerings. For instance, it
Student perspectives outlined in this article were col-
has been argued that transnational programmes should be
lected with the notion in mind that as the ultimate clients
of equivalent standard to the same programmes offered
of an education programme, students should participate
by the university at home, and various university quality
20
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
policies include that requirement. Yet, the reported findings revealed significant differences between perceived performance of university and local lecturers in the participating programmes, which might undermine the requirement of equivalent programme standards; this is one issue for university administrators to consider. Likewise, university policies and, in some instances, dedicated university units aim to ensure that all transnational education programmes offered under the university are delivering a sound education consistent and compliant with well defined standards. Yet, the reported study revealed significant differences between perceived satisfaction with two programmes offered by the same university, potentially challenging the requirement of intra-institutional consistency of transnational programmes; this is another issue for the university administrators to address. Given the information contained in this article, it is evident that to improve and sustain transnational programmes in the future, it is essential for universities to gain an understanding of the learners’ perspective: an understanding that transcends attendance records and academic achievements. Iwona Miliszewska is an Associate Professor and Head of the School of Engineering and Science, Victoria University, Australia.
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Denman, B. D. (2009). Higher education by distance: Opportunities and challenges at national and international levels. Report. London, The Observatory on Borderless Higher Education, February. DEST (Department of Education, Science and Training). (2005). A national quality strategy for Australian transnational education and training: A discussion paper. Retrieved from http://aei.dest.gov.au/AEI/GovernmentActivities/ QAAustralianEducationAndTrainingSystem/QualStrat_pdf.pdf Dunn, L. & M. Wallace M. (2006). Australian academics and transnational teaching: an exploratory study of their preparedness and experiences. Higher Education Research and Development 25: 35-369. Hyam, L. (2003). Australian higher education and quality: International issues, challenges and opportunities. Keynote address. In Proceedings of the Australian Universities Quality Forum 2003. McBurnie, G. & Ziguras, C. (2007). Transnational education: issues and trends in offshore higher education. London: Routledge. Miliszewska, I. & Sztendur E. (2010). Australian TNE Programmes in Southeast Asia: The Student Perspective. Report. The Observatory on Borderless Higher Education, London, April. OECD (Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development). (2009). Higher education to 2030: Globalisation. OECD Publishing. Universities Australia. (2009). Offshore Programs of Australian Universities. Canberra, AVCC. Van Damme, D. (2001). Higher education in the age of globalisation: The need for a new regulatory framework for recognition, quality assurance and accreditation. Introductory Paper for the UNESCO Expert Meeting, Paris, 10-11 September 2001. Retrieved from http://www.unesco.org/education/studyingabroad/highlights/global_forum/presentations/keynote_eng.doc Ziguras, C. (2007). Good practice in transnational education: A guide for New Zealand providers. Report. Wellington, Education New Zealand. Retrieved from http://mams.rmit.edu.au/b0fsg6huol3q1.pdf
Ewa M. Sztendur works as a Senior Statistical Consultant in the Office of PVC (Research and Research Training), Victoria University, Australia.
References AEI (Australian Education International). (2009). Transnational education in higher education sector. Research snapshot. Canberra, DEST, July. Retrieved from http://aei.gov.au/AEI/PublicationsAndResearch/Snapshots/2009073120_pdf.pdf AVCC (Australian Vice Chancellors’ Committee). (2005). Internationalisation: Report, January 2005. Banks, M, Olsen, A. & Pearce, D. (2007). Global student mobility: An Australian perspective five years on, IDP Education Australia. Retrieved from http:// www.idp.com/pdf/GSM_Brochure_Oct07.pdf Banks, M., Kevat, P. Ziguras, C. Ciccarelli, A. & Clayton D. (2010). The changing fortunes of Australian transnational higher education. Report. London, Observatory on Borderless Higher Education, June. Biggs, J. (2001). The reflective institution: assuring and enhancing the quality of teaching and learning. Higher Education 41: 221-238. Chapman, A. & Pyvis D. (2005). Identity and social practice in higher education: student experiences of postgraduate courses delivered ‘offshore’ in Singapore and Hong Kong by an Australian university. International Journal of Educational Development 25: 39-52. Chapman, A. & Pyvis D. (2006). Quality, identity and practice in offshore university programmes: Issues in the internationalization of Australian higher education. Teaching in Higher Education 11: 233-245. vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Australian transnational education programmes in South East Asia, Iwona Miliszewska & Ewa M Sztendur
21
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
All beer and skittles? A qualitative pilot study of the role of alcohol in university college life Clarissa Hughes University of Tasmania
This paper reports the results of a small qualitative pilot study on the role of alcohol in college life, undertaken at three residential colleges at an Australian university. Focus groups (involving 43 students aged between 17 and 23 years) investigated participants’ views of the social functions of alcohol in the residential college environment. Participants regarded drinking as an entrenched and highly valued aspect of college culture at all three colleges. They portrayed alcohol as contributing in positive ways to ‘sociability and relaxation’ as well as ‘bonding and social inclusion’ at college. Although drinking was acknowledged as disruptive of students’ sleep, study, and daily routines, such impacts were often played down or normalised. The article concludes that normative studies, with a particular focus on first-year students, may be fruitful avenues for reducing alcohol-related harm among college-based university students. Qualitative studies like the one reported here can provide detailed, context-specific information about ‘local drinking cultures’, which are essential for informed decision-making about intervention approaches and policy change.
Introduction
indicates that university students drink more than their same-age peers not engaged in tertiary studies (Dowling,
The alcohol consumption habits of Australian young
Clark & Corney, 2006; Walker, 2000).
people are of great concern to parents, politicians,
Accidental injury, assaults and other consequences of
researchers, policy makers, educators and others. There
alcohol misuse are ‘key concern of university leaders’
are ongoing debates about whether Australians ‘binge
(Perkins & Craig, 2006; Wechsler & Nelson, 2008) in the
drink’ more or less often than they did in the past, and, in
US and elsewhere. Alcohol use also has implications for
academic circles, what constitutes ‘a binge’ (see also Alex-
other less dramatic (but no less important) issues includ-
andre & Bowen, 2004; Herring, Berridge & Thom, 2008).
ing academic performance and student attrition (Mar-
Regardless, it is well-documented that a large proportion
tinez, Sher & Wood, 2008; Porter & Pryor, 2007; Powell,
of young peoples’ drinking places them at risk of current
Williams & Wechsler, 2004). Despite 18 to 23-year-olds
and future harm, both in terms of health-related risks and
(and university students in particular) being identified as
other negative consequences (Chikritzhs, Pascal & Jones,
‘at risk’ of alcohol-related harm, comparatively little work
2004; McBride, Farringdon & Midford, 2000; Toumbourou,
has been undertaken to identify problems and determine
Hemphill, McMorris, Catalano & Patton, 2009). University
appropriate solutions (Roche & Watt, 2000, p. 390; see also
students, as a group, are often associated with problem-
Wilks, 1989). Furthermore, much of the existing research
atic alcohol consumption. An Australian study reported
has a disciplinary basis in either psychology or epidemiol-
54 per cent of the university student sample consuming
ogy, and is dominated by quantitative methods.
more than five standard drinks on a typical drinking occa-
This paper addresses an important gap in the literature
sion, and over two-thirds (69 per cent) drinking at hazard-
by investigating students’ views on the role of alcohol in
ous or harmful levels (Roche & Watt, 1999). Research also
college life, based on the results of a small qualitative pilot
22
All beer and skittles?, Clarissa Hughes
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
study conducted at three residential colleges at an Aus-
gap-years and mature-age entry (McKenzie & Gow, 2007).
tralian university. It is, to the author’s knowledge, the first
For many students at residential colleges, their first year
Australian study of its kind.The underlying premise of the
at university involves a significant reduction in ‘parental
paper is that efforts to change university drinking cultures
surveillance’ (see also Casswell, Pledger & Pratap, 2002).
should be informed by a comprehensive and nuanced
As noted above, much research on alcohol consump-
understanding of the place of alcohol in college life. With-
tion among university students takes a psychological or
out such an understanding, there is a risk of interventions
epidemiological approach (see for example Alexandre
or policy changes being ill-chosen and/or poorly received.
& Bowen, 2004; Baer, 2002; Davey, Davey & Obst, 2002).
The paper briefly discusses the social-scientific
A smaller, but growing body of research investigates the
research on university student drinking and provides
influence of norms, perceptions and other socio-cul-
a rationale for a sociological focus. After describing the
tural processes (Berkowitz, 1997; Neighbors, Lee, Lewis
research setting and methods, the paper then considers
& Fossos, 2007; Perkins, 2002; Roche & Watt, 1999). As
the findings relating to two key themes emerging from
Hansen (1997, p. 155) explains, so-called ‘socio-ecological’
students’ accounts. These themes are the ways in which
theories postulate that
alcohol use serves to enhance a) Sociability and relaxation, and b) Bonding and social cohesion at the colleges. The discussion then explores the ‘flipside’ of these positive contributions by considering Alcohol-related damage, disruption and disharmony resulting from alcohol use at the colleges. The paper highlights the tensions inherent in student accounts of alcohol consumption. Despite stu-
instead of looking for causes within the individual… we should focus on the social system…Clearly, some causes of substance abuse lie within the individual, and these should not be ignored. Social ecology theory, however, seeks causes primarily in the social environment. Consequently, efforts to modify use must focus on changing the person’s environment rather than the person.
dents’ tendency to present drinking as making a positive
Following Hansen, this study is concerned to shed light
contribution to residential college life, the situation is not
on the social ‘place’ of alcohol in college life, which makes
‘all beer and skittles’. The paper concludes with a discus-
qualitative methods an appropriate data collection choice.
sion of the implications of the study for future research
Arguably, small local studies of this kind can improve
and efforts to reduce alcohol-related harm among univer-
understanding of ‘local drinking cultures’ to guide deci-
sity students in Australia.
sion-making about subsequent interventions and policy change (see also Mullen, Watson, Swift & Black, 2007;
University drinking cultures – the importance of ‘the social’
Sheehan & Ridge, 2001).
Research setting The university setting has been noted as one which offers ‘a unique social context for the consumption of excessive
This pilot study was undertaken at three residential col-
amounts of alcohol’ (Roche & Watt, 1999). Problematic
leges (which have been given pseudonyms) at an Australian
alcohol use among university students has a similar preva-
university. Barton College and Stewart College are located
lence in Australasia, Europe, and South America, and a lower
within the University’s main campus, with a single adminis-
prevalence in Africa and Asia (Karam, Kypri & Salamoun,
tration team overseeing both colleges. Barton and Stewart
2007). The international research evidence also confirms
Colleges have approximately 170 and 100 residents, respec-
that university students experience a range of negative
tively. Just over 50 per cent (n=135) of residents are male,
consequences as a result of their own and others’ drinking
around 50 per cent of residents are international students
(McAlaney & McMahon, 2007; McGee & Kypri, 2004; Roche
(n=130), and more than 50 (n=140) per cent of residents
& Watt, 2000; Sharmer, 2001; Simao et al., 2008).
are first-year students. Farrell College is a residential col-
Additionally, residential colleges are often noted as
lege of the University, located near the main campus.There
being particularly ‘wet’ environments where residents
are currently approximately 190 residents, approximately
drink heavily and often (Raskin White et al., 2006). A
55 per cent (n=104) of whom are male. By contrast with
number of major life landmarks (being granted permission
Barton and Stewart, approximately 15 per cent (n=28) of
to vote, drink, and hold a drivers licence) cluster together
Farrell residents are international students. Fifteen per cent
within the space of a few weeks or months for many first-
(n=28) are from interstate and the majority of the remain-
year university students (Roche & Watt 1999), although
der are from other regions of the state. More than half the
this pattern is changing with the increasing popularity of
residents are first-year students at the University.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
All beer and skittles?, Clarissa Hughes
23
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Methods
perspectives on the ‘place’ of alcohol at the residential
The data for this article were collected using focus
colleges rather than individuals’ drinking behaviours or
groups undertaken with approval from the relevant
other psychological risk/protective factors. The analysis
Human Research Ethics Committee (number H10533).
also investigated students’ views of the consequences of
The focus groups were all audio-taped with consent.
drinking. Although international students were involved
All college residents were invited (via posters, emails,
in a separate group, there was little to differentiate their
and announcements at dinners) to participate in focus
discussions from those involved in the other groups.
groups. No inducements to participate were offered. A semi-structured focus group guide was used to investigate
Findings
perceptions of the role of alcohol in college life and their alcohol-related experiences.
Participants
This section of the paper outlines the findings of the qualitative pilot study. It commences with a brief overview of the ‘patterns of consumption’ identified by focus
Five focus groups were conducted, involving a total of 43
group participants, who indicated that heavier alcohol
students. Posters inviting participation were displayed at
use at college is associated with particular days of the
each of the colleges. The comparatively low response rate
week, times in the academic semester, years of study and
may have been a function of the issue (i.e. students deemed
types of social events. At one college, Monday nights
that the topic was not worthy of their time) or the fact
were popular nights for drinking, with residents con-
that no inducements to be involved were offered (in fact
suming alcohol provided (free of charge) at the Formal
the Ethics Committee expressly forbade inducements),
Dinner, then drinking at local hotels. At another college,
and/or some other unforeseen factors. Male and female
Wednesday night was Formal Dinner night, but residents
focus groups were, where possible, conducted separately
were required to purchase alcohol at the dinner. It was
to assist both genders to more freely express their views.
also common for these students to ‘party on’ afterwards
At one college, an additional mixed-gender international
at local venues. Focus group participants believed that
student focus group was conducted, due to a high propor-
hotels capitalised on this situation through deliber-
tion of international students. There were two all-female
ate marketing strategies (such as ‘half price nights’) to
groups involving 14 students, two all-male groups involving
attract students and enable college residents to have a
15 students, and a separate focus group of 14 international
‘big’ night at minimal cost.
students which had a roughly equal gender balance. The
Early in first semester and late in second semester
youngest focus group participant was 17 and the eldest
were also reportedly associated with heavier drinking.
was 23, with most participants aged 18 or 19. Participants
According to a female participant from Farrell College,
were not asked to identify as drinkers or non-drinkers.
‘At the start of the semester everyone’s drinking heaps.
Analysis
Then everyone stops going out so much’. Similarly, a male participant from Barton College noted that ‘Around exam
The focus groups were transcribed and a coding guide
time or…when there are heaps of assignments, people
was developed. Due to the small number of data collec-
don’t tend to go out so much’. Participants also perceive
tion sites and participants, a decision was made to work
that alcohol consumption depends, to a certain extent, on
with electronic and hard-copy versions of the transcripts
which year of College someone is in - with second and
rather than use a qualitative analysis software package
third year students consuming less than first year students
such as NVivo. The coding guide was drawn from themes
(see also Bewick et al., 2008). Certainly, several first-year
in the literature relating to youth alcohol consumption
participants (i.e. ‘freshers’) reported that since moving
and socio-cultural influences on drinking. Those themes
to College they had started drinking more, and more fre-
related to, inter alia, peer pressure & normative percep-
quently, than they had previously.
tions, gender & drinking practices, negative consequences
Lastly, participants reported that heavier alcohol use
of consumption, college alcohol policies, and the relation-
by college residents was associated with organised social
ship between alcohol and sport. Initial coding (undertaken
events and college sports. These two topics shed light on
by two researchers, independently) involved identifying
different aspects of two key themes that emerged from stu-
broad patterns in the data, while subsequent analytical
dents’ accounts of the contributions of alcohol to residen-
work involved further refinement and exploration of
tial college life.The themes of Sociability and relaxation and
themes. A particular priority was to explore participants’
Bonding and social cohesion are now examined in turn.
24
All beer and skittles?, Clarissa Hughes
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Sociability and relaxation
that they are a good way to socialise and meet new
A recurring theme in focus group discussions at all three
people. Students mentioned the use of ‘beer bongs’ (i.e.
colleges was the contribution of alcohol to social func-
custom-made drinking devices which hold large quan-
tioning and relaxation for students. The fun and pleasura-
tities of alcohol) and similar items in popular drink-
ble aspects of drinking with friends featured prominently
ing games (particularly after college sporting events),
in many conversations. Participants also spoke of drinking
despite their use being contrary to college rules and
as an important strategy for stress-relief:
regulations.
We have stressful lives with all our assignments and working and everything, so alcohol and socialising is like a way to relieve and have a bit of enjoyment (Male, Farrell College). The annual College Ball at each of the colleges was par-
For example, a male Farrell College student commented: There’s sometimes up to thirty people playing (a drinking game) which is really good because you see different social groups mixing before they go out and go their separate ways.
ticularly associated with heavy consumption and was a
The international students were also asked their views
major event in many residents’ social calendars. Pre- and
about drinking games. Overall they suggested that drink-
post-Ball functions are held, including pre-dinner drinks
ing games/parties were not a negative thing and that they
at a nearby bar, and parties afterwards which sometimes
provided an opportunity to meet and interact with people.
continue until the next day. Several first-year students
The role of alcohol in building and sustaining friend-
made comments like ‘I’m really excited about it. Every-
ship groups was noted by many participants. Females, in
one says it’s the best night of the year’. Some returning
particular, stressed the extent to which College residents
students spoke favourably about the Ball, but not all of
looked after their friends and the environment in which
them intended to go. The financial aspect was frequently
they drink is safe. For instance:
mentioned, with one participant stating that he was not prepared to pay money to go to an event he did not think he would enjoy. Participants noted the tendency of some students to drink to excess at the Ball to ensure they receive ‘value for money’. As explained by a female Farrell College participant:
I reckon most of the time if people have too much (alcohol) their friends will … put them to bed, or start getting water into them. We all look out for each other so something bad rarely happens (Female, Barton College) The link between alcohol consumption and college sport was emphasised by students at all three colleges.
It’s … unlimited drinks, so $110 including drinks, as much as you can drink, and that’s often seen as the way to go… I want to get my money’s worth.
Female Stewart College participants also perceived that
On the other hand, the financial outlay could also
ing connection is highlighted by the following excerpt:
function in the opposite direction – for instance another female participant reported only having three drinks at the previous year’s ball because she did not want to ruin
males put more pressure on each other to drink than do females, especially after sporting events. The sport/drinkAfter … sport we go to an ‘old boy’s’ house and have drinks there … After cricket, rugby and football, we have parties, usually here. (Male, Barton College)
her dress. Despite initially stating that the Ball is a night
One male participant summed up the College sport/
of sustained drinking for many, students wanted to clarify
heavy drinking connection: ‘it’s a sport thing - it’s part of
that ‘it’s not just about drinking’:
the sports teams tradition’.
There’s a band there, really good food, it’s not just about the alcohol at all, it’s about sitting at a table with ten or so of your friends, just enjoying the night (Male, Barton College).
Bonding and social cohesion The positive contribution of alcohol consumption to sociability was frequently noted during focus groups. Drinking games (i.e. games involving either individuals or teams, in which aim is to ‘out drink’ one another
Given the emphasis placed on the centrality of drinking to college life, it was appropriate to explore whether students’ status as ‘drinkers’ or ‘non-drinkers’ affected their acceptance within social groupings. Both male and female residents of Farrell College reported that extent to which drinking assisted students to ‘fit in’ depended on the group they were in: Some groups are interested in drinking and others aren’t. I don’t think people who don’t drink feel left out (Male, Farrell College).
and/or become intoxicated as quickly as possible) were
Similarly, international students suggested that ‘fitting
mentioned in relation to facilitating social interaction
in’ was more dependent on confidence and personality
between residents, with many students commenting
than on alcohol consumption. However, the potential for
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
All beer and skittles?, Clarissa Hughes
25
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
subtle and unintentional social exclusion exists, as sug-
sising the centrality of drinking to college culture, the
gested in the following discussion.
students who participated wished to maintain that ‘drink-
Alcohol-related damage, disruption and disharmony
ing is not that important’, that ‘not everyone drinks’ and that ‘people who don’t drink aren’t left out’. For instance, one Farrell student commented that she has ‘a number of
While many students acknowledged that drinking is an
friends here who don’t drink, but they always come out
important part of college culture, they were also quick
and are the life of the party. Similar stories emerged from
to point out that it is ‘not a destructive drinking culture’.
residents of the other colleges. Unfortunately, it was not
Some students (presumably drinkers) suggested that col-
possible in this study to ascertain whether self-identified
lege staff think student drinking is more of a problem than
non-drinkers concurred with this view. It seems likely that
it actually is because they only hear about it when some-
the image of ‘happy inclusion’ of non-drinkers at college is
thing bad happens. In general terms, the participants did
somewhat oversimplified – but examination of that issue
not regard drinking by college students as a problem; they
is a task for future studies.
reiterated that it is rare for ‘things to get out of hand’, and that most residents drink responsibly.
Alcohol at College: all beer and skittles?
However, specific questioning about social events and
Results of this study accord with Roche and Watt’s
college sports revealed that alcohol-related harm is a real-
observation that alcohol ‘is often central to the social
ity at times. For instance, drinking at the ball has resulted in
and sporting life of students’ (2000, p. 389). The partici-
the need for medical intervention, people being removed
pants were generally positive about the contribution
from the venue, and people vomiting at the table. Resi-
of college drinking to sociability and social cohesion.
dents from all colleges recalled post-sport celebrations
Students from all three colleges claimed that drinking
(or commiserations) ‘turning ugly’. One female Stewart
is ‘not compulsory’ at their college, that abstainers and
College participant recalled a particular barbecue after an
light drinkers are never ostracised, and the extent to
inter-college football game:
which individuals ‘fit in’ is more a function of their per-
We had a (liquor) licence and thought people would just have a beer but it kind of escalated. One person drank a whole bottle of spirits, and there were drinking games and stuff. It was probably the messiest night this year, so far.
sonality and outlook than on their drinking. However, the absence of a ‘teetotallers’ focus group’ (or anonymous mechanisms for providing comment) mean that it is not possible to assess the accuracy of these claims, which were presumably made by drinkers.
Although several students insisted that the colleges do not
As noted above, the focus group participants recounted
have ‘destructive drinking cultures’, vomit did feature prom-
numerous anecdotes of their own and other peoples’
inently in all focus group discussions. Participants spoke of
vomit, hangovers, accidental injuries as a result of drink-
seeing and hearing people vomit – in bedrooms, hallways,
ing alcohol. However, the short- and longer-term health
stairwells and out of windows.They also commented on the
risks of alcohol consumption were conspicuous by their
unpleasantness of lingering odour from vomit, and on inci-
absence from participants’ accounts. Similar to the Aus-
dents where toilet seats were broken. One male Barton par-
tralian teenagers in Taylor and Carroll’s 2001 study (2001,
ticipant commented that he ‘wasn’t bothered’ by students
p. 23), participants in this study seemed not to associate
vomiting after drinking, then added that ‘generally people
short-term consequences of alcohol consumption (such
are pretty responsible.They’ll do it outside’.
as vomiting, hangover and loss of consciousness) with
Drinking also appeared to cause disruption to many
harm to their health.
participants’ study, sleep and daily routines. Residents
Participants’ experiences of ‘second-hand effects of
reported planning their study to avoid ‘drinking nights’ –
alcohol’ (including having their sleep and/or or study
for instance, a male Farrell College participant noted that it
interrupted) were numerous. Yet there was a tendency
was often so noisy and difficult to concentrate on Monday
for students to overlook or downplay disturbances if
nights that he avoided studying ‘until everyone has gone
they were ‘caused’ by alcohol. Social processes and nor-
to the pub’. Some female students routinely avoided using
mative influences are salient here, since students may
certain bathrooms on certain mornings since they were
be less likely to express annoyance about noise pollu-
‘always disgusting’ after drinking nights.
tion or inconsiderate behaviour if they perceive that
The potential contribution of drinking to social exclusion was explored during the focus groups. Despite empha-
26
All beer and skittles?, Clarissa Hughes
‘everyone else is cool with it’ (see for example Berkowitz, 2004). vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
Implications and conclusion
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
risky drinking by aiming to change ‘the environment’ rather than ‘the person’. Accordingly, it has highlighted
This paper has taken a sociological, qualitative approach
the benefits of examining ‘drinking cultures’ rather than
to the issue of drinking among residential college students
focusing on individuals’ levels of knowledge or other fac-
attending an Australian university. It heeds Mancini-Pena
tors that may predispose them to problematic alcohol
and Tyson’s (2007, p. 36) call for research that reveals how
consumption (see also Hughes, Julian, Richman, Mason &
young people understand their drinking, to assist policy-
Long, 2008). It has also revealed the complex interplay of
makers and health professionals to better understand and
wider contextual factors (such as availability, pricing, and
communicate with the youth population. The paper has
special promotions) and the local ‘social environment’
demonstrated that many of the participants regard alco-
(such as norms and perceptions of alcohol use) in par-
hol as an intrinsic aspect of the college experience. Drink-
ticular settings.
ing is positively regarded for its contribution to sociability
The findings of this study suggest that interventions
and relaxation, and bonding and social cohesion among
focused on the normative environment (perceptions of
residents. However, alcohol’s contribution to damage,
peers’ alcohol-related attitudes and behaviours) should
disruption and disharmony coexists somewhat uncom-
be investigated by Australian universities seeking to
fortably with some students’ desire to see college drinking cultures as ‘safe’ and ‘not destructive’. This study has investigated the understandings participants have of their own and others’ drinking, and the social functions of alcohol use in the residential college environment. It does, however, have a number of
reduce alcohol-related harm
Some students... suggested that college staff think student drinking is more of a problem than it actually is because they only hear about it when something bad happens. In general terms, the participants did not regard drinking by college students as a problem; they reiterated that it is rare for ‘things to get out of hand’, and that most residents drink responsibly.
limitations. One limitation is
among their students. They also suggest that approaches targeting first-year students hold excellent potential for influencing college drinking cultures in positive ways (see also Kypri, Langley, McGee, Saunders & Williams, 2002).The fact that ‘freshers’ are in the midst of developing new social networks provides an opportune envi-
the small sample size, meaning that the results are not
ronment to investigate how those networks influence
generalisable to wider settings or populations. However,
alcohol-related perceptions and behaviour (McAlaney,
at least some of the issues may be salient in other Aus-
Bewick & Hughes, 2011).
tralian residential colleges. Additionally, as a ‘snapshot’
This paper has focused on the issue of student drink-
in time, it does not convey the changing demographic
ing cultures in university residential colleges. It has
profile of college residents reflective of broader changes
investigated the subtle and not-so-subtle ways in which
in student enrolments, including the increasing propor-
alcohol consumption influences college residents’ lives,
tions of mature-age and international students. Lastly, the
experiences and interactions with others. The study
use of focus groups may have had the unintended con-
has reinforced the importance of learning about stu-
sequence of discouraging participants from frank discus-
dents’ worldviews and receptiveness to different types
sion of their opinions and experiences. Issues relating
of prevention intervention. Arguably, studies of this kind
to international students and the experience of non-
are required to improve understanding of the com-
drinkers could benefit from individualised data collec-
plex ‘place of alcohol’ in specific social contexts. These
tion methods and more detailed consideration in future
understandings are essential for guiding decision-making
studies. A more comprehensive study would involve
about alcohol-focused interventions, future research and
mixed methods, a larger number of residential colleges
policy development.
from different states, data collection methods that would allow anonymity and thereby encourage honest answer-
Dr Clarissa Hughes is a Senior Research Fellow and the Aca-
ing (such an online surveys), and perhaps also incorpo-
demic Research Coordinator at the University of Tasmania’s
rate objective measures of alcohol consumption.
Department of Rural Health.
This paper commenced with a statement of the importance of ‘the social system’ and of the need to address vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
All beer and skittles?, Clarissa Hughes
27
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
References Alexandre, E. & Bowen, A. (2004). Excessive drinking in college: Behavioural outcome, not binge, as a basis for prevention. Addictive Behaviours, 29, 11991205. Baer, J. (2002). Student factors: Understanding individual variation in college drinking. Journal of Studies on Alcohol (Supplement 14), 40-53. Berkowitz, A. (1997). From reactive to proactive prevention: promoting an ecology of health on campus. In P. Rivers & E. Shore (Eds.), A Handbook on Substance Abuse for College and University Personnel. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press. Berkowitz, A. (2004). The Social Norms Approach: Theory, Research, and Annotated Bibliography. Bewick, B., Mulhern, B., Barkham, M., Trusler, K., Hill, A. & Stiles, B. (2008). Changes in undergraduate student alcohol consumption as they progress through university. BMC Public Health, 8(163).
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Journal of Public Health, 21(1), 54-59. McGee, R. & Kypri, K. (2004). Alcohol-related problems experienced by university students in New Zealand. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Public Health, 28(4), 321-323. McKenzie, K. & Gow, K. (2007). Exploring the first year academic achievement of school leavers and mature-age students through structural equation modelling. Learning and Individual Difference, 14(2), 107-123. Mullen, K., Watson, J., Swift, J. & Black, D. (2007). Young men, masculinity and alcohol. Drugs: Education, Prevention and Policy, 14(2), 151-165. Neighbors, C., Lee, C., Lewis, M. & Fossos, N. (2007). Are social norms the best predictors of outcomes among heavy-drinking college students. Journal of Studies on Alcohol and Drugs, 68, 556-565. Perkins, H. (2002). Surveying the damage: A review of research on consequences of alcohol misuse in college populations. Journal of Studies on Alcohol (Supplement 14), 91-100.
Casswell, S., Pledger, M. & Pratap, S. (2002). Trajectories of drinking from 18 to 26 years: identification and prediction. Addiction, 97, 1427 -1437.
Perkins, H. & Craig, D. (2006). A successful social norms campaign to reduce alcohol misuse among college student-athletes. Journal of Studies on Alcohol, 67, 880-889.
Chikritzhs, T., Pascal, R. & Jones, P. (2004). Under-aged drinking among 14-17 year olds and related harms in Australia. Perth: National Drug Research Institute.
Porter, J. & Pryor, J. (2007). The effects of heavy episodic alcohol use on student engagment, academic performance and time use. Journal of College Student Development, 48(4), 455-467.
Davey, J., Davey, T. & Obst, P. (2002). Alcohol consumption and drug use in a sample of Australian university students. Youth Studies Australia, 21(3), 25-32.
Powell, L., Williams, J. & Wechsler, H. (2004). Study habits and the level of alcohol use among college students. Education Economics, 12(2), 135-149.
Dowling, N., Clark, D. & Corney, T. (2006). Responsible drinking knowledge: A comparison of Australian apprentices and university students. Youth Studies Australia, 25(3), 42-48.
Raskin White, H., McMorris, B., Catalano, R., Fleming, J., Haggery, K. & Abbott, R. (2006). Increases in alcohol and marijuana use during the transition out of high school into emerging adulthood: The effects of leaving home, going to college, and high school protective factors. Journal of Studies on Alcohol, 67(6), 810-822.
Hansen, W. (1997). A Social Ecology Theory of Alcohol and Drug Use Prevention Among College and University Students Designing Alcohol and Other Drug Prevention Programs in Higher Education: Bringing Theory into Practice (pp. 155-175). Newton: U.S. Department of Education, Higher Education Centre for Alcohol and Other Drug Prevention. Herring, R., Berridge, V. & Thom, B. (2008). Binge drinking: an exploration of a confused concept. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 62, 476-479. Hughes, C., Julian, R., Richman, M., Mason, R. & Long, G. (2008). Harnessing the power of perception: Exploring the potential of peer group processes to reduce alcohol-related harm among rural youth. Youth Studies Australia, 27(2), 26-35. Karam, E., Kypri, K. & Salamoun, M. (2007). Alcohol use among college students: an international perspective. Current Opinion in Psychiatry 20(3), 213-221. Kypri, K., Langley, J., McGee, R., Saunders, J. & Williams, S. (2002). High prevalence, persistent harzardous drinking among New Zealand tertiary students. Alcohol and Alcoholism, 37(5), 457-464. Mancini-Pena, E. & Tyson, G. (2007). “I’m gonna sound like a drunk here”: Constructions of volume of consumption. Youth Studies Australia, 26(2), 35-42. Martinez, J., Sher, K. & Wood, P. (2008). Is heavy drinking really associated with attrition from college? The alcohol-attrition paradox Psychology of Addictive Behaviors, 22(3), 450-456. McAlaney, J., Bewick, B. & Hughes, C. (2011). The international development of the ‘Social Norms’ approach to drug education and prevention. Drugs: Education, Prevention and Policy. McAlaney, J. & McMahon, J. (2007). Normative beliefs, misperceptions, and heavy episodic drinking in a British student sample. Journal of Studies on Alcohol and Drugs, 68, 228-237. McBride, N., Farringdon, F., & Midford, R. (2000). What harms do young Australians experience in alcohol use situations. Australian and New Zealand
28
All beer and skittles?, Clarissa Hughes
Roche, A. & Watt, K. (1999). Drinking and university students: from celebration to inebriation. Drug and Alcohol Review, 18(4), 389-399. Roche, A. & Watt, K. (2000). Drink Smart: A Qualitative Evaluation of an Alcohol Intervention for University Students. Health Promotion Journal of Australia, 10(1). Sharmer, L. (2001). Evaluation of alcohol education programs on attitude, knowledge and self-reported behaviour of college students. Evaluation of the Health Professions, 24, 336-357. Sheehan, M. & Ridge, D. (2001). “You become really close ... you talk about the silly things you did, and we laugh”: The role of binge drinking in female secondary students’ lives. Substance Use and Misuse, 36(3), 347-372. Simao, M., Kerr-Correa, Smaira, S., Trinca, L., Floripes, T., Dalben, I., et al. (2008). Prevention of “risky” drinking among students at a Brazilian university. Alcohol & Alcoholism, 43(4), 470-476. Taylor, J. & Carroll, T. (2001). Youth alcohol consumption: Experiences and expectations. In P. Williams (Ed.), Alcohol, Young Persons and Violence (pp. 15-29). Canberra: Australian Institute of Criminology. Toumbourou, J., Hemphill, S., McMorris, B., Catalano, R. & Patton, G. (2009). Alcohol use and related harms in school students in the USA and Australia. Health Promotion International, 24(4), 373-382. Walker, K. (2000). Reported and perceived drug and alcohol use amongst Australian University students. Journal of the Australian and New Zealand Student Services, 16, 3-34. Wechsler, H. & Nelson, T. (2008). What we have learned from the Harvard School of Public Health College Alcohol Study: Focusing attention on college student alcohol consumption and the environmental conditions that promote it. Journal of Studies on Alcohol and Drugs, 69(4), 481-490. Wilks, J. (1989). Drinking patterns of Australian tertiary youth. Australian Drug and Alcohol Review (8), 55-68. vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Covering the gap Social inclusion, international students and the role of local government Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson Monash University
Jan Schapper La Trobe University
Over the last twenty years or so the number of international students in Australia has grown rapidly. At the same time, official responsibility for providing support to international students has been devolved from governments to educational institutions. In this paper we argue that while education institutions have a significant role in supporting international students, there is a large gap in social support provided to them when off-campus. This is a gap which we believe could be filled by local government, to provide international students with greater integration and security when they are off campus. The ideas outlined in this paper are based on a critical examination of international students’ experience in Australia and are intended to contribute to and advance recent debates about the safety, security and value of international students to Australian society. We argue that international students’ status as temporary visitors creates the conditions for social exclusion, that is, an inability to engage fully in the economic, cultural, social and political aspects of Australian life. In light of this, we suggest that local government, especially as it relates to the provision of human services, has a role in helping international students access social support services. We argue that local government can be instrumental in ensuring the social inclusion of international students in our communities. This, we suggest, would improve international students’ overall study experience and contribute to their greater integration and participation in the Australian community.
Introduction
national students, due to their position as ‘non-citizens’ and ‘temporary migrants’, are relegated to outsider status
Over the last twenty years or so, political strategies and
despite the fact that they are invited to live in Australia for
policy development at Federal and State levels of govern-
an extended period of time.This outsider status has impli-
ment have driven the growth of international education
cations for international students’ safety and security as
in Australia. At the same time, official responsibility for
past events have demonstrated (Forbes-Mewett & Nyland
providing support to the international students who have
2008; Marginson et al. 2010).
arrived in Australia as a result of these policies, has been
In this paper we argue that while education institutions
devolved from governments to educational institutions
have a significant role in supporting international students,
(Marginson, Nyland, Sawir & Forbes-Mewett, 2010).This is
there is a large gap in social support provided to interna-
problematic for several reasons, not least of which is that
tional students’ when off-campus. This is a gap which we
the majority of issues experienced by international stu-
believe could be filled by local government, to provide
dents occur off campus, an area where education institu-
international students with greater integration and secu-
tions are able to provide only limited support (Marginson,
rity when they are away from their education institutions’
2011). We agree with Marginson et al. (2010) that inter-
grounds. In adopting this position we take up the point
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
29
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
from Marginson et al. (2010, p. 458) that, ‘It is crucial to
some means or organisation to formally provide critical
improve coordination between the universities and other
support (e.g. housing, employment, integration, advocacy,
public agencies, especially policy, local government [our
etc.) to international students off-campus, in conjunc-
emphasis] and state officials handling housing or tenancy
tion with the on-campus support provided by education
and health services.’ However, we go even further. It is our
institutions. We suggest that local government – given
contention that local government can do more than just
its role, engagement and proximity with the community
provide accommodation and health services to interna-
and existing services – is a good, although not necessarily
tional students. We argue that local government can be
ideal, choice to fulfil this role.
instrumental in ensuring the social inclusion of interna-
In this paper we first discuss the role of international
tional students in our communities. In light of concerns
students in Australia and the issues they face. We then spe-
about international students’ safety and security there is
cifically explore how international students are socially
potential for education institutions and local government
excluded from Australian society and the impact this has
to work together to provide a system of whole-of-life sup-
on their security and lived experience. Next, the regu-
port to international students whist studying in Australia.
latory support structure for international students is dis-
This, we suggest, would improve international students’
cussed. We then move on to describe the role of local
overall study experience and contribute to their greater
government in Australia. Finally, we posit what exactly
integration and participation in the Australian community.
local government should be doing to support interna-
We argue that developing ways to improve the sup-
tional students in their off-campus lives.
port provided to international students, and thereby their social inclusion and overall experience, is important for
International students in Australia
both economic and moral reasons. Morally, we believe it is highly unethical to accept international students into
International students are a significant presence in Aus-
Australia and then essentially abandon them once they
tralian society. Their gross contribution to the Australian
arrive, expecting them to adapt to life in a foreign country
economy was approximately $18.6b in export earnings
without appropriate support (Peterson, Briggs, Dreasher,
(across all levels of international education) in FY2009/10
Horner, & Nelson, 1999). Economically speaking, provid-
(Australian Education International, 2011), provide on
ing comprehensive support for international students is
average 15 per cent of Australian universities’ budgets,
important because a reputation for safety and the guar-
and sometimes much more (Senate Standing Commit-
antees of a positive experience are a source of advantage
tee on Education, Employment and Workplace Relations
in the increasingly competitive international education
2009), and comprise 25 per cent of all students in Austral-
market (Lane, 2011; Mazzarol & Soutar, 2002).
ian post-secondary education (Department of Education,
The ideas outlined in this paper may be controver-
Employment and Workplace Relations [DEEWR], 2009).
sial; however they are based on a critical examination of
International education is Australia’s fourth largest export
international students’ experience in Australia. We accept
(Marginson, 2011) and largest service export (Australian
that while not all our suggestions may be feasible they
Education International 2011). As such, the export of edu-
are intended to contribute to and advance recent debates
cational services to international students represents an
about the safety, security and value of international stu-
important contribution to Australia’s (and its universities)
dents to Australian society.We argue that international stu-
economic prosperity.
dents’ status as temporary visitors creates the conditions
International students also bring many non-economic
for social exclusion, that is, an inability to engage fully in
benefits to Australia, benefits rarely discussed in the pop-
the economic, cultural, social and political aspects of Aus-
ular media and debates about the value of international
tralian life. In light of this, we suggest that local govern-
students. In an effort to redress this blindness to the ways
ment, especially as it relates to the provision of human
in which Australian society has been enriched by the pres-
services, has a role in helping international students gain
ence of international students, Adams, Banks and Olsen
access to social support services.
(2011) provide a comprehensive list of benefits including;
The current lack of support for international students
enhancement of public diplomacy and trade, especially
in their off-campus lives is concerning, and likely has neg-
through alumni of Australian institutions; a culturally rich
ative consequences for not just their social inclusion in
learning environment for local students; greater interna-
the broader Australian community, but their overall study
tional understanding and awareness among all students;
experience as well. We believe there is a pressing need for
and development of multinational professional and per-
30
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
sonal networks by students. While such benefits are dif-
networks. These findings are not revelations; the majority
ficult to quantify, international students enhance the
of the issues identified have been documented during
culture and knowledge of Australian society and extend
preceding decades by other researchers (for example, see
Australia’s political influence in addition to more tangible
Mori, 2000; Perrucci & Hu, 1995; Yeh & Inose, 2003). Yet,
economic contributions.
despite being well known, these problems have persisted.
While international students and their welfare have
Amongst this list of difficulties faced by international
been of interest to academics for some time (see Margin-
students, it is clear that most involve their lives outside
son et al., 2010), recent events have raised the profile of
their educational institution. It is off-campus that interna-
international students and the issues they face as (tempo-
tional students confront problems such as finding suitable
rary) members of Australian society. Unfortunately, it has
accommodation and employment, exploitation by land-
not been the growing awareness of their contributions to
lords and employers, personal safety concerns or discrimi-
Australian society that has recently brought international
nation by locals (Marginson et al., 2010; Paltridge, 2009).
students and international education into the spotlight
Dealing with such issues is challenging and, unfortunately,
(Babacan, Pyke, Bhathal, Gill, Grossman & Bertone, 2010;
many international students who do experience difficul-
Commonwealth of Australia, 2010a; Council of Australian
ties in Australia suffer severe consequences because they
Governments, 2010; Jakubowicz & Monani, 2010). It has
lack the support network possessed by locals (Deumert,
instead been the involvement of international students,
Marginson, Nyland, Ramia & Sawir, 2005; Forbes-Mewett
either as victims or alleged perpetrators, in incidents of
& Nyland, 2008). These outcomes, we argue, are a con-
violent crimes, along with revelations of exploitation and
sequence of the social exclusion international students
visa fraud that have focussed the attention of the media
experience in Australia.
and different government agencies on their plight and off-
Social Exclusion and International Students
campus activities. We acknowledge that there is a danger in focusing on high profile incidents that involve international students
Compared to Australian citizens and permanent residents,
in Australia and that, despite the many negative stories in
international students do not have the same ability to
the media, the majority of students who have participated
participate socially, economically, politically or culturally
in surveys indicated they are satisfied with their experi-
within the community. This we argue results in the social
ences in Australia. For instance, according to the Interna-
exclusion of the majority of international students in Aus-
tional Student Survey 2010 (Commonwealth of Australia,
tralia. As mentioned in the introduction to this paper, we
2010b), conducted by the Federal Government over 2009
support the arguments made by Marginson et al., (2010)
and 2010, approximately 86 per cent of surveyed interna-
that international students are generally outsiders in Aus-
tional students across all education categories were satis-
tralian society as a consequence of their status as tem-
fied or very satisfied with their experience of living in
porary non-citizens. This has negative implications for
Australia. However, this does not mean that they do not
international students’ safety and security, as evidenced by
experience problems. It must also be said that of those
past incidents of violence and exploitation against them
14 per cent who were not satisfied with their experience
(Forbes-Mewett & Nyland, 2008; Marginson et al., 2010).
in Australia many would have faced serious issues, some
We are well aware, having constructed the difficulties
potentially life threatening. It is an unfortunate fact that a
of international students within the conceptual frame
number of international students have died or been killed,
of social inclusion and exclusion, that there are defini-
usually off-campus, and under terrible circumstances
tional and political problems associated with these terms.
(Marginson et al., 2010; Olding & Kwek, 2012).
According to Silver (1994) defining social exclusion is a
Following their extensive research Marginson and col-
difficult task, with Atkinson (2000) and Millar (2007) argu-
leagues (2010) published a comprehensive study of the
ing that it is not so much that there are no definitions of
issues experienced by international students in Australia.
social exclusion, but that there are many, most of them
The list of problematic areas for international students
vague, and all of them contested. Not only is the use of
is too large to list here, but some examples include the
the word ‘exclusion’ endlessly disputed (Gallie, 1956, as
difficulty in finding affordable accommodation in safe
cited in Silver, 1994) but social exclusion itself is consid-
neighbourhoods relatively close to their study location,
ered an ambiguous concept that is ‘loaded with numerous
exploitation by employers, personal safety, living and
economic, social, political, and cultural connotations and
studying in a foreign language, and establishing new social
dimensions’ (Silver, 1994, p. 536). The same has also been
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
31
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
said of social inclusion, with Caidi and Allard (2005) argu-
cance was exemplified in 2009 by the slow response of
ing that its multiple meanings have been created oppor-
governments to the spate of violent attacks against inter-
tunistically to justify different policy initiatives.
national students. It was only after large-scale street pro-
Despite these definitional and conceptual difficulties
tests and strong diplomatic pressure from home country
we persevere with the concepts of social exclusion and
governments that the Australian Federal and State Gov-
inclusion because they are generally used as concepts
ernments initiated any action to address the safety con-
capable of encompassing the broader social and eco-
cerns of international students (Nyland, Forbes-Mewett
nomic issues that marginalised groups, such as interna-
& Marginson, 2010).
tional students in Australia, face. In support of our use
In the social dimension, international students fre-
of social exclusion Millar (2007) and Raffo and Gunter
quently lose the support of family, friends and commu-
(2008) contend that at the most basic level, social exclu-
nity when they move overseas to study (Forbes-Mewett
sion describes multi-dimensional socio-economic pro-
& Nyland, 2008). Students often find it difficult to replace
cesses which cause specific groups or individuals, in
these relationships due to language barriers, cultural dif-
specific locations to be excluded/included in specific
ferences, and heavy study and work-loads. These factors
ways from mainstream society. Those suffering from
limit time for socialising. Limited financial resources also
social exclusion are ‘excluded not only from the goods
reduce students’ ability to participate in many common
and standards of living available to the majority but also
social activities.Added to this is the unwillingness of many
from their opportunities, choices and life chances’ (Millar,
locals to form friendships with international students,
2007, p. 2). According to Steinert (2003), the dimensions
greatly limiting their access to informal support networks.
of social exclusion are generally agreed to include political, economic, social and cultural activities.
Economically speaking, international students have limited work rights and limited knowledge about their rights
In our view, the same characteristics apply to social
in Australian workplaces.This means they can and do face
inclusion. However in the interest of conceptual clarity
exploitation by employers (e.g. Babacan et al., 2010; Ham,
we acknowledge that there is much debate about the
2011). These two factors can also overlap in that some
relationship between social inclusion and social exclu-
international students need to work more than 20 hours
sion (O’Reilly, 2005). Some authors contend that the
per week during semester in order to support themselves,
concepts are binary opposites, while others argue that
thus breaching their visa conditions; some employers
being not socially excluded does not mean one is socially
then use this fact to exploit those students under the
included and vice versa. O’Reilly (2005) suggests that the
threat they will inform the Department of Immigration
two concepts lie on opposite ends of a continuum. The
and Citizenship (DIAC) of the student’s breach. Of course,
advantage of this conceptualisation is that it allows for
such excessive work hours are likely detrimental to inter-
varying degrees of inclusion/exclusion and also for the
national students’ studies and it would be best if they had
two terms to be used interchangeably. We have chosen to
sufficient financial resources that they did not need to
adopt O’Reilly’s (2005) conceptualisation here as it is logi-
work more than 20 hours per week in order to support
cal and makes discussion involving these concepts easier.
themselves. While one of the requirements for a student
Consequently, the two terms are used interchangeably in
visa in Australia is providing proof that one has access to
this paper.
sufficient money to cover tuition fees and living expenses
There are numerous ways in which international stu-
for the duration of one’s study, the required amount being
dents are socially excluded from political, social, cultural
set arbitrarily by the Australian government, this is only
and economic processes and activities in Australia. For
checked when applying for a visa. Hence, potential inter-
example, when we examine the political dimension,
national students can ‘fake’ access to the required money
international students are not citizens of the host coun-
(e.g. borrow money temporarily, claim sponsorship from
try and therefore can only lay claim to the reduced rights
a relative who won’t actually pay, etc.) and thereby obtain
of a temporary migrant (Deumert et al., 2005). One of
a student visa without actually having sufficient finan-
the most important citizenship rights is the right to vote.
cial resources to support themselves without working
Although we are not necessarily advocating for interna-
excessive hours (Marginson et al., 2010). In addition, the
tional students to be given the right to vote in Australia,
amount of money accessible per year required by the
we do suggest their lack of enfranchisement means they
Australian government was, before being increased on 1
are not likely to be afforded a priority amongst politi-
January 2010 (Bowen, 2009), far too low for a student to
cians’ many constituencies. Their lack of political signifi-
actually survive on (Marginson et al., 2010). International
32
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
students also often find it difficult to access safe accom-
Despite these many different ways that international
modation due to financial issues and/or lack of rental his-
students are excluded from support and services that
tory. Further, international students do not have access
most Australian citizens take for granted, it should be
to many common support services, such as free public
noted that the Australian Government does not entirely
healthcare (they must have private health insurance) and
absolve itself from any legislative responsibility for
welfare, and in Victoria and New South Wales, in contrast
their well-being while studying in Australia. However, as
to all other states and territories, they are also ineligible
noted in the introduction to this paper, the government
for student concession tickets for public transport.
responsibilities are essentially devolved in their entirety
Culturally, the majority of international students come
to educational institutions. The next section of the paper
from Asia and are not part of the dominant Anglo-Austral-
examines what these responsibilities are and how they
ian culture. This can cause some of the students to feel
have been devolved.
quite lonely and separate from the society around them, as their concerns and view of the world are quite different (Sawir, Marginson, Deumert, Nyland & Ramia, 2008).
Support for International Students in Australia
However, if they are of the same culture as an immigrant group that is already established in Australia then they
By their very nature international students have greatly
may find some similar cultural contexts and a greater
reduced security (physical, social, economic) compared
level of acceptance and recognition of their culture by mainstream Australian society than those from cultures which are little known in Australia. International students from Western nations such as the United States or Europe therefore typically find ‘fitting in’ much easier
to citizens or permanent
Compared to Australian citizens and permanent residents, international students do not have the same ability to participate socially, economically, politically or culturally within the community. This we argue results in the social exclusion of the majority of international students in Australia.
than those from non-West-
residents of the host country, or what they would enjoy in their home nations. This is a combined result of their status as temporary migrants; their general loss of informal social networks as a consequence of moving to a foreign country where they know few, if any, people
ern cultures (Chapdelaine &
(Forbes-Mewett & Nyland,
Alexitch, 2004; Sawir et al., 2008).
2008); and their social exclusion. Consequently, interna-
In summary, by being socially excluded, international
tional students generally need far greater support than
students have reduced security across all four dimen-
local students in order to compensate for, and address,
sions of social inclusion – political, economic, cultural and
their reduced security and social exclusion. However, in
social. For international students, social, economic politi-
Australia, currently this additional support is at best only
cal, and cultural exclusion has significant consequences
partially available (with the possible exception of univer-
for their security and well-being. The more a group is
sity accommodation; see Paltridge, Mayson & Schapper,
socially excluded the more vulnerable its members are
2010).
to life’s misfortunes (Babacan et al., 2010). Physical secu-
In Australia, the Education Services for Overseas Stu-
rity is reduced as those who are considered to be ‘outsid-
dents (ESOS) Act provides the security framework for
ers’ are more frequently found in areas where they are
international students by outlining government and
likely to be the target of street crime and more likely to
education institutions’ formal responsibilities towards
be exploited by employers and landlords. Social security
international students. The National Code of Practice for
is reduced because those who exist on the edge of soci-
Registration Authorities and Providers of Education and
ety have less access to both formal and informal support
Training to Overseas Students 2007, which is established
networks. Economic security suffers because those who
under the ESOS Act (Department of Education, Employ-
are socially excluded find it more difficult to obtain safe,
ment and Workplace Relations, 2007), stipulates that edu-
well-paying employment, and/or access welfare. Cultur-
cation institutions are to provide ‘…the opportunity for
ally, international students are faced with different norms,
students to participate in services or provide access to
customs and attitudes, which may make it difficult for
services designed to assist students in meeting course
them to navigate life in Australia.
requirements and maintaining their attendance.’ (p. 16),
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
33
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
as well as ‘…the opportunity for students to access
extensive range of rights while studying in Australia. We
welfare-related support services to assist with issues
argue then there exists a need for some institution(s) to
that may arise during their study, including course pro-
provide much-needed support to international students
gress and attendance requirements and accommodation
when off-campus. Our contention is that local govern-
issues. These services must be provided at no additional
ment (also known as local councils or municipal coun-
cost to the student.’ (p. 16). Such requirements, in addi-
cils – sometimes abbreviated to just ‘councils’), due to its
tion to being vague, only mandate education institutions
position and role within the community, can and should
to provide minimal support services in relation to their
perform this function.
study and course requirements. With the exception of involvement in accommodation issues, the ESOS Act does
The role of local government in Australia
not cover international students’ lives away from campus.
the legislation, the government may have hoped that com-
‘Out of all spheres of government in Australia, local governments possess the closest relationship with communities and therefore have a unique opportunity to gain an understanding of, and to meet particular local and community needs.’ (Department of Infrastructure, Transport, Regional Development and Local Government 2010, p. 2)
petitive pressure would encourage education institutions
Due to proximity to its constituency, local government has
to provide a high level of service as a means of making
a significant role in shaping communities that are ‘civil,
themselves more attractive to prospective international
equitable, culturally sensitive, environmentally sustainable
students. However, this appears not to have occurred.
and democratic’ (Kiss, 1999, p. 110). This is reflected in
It is suggested this has not been the case because, until
the ongoing trend of increasing the provision of human
recently, the number of potential international students
services which assists local government to address prob-
wanting to study in Australia well exceeded the capacity
lems specific to their community. We include in this view
of education institutions to take them (Marginson, 2011),
of local community international students who reside in
thus limiting competitive pressure between education
local communities, albeit temporarily, and the community
institutions. Further, to do so would mitigate a significant
specific issues that arise for them.
This means that international students must rely primarily on whatever informal and limited support networks they possess to help them live, study and work within the Australian community. Marginson et al. (2010) suggest that when formulating
rationale for inviting international students to Australia -
Although traditionally considered as being only respon-
the subsidisation of domestic student places and research
sible for the 3 Rs of ‘roads, rates and rubbish’, in the
(Marginson, 2011; Marginson et al., 2010; Thakur & Hou-
last two decades local government has steadily moved
rigan, 2007). Given these factors, there appears little com-
towards the provision of human services to the local com-
petitive incentive for education institutions to provide
munity (Dollery, Wallis & Allan, 2006). This shift means
more than the bare minimum of legally mandated support
that local government is more responsive to the broader
services to international students.
social and cultural demands of their communities. Dollery
Added to this, and perhaps very tellingly, international
et al. (2006, p. 555) state ‘In essence, Australian councils
students are referred to in the Act as consumers of edu-
are moving away from their traditional narrow empha-
cational services (as opposed to human beings or tem-
sis on “services to property” towards a broader “services
porary citizens) and hence as we have argued above, the
to people” approach.’ Such services include, but are not
burden of care is effectively passed on almost entirely to
limited to, health, welfare, community development and
the students (Marginson et al., 2010). The result is that
recreation (Haratsis, 1992; Jones, 1989; Morris, 1986;
international students are reliant primarily on their own,
Thornton, 1995).
often weak, informal support networks when off campus.
Of course, a major constraint for most local govern-
This begins to explain why international students, beyond
ments in providing services to the community is limited
the reach of existing regulation or the (often limited) sup-
financial resources (Dollery et al., 2006) and the needs
port services provided by educational institutions, end up
of international students may not be high on local gov-
in precarious and sometimes dangerous situations leaving
ernments’ to do lists. Consequently, most councils tend to
them open to violence and/or exploitation.
focus on what they see as their core business – providing
There is little political pressure at this time to change
key services to ratepayers.And hence, as Dunn,Thompson,
the ESOS Act and it is therefore unlikely in the foreseeable
Hanna, Murphy and Burnley (2001) found, many councils
future that international students will be granted a more
see the promotion of multiculturalism and addressing the
34
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
needs of diverse community groups as secondary to their
regional cities, for example the City of Adelaide (Adelaide
‘core’ business and are reluctant to spend money on such
City Council, n.d.a, n.d.b) in South Australia and the City
programmes. Dunn et al. (2001), however, argue against
of Wollongong (Wollongong UniCentre, 2012) in regional
this position, identifying numerous ways that the services
New South Wales. Despite not being citizens or permanent
and programmes provided by local government fail to
residents of Australia, international students are residents of
reflect the diversity of the community they are supposed
the communities in which they live while completing their
to represent. They state that ‘…failing to incorporate
studies and for up to four years afterwards (with recent
multiculturalism in local government risks the situation
changes to the international student visa regime; Evans &
where local administrations selectively determine —
Bowen 2011), and consequently have an impact on that
either overtly or implicitly — who is and is not effectively
community.Therefore, just like any other significant minor-
a local citizen.’ (Dunn et al. 2001, p. 2479).
ity or interest group, international students have a right to
In the context of limited budgets and contestation
protection and support from local government.
around whose needs are met or not met by local govern-
Given that local government has the capacity to at least
ment, it is little surprise that temporary residents such as
partially address many of the issues international students
international students are generally neither considered
face, there is a role and opportunity for local government
nor included within community activities. This, we argue,
to ameliorate students’ current experience of social exclu-
needs to change. Local government areas with substantial
sion and improve their security through the provision
international student populations (generally those that
of support services. This includes but is not limited to
accommodate, or are near, education institutions) must
information on tenancy and employment rights, advocacy
recognise that international students make up a signifi-
when dealing with landlords and employers, the establish-
cant group within their local community and need to take
ment and/or promotion of home-stay programmes, the
steps to respond to their needs and provide them with
promotion of multiculturalism within the community, the
support services.
establishment of social programmes to encourage international students to build social networks and promote gen-
What local government can and should be doing to support international students
eral interaction between locals and international students. Many local governments already provide support services and programmes to their communities that would
In 2011, there were approximately 474,000 international
be useful to international students, but in many cases it
students (combined total for all sectors) living in Australia,
appears the international students do not access these
down from approximately 524,000 in 2010 (Australian
services either because of lack of eligibility or awareness
Education International, 2012). The majority of these stu-
that they are available (Victorian Immigrant and Refugee
dents live in neighbourhoods which are relatively close to
Women’s Coalition 2009, as cited in Dunstan 2011). For
their education institutions (Marginson et al., 2010). This
example, many local governments offer language and
means that international students are primarily concen-
youth services, as well as run community events designed
trated in local government areas that include or are close
to promote multiculturalism (for example, see City of
to, education institutions. Consequently, international stu-
Greater Dandenong, n.d.a, n.d.b; City of Melbourne, n.d.a,
dents will likely be a significant presence in particular local
n.d.b; Darebin City Council, 2011a, 2011b). Such activities
government areas. For example, the City of Melbourne (a
could easily be extended to include, and/or be marketed
local government area which includes the central business
to, international students; as some local governments are
district and several inner suburbs of Melbourne, Victoria)
already doing.
contains eight universities and over 90 private education
However, a simple but effective initiative that can be
institutions (primarily vocational educational and training
adopted by a local government council to assist its interna-
colleges), with international students accounting for 27.5
tional student population is the establishment of a consul-
per cent of enrolments in 2008 (City of Melbourne, 2010).
tative committee that involves the students in discussions
This has resulted in international students coming to com-
and decisions around the provision of services relevant to
prise approximately one third of all young people living in
their needs. We know that Darebin City Council – a local
the City and about 10 per cent of its total resident popu-
government area in the north of metropolitan Melbourne,
lation (City of Melbourne, 2010). International students
Victoria – has established the Darebin Overseas Student
are also recognised as a visible community group by local
Association. Similarly Melbourne City Council has estab-
governments in a number of other Australian capital and
lished a committee called InterComm3.These committees
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
35
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
permit a dialogue between the Councils and students,
but included within these broader programmes are poli-
giving international students a voice that is easily heard
cies designed primarily to benefit international students.
by Council. We contend that these examples are a vital
The ‘packaging’ approach serves to not only reduce the
first step for setting up a successful international student
overall cost of providing support services specifically for
support programme because engagement and empower-
international students by making them relevant to multi-
ment are essential to addressing the social inclusion and
ple sections of the population, but also makes the overall
security needs of international students.
programme more appealing and relevant to the com-
While some may argue that the provision of support
munity. This, we contend, is vital for programme survival
services for international students represents a signifi-
because such an approach assists in maintaining commu-
cant burden on the limited financial resources of many
nity support and political will for the programme.
local governments, there are ways to mitigate the cost.
Finally, to further strengthen support programmes,
Volunteers (including international students themselves)
coordination and information sharing local government
can be used to run many programmes, as Darebin Coun-
and educational institutions could share or spread costs
cil has done with its Festival of Lights event which served
between both parties while also increasing awareness
as a welcome to international students and celebration of
of available programmes, particularly by leveraging insti-
Darebin’s cultural diversity.The use of student volunteers
tutional communication channels, such as email lists
is of benefit not just to local government budgets but to the students themselves for participation in community activities can address issues of social isolation, develop English
language
compe-
tence and promote community development. Services and programmes could also
and social media. This type
While some may argue that the provision of support services for international students represents a significant burden on the limited financial resources of many local governments, there are ways to mitigate the cost. Volunteers (including international students themselves) can be used to run many programmes...
of scheme could potentially
provide
education
institutions with a source of competitive advantage, especially in today’s falling market for international students, by allowing them to offer a broader range of services to students at low cost.
be run in conjunction with
Cost and information shar-
charities, community groups
ing arrangements could be
and religious groups, thereby splitting the costs between
mutually beneficial for both local government and edu-
multiple parties. For example, the ‘The Couch’ interna-
cation institutions with regard to providing support ser-
tional student centre in the Melbourne CBD was estab-
vices to international students. For example, as a move
lished by the Salvation Army, but with support from the
in this direction, the cities of Brisbane (a local govern-
City of Melbourne (Perkins 2009). Similarly, the “Welcome
ment area which includes the entire metropolitan area
to Wollongong Project” is a joint initiative of the City of
of Brisbane in Queensland; Study Brisbane, n.d.), Dare-
Wollongong (a regional coastal city located to the south
bin (Darebin City Council, 2011b) and Wollongong (Wol-
of Sydney, in New South Wales), various education institu-
longong UniCentre, 2012) all have their civic welcome
tions located in Wollongong, and the Illawarra Business
events for international students sponsored, in part, by
Chamber (Wollongong UniCentre, 2012). Another sug-
some education institutions located in their local gov-
gestion is to simply extend and/or raise awareness of
ernment areas.
existing and relevant local government services to inter-
In summary, international students are a substantial
national students thereby reducing costs of establishing
minority in many local government areas, particularly
new services.
those that contain, or are close to, major higher education
There is also much to be gained from packaging inter-
institutions. In the absence of support for international
national student support programmes into larger support
students outside their educational institution and minimal
programmes which target broader sections of the com-
on-campus support, local governments need to acknowl-
munity. For example, both the City of Adelaide (a local
edge the presence of international students within the
government area covering the CBD of Adelaide in South
community they service and provide them with appropri-
Australia; Adelaide City Council, n.d.a, n.d.b) and the City
ate support services, just as they would with any other
of Melbourne (2010) have a large suite of social support
significant community group. Local government has the
programmes directed towards young people in general,
capacity to assist international students and address many
36
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
of their issues, including their social exclusion and poor
This significant short-fall in the formal support net-
security. We have outlined in this section the numerous
work for international students opens up opportunities
ways in which local governments can provide support,
for local governments to fill this gap and the potential for
giving international students a voice being of particular
local government and education institutions to partner in
importance. We have also offered suggestions for how
providing support for international students. We argue
local governments can reduce the financial burden of
the role of local government in Australia is to meet the
providing services, including working with local educa-
needs of the community, as well as to create a community
tion institutions.
which is civil, equitable and culturally sensitive. In recent times fulfilling this role has increasingly meant the provi-
Conclusion
sion of human services, such as healthcare, community development and recreation. International students form
International students, due to their legal status and mar-
part of the local community during their stay in the host
ginal location in Australian society, experience social
nation. As such, they deserve to be considered a part of
exclusion and a reduced level of security in Australia. As
the perceived community for which their local govern-
a consequence they require a greater level of on-campus,
ment is responsible and to have their needs met and con-
but particularly off-campus, support compared to local
cerns listened to. Therefore, we argue local governments
students. There are both economic and ethical reasons
have a role, particularly those who have significant inter-
for ensuring that international students are provided with
national student populations within their boundaries, to
this additional support. However, as a number of scholars
extend existing services to include international students
show (e.g. Deumert et al., 2005; Marginson et al., 2010;
and, where necessary, establish new services to provide
Marginson, 2011) the current legislated welfare and secu-
them with essential support.
rity regime in Australia, and the level of support provided
For many local governments, the provision of such
to international students is inadequate. International stu-
services will primarily be constrained by their limited
dents are not simply consumers of educational services;
financial resources. However, this should not prevent
they are temporary residents who need access to appro-
them from incorporating multiculturalism into their core
priate support.
services and thus providing services to international stu-
Deumert et al. (2005) and Marginson (2011), propose
dents. In this paper we have made several suggestions as
a comprehensive international student security regime
to how the financial burden can be shared or reduced. In
based on international students as global citizens deserv-
fact, the most important step that a local government can
ing of full human rights. Unfortunately, at the current time
take with regard to providing support to international stu-
– despite a review of the ESOS Act (Commonwealth of
dents, and one that is not very expensive at all, is to give
Australia, 2010a), an investigation into the industry by the
them a voice through the creation of a local consultative
Senate Standing Committee on Education, Employment
body, and to listen to that voice.
and Workplace Relations (2009), and the development of
We contend that local government is in a good, although
an international student strategy out to 2014 by the Coun-
far from perfect, position to fill the gap in support to
cil of Australian Governments (2010) – neither the Austral-
international students left by the current legislative frame-
ian Federal Government nor any of the State Governments
work. However, such support will only be forthcoming
have moved to adopt such an extensive international stu-
when international students are recognised as legitimate
dent security regime. Consequently, the support services
members of their local community and given a voice in
for international students legally required to be provided
decisions that affect them which is commensurate with
by government and education institutions remain insuf-
this position. Until that time, international students will
ficient, particularly as it relates to international students’
face an uncertain and insecure future as outsiders existing
lives off-campus. This may become even more of an issue
on the fringes of Australian society.
as international students begin to take advantage of recent changes to the international student visa regime allowing
Toby Paltridge is a PhD student and Susan Mayson is an aca-
them to stay for up to four years after completing their
demic in the Department of Management, Monash University,
studies (Evans & Bowen, 2011), as those students unable
Australia.
to obtain quality employment (or any employment at all) may find themselves still with limited financial resources
Jan Schapper is an academic in the Department of Manage-
but even less support.
ment, La Trobe Business School, Australia.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
37
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
References Adams, T., Banks, M. & Olsen, A. (2011). Benefits of international education: enriching students, enriching communities. In Davis, D. & Mackintosh, B. (Eds.), Making a difference: Australian international education (pp. 9-46). Sydney, Australia: University of New South Wales Press Ltd. Adelaide City Council. (n.d.a). Youth Strategy 2010-2014. Retrieved from http://www.adelaidecitycouncil.com/assets/acc/Community/youth/docs/ youth_strategy.pdf. Adelaide City Council. (n.d.b). Youth Action Plan 2010-2011. Retrieved from http://www.adelaidecitycouncil.com/assets/acc/Community/youth/docs/ youth_action_plan.pdf. Atkinson, R. (2000). Combating social exclusion in Europe: The new urban policy challenge. Urban Studies, 37(5–6), 1037–1055. Australian Education International. (2011). Export Income to Australia from Education Services in 2009-10. Retrieved from: https://aei.gov.au/AEI/PublicationsAndResearch/Snapshots/2011011401_pdf.pdf. Australian Education International. (2012). International student numbers 2011. Retrieved from: http://www.aei.gov.au/research/Research-Snapshots/ Documents/International%20Student%20Numbers%202011.pdf. Babacan, H., Pyke, J., Bhathal, A., Gill, G., Grossman, M. & Bertone, S. (2010). The community safety of international students in Melbourne: A scoping study. Retrieved from:http://www.vu.edu.au/sites/default/files/icepa/pdf/The%20 Community%20Safety%20of%20International%20Students%20in%20Melb%20 A%20Scoping%20Study.pdf. Bowen, C. (2009). New visa measures to assist international students. Retrieved on May 16, 2012, from http://www.minister.immi.gov.au/media/mediareleases/2009/ce09101.htm.
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Commonwealth of Australia. (2010b). International student survey 2010. Retrieved from http://www.aei.gov.au/AEI/PublicationsAndResearch/Publications/2010_International_Student_Report_pdf.pdf. Council of Australian Governments. (2010). International student strategy for Australia. Retrieved from http://www.coag.gov.au/reports/docs/aus_international_students_strategy.pdf. Darebin City Council. (2011a). Multicultural services. Retrieved on March 21, 2012, from http://www.darebin.vic.gov.au/Page/Page.aspx?Page_Id=102. Darebin City Council. (2011b). Festival of light and friendship. Retrieved on March 21, 2012, from http://www.darebin.vic.gov.au/page/Page.aspx?Page_ Id=7934. Department of Education, Employment and Workplace Relations. (2007). National Code of Practice for Registration Authorities and Providers of Education and Training to Overseas Students 2007. Retrieved from https:// www.aei.gov.au/Regulatory-Information/Education-Services-for-OverseasStudents-ESOS-Legislative-Framework/National-Code/Documents/National_ Code_2007_pdf.pdf. Department of Education, Employment and Workplace Relations. (2009). Students: Selected Higher Education Statistics. Retrieved on December 3, 2009, from http://www.dest.gov.au/sectors/higher_education/publications_resources/ profiles/Students/2008_full_year.htm. Department of Infrastructure, Transport, Regional Development and Local Government. (2010). 2007-08 local government national report. Retrieved from http://www.infrastructure.gov.au/local/publications/pdf/LGNR_2007-08.pdf. Deumert, A., Marginson, S., Nyland, C., Ramia, G. and Sawir, E. (2005). Global migration and social protection rights: the social and economic security of crossborder students in Australia. Global Social Policy, 5(3), 329-352.
Caidi, N. & Allard, D. (2005). Social inclusion of newcomers to Canada: An information problem? Library and Information Science Research, 27(3), 302-324.
Dollery, B., Wallis, J. & Allan, P. (2006). The debate that had to happen but never did: the changing role of Australian local government. Australian Journal of Political Science, 41(4), 553–567.
Chapdelaine, R. & Alexitch, L. (2004). Social Skills Difficulty: Model of Culture Shock for International Graduate Students. Journal of College Student Development, 45(2), 167-184.
Dunn, K., Thompson, S., Hanna, B., Murphy, P. & Burnley, I. (2001). Multicultural Policy within Local Government in Australia. Urban Studies, 38(13), 2477–2494.
City of Greater Dandenong. (n.d.a). Afghan Bazaar Cultural Tours. Retrieved on March 21, 2012, from http://www.greaterdandenong.com/Documents.asp?ID =10306&Title=Afghan+Bazaar+Cultural+Tours.
Dunstan, P. (2011). Beyond the campus: Student engagement and community responses. In Davis, D. & Mackintosh, B. (Eds.), Making a difference: Australian international education (pp. 338-364). Sydney, Australia: University of New South Wales Press Ltd.
City of Greater Dandenong. (n.d.b). Youth Counselling & Support Services. Retrieved on March 21, 2012, from http://www.greaterdandenong.com/Documents.asp?ID=7599&Title=Youth+Counselling+%26+Support+Services&Typ e=d. City of Melbourne. (2010). Empowering young people: Young people’s policy 2010-13. Melbourne, Australia: City of Melbourne. City of Melbourne. (2012a). What’s on for international students. Retrieved on February 9, 2012, from http://www.melbourne.vic.gov.au/CommunityServices/ ForYouth/InternationalStudents/Pages/WhatsOnInternationalStudents.aspx. City of Melbourne. (2012b). International students. Retrieved on February 9, 2012, from http://www.melbourne.vic.gov.au/communityservices/foryouth/internationalstudents/Pages/Internationalstudents.aspx. City of Melbourne. (n.d.a) Multicultural services. Retrieved on March 21, 2012, from http://www.melbourne.vic.gov.au/CommunityServices/MulticulturalServices/Pages/Multiculturalservices.aspx. City of Melbourne. (n.d.b). For youth. Retrieved on March 21, 2012, from http:// www.melbourne.vic.gov.au/CommunityServices/ForYouth/Pages/Youth.aspx. Commonwealth of Australia. (2010a). Stronger, simpler, smarter ESOS: supporting international students – Review of the Education Services for Overseas Students (ESOS) Act 2000. Retrieved from http://www.aei.gov.au/AEI/ GovernmentActivities/InternationalStudentsTaskforce/ESOS_REview_Final_ Report_Feb_2010_pdf.pdf.
38
Evans, C. & Bowen, C. (2011, November 30). Government extends support for international education. Retrieved on April 2, 2012, from http://www.minister. immi.gov.au/media/cb/2011/cb180779.htm. Forbes-Mewett, H. & Nyland, C. (2008). Cultural Diversity, Relocation, and the Security of International Students at an Internationalised University. Journal of Studies in International Education, 12(2), 181-203. Ham, L. (2011, April 27). 7-Eleven operators fined $150K for exploiting students. The Age. Retrieved on May 16, 2012, from http://www.theage.com.au/smallbusiness/franchising/7eleven-operators-fined-150k-for-exploiting-students20110427-1dwct.html. Haratsis, B. (1992). Enterprise: The new business of local government. Melbourne, Australia: Hargreen. Jakubowicz, A. & Monani, D. (2010). International Student Futures in Australia: A Human Rights Perspective on Moving Forward to Real Action. Canberra, Australia: The Academy of Social Sciences in Australia. Retrieved from http://www.assa.edu.au/publications/occasional_papers/2010_No6.php. Jones, M. (1989). Managing local government: Leadership for the 21st century. Melbourne, Australia: Hargreen. Kiss, R. (1999). Local government to local administration. The new order. In Costar, B. & Economou, N. (Eds), The Kennett Revolution: Victorian politics in the 1990s (pp. 110-121). Sydney, Australia: UNSW Press.
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
Lane, B. (2011, January 26). International sector reaps record dividend, but crash looms. The Australian. Retrieved on February 1, 2011, from http://www. theaustralian.com.au/higher-education/ international-sector-reaps-recorddividend-but-crash-looms/story-e6frgcjx-1225994500389.
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Perrucci, R. & Hu, H. (1995). Satisfaction with social and educational experiences among international graduate students. Research in Higher Education, 36(4), 491-508. Peterson, D. M., Briggs, P., Dreasher, L., Horner, D. D. & Nelson, T. (1999). Contributions of international students and programs to campus diversity. New Directions for Student Services, 86, 67–77.
Marginson, S. (2011). It’s a long way down: The underlying tensions in the education export industry. Australian Universities’ Review, 53(2), 21-33. Marginson, S., Nyland, C., Sawir, E. & Forbes-Mewett, H. (2010). International student security. Cambridge, UK; New York, NY; Melbourne, Australia; Madrid, Spain; Cape Town, South Africa; Singapore, Singapore; Sao Paulo, Brazil; Delhi, India; Dubai, United Arab Emirates; Tokyo, Japan: Cambridge University Press.
Raffo, C. & Gunter, H. (2008). Leading schools to promote social inclusion: developing a conceptual framework for analysing research, policy and practice. Journal of Education Policy, 23(4), 397–414.
Mazzarol, T. & Soutar, G. (2002). “Push-pull” factors influencing international student destination choice. The International Journal of Educational Management, 16(2), 82-90. Millar, J. (2007). Social Exclusion and Social Policy Research: Defining Exclusion. In Abrams, D., Christian, J. & Gordon, D. (Eds), Multidisciplinary Handbook of Social Exclusion Research (pp. 1-16). Chichester, England; Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
Sawir, E., Marginson, S., Deumert, A., Nyland, C. and Ramia, G. (2008). Loneliness and International Students: An Australian Study. Journal of Studies in International Education, 12(3), 1-33. Senate Standing Committee on Education, Employment and Workplace Relations. (2009). Welfare of international students. Canberra, Australia: Senate Printing Unit. Silver, H. (1994). Social exclusion and social solidarity: Three paradigms. International Labour Review, 133(5-6), 531-578.
Mori, S. (2000). Addressing the mental health concerns of international students. Journal of Counselling & Development, 78(Spring), 137-144. Morris, S. (1986). Principles and programme: the restructure of local government in Victoria. Melbourne, Australia: VGPS.
Steinert, H. (2003). Introduction: The cultures of welfare and exclusion. In Steinert, H. & Pilgram, A. (Eds), Welfare policy from below: Struggles against social exclusion in Europe (pp. 1-10). Hampshire, England: Ashgate Publishing Limited.
Nyland, C., Forbes-Mewett, H. & Marginson, S. (2010). The international student safety debate: Moving beyond denial. Higher Education Research and Development, 29(1), 89-101.
Study Brisbane. (n.d.). Brisbane welcomes international students 2012. Retrieved on May 14, 2012, from http://www.studybrisbane.com.au/Study/BWIS/ Default.aspx.
Olding, R. & Kwek, G. (2012, March 22). Tasered Brazilian student had ‘brilliant future’. The Age. Retrieved on May 16, 2012, from http://www.theage.com.au/ national/tasered-brazilian-student-had-brilliant-future-20120321-1vkdr.html.
Thakur, M. & Hourigan, C. (2007). International student experience: What it is, what it means and why it matters. Journal of Institutional Research, 13(1), 42–61.
O’Reilly, D. (2005). Social inclusion: A philosophical anthropology. Politics, 25(2), 80-88.
Thornton, J. (1995). The urban parish: An alternative approach to local government amalgamation. Canberra, Australia: Local Government Development Programme Research Series.
Paltridge, T. (2009). The effect of university accommodation on international students’ socio-cultural adjustment. (Unpublished Honours dissertation). Monash University, Melbourne, Australia. Paltridge, T., Mayson, S. & Schapper, J. (2010). The contribution of university accommodation to international student security. Journal of Higher Education Policy and Management, 32(4), 353-364.
Wollongong UniCentre. (2012). Welcome to Wollongong. Retrieved on May 14, 2012, from http://unicentre.uow.edu.au/w2w/index.html. Yeh, C. & Inose, M. (2003). International students’ reported English fluency, social support satisfaction, and social connectedness as predictors of acculturative stress. Counselling Psychology Quarterly, 16(1), 15-28.
Perkins, M. (2009, July 9). Soft landing for foreign relations. The Age. Retrieved on May 16, 2012, from http://www.theage.com.au/national/soft-landing-forforeign-relations-20090708-ddfd.html.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Covering the gap, Toby Paltridge, Susan Mayson & Jan Schapper
39
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Recession-oscopy Can universities be the light at the end?
Steve Mackey Deakin University
This paper paints the philosophical and ethical backdrop to some of the issues raised in Australian Universities’ Review vol. 53, no. 2. It links academic performance pay; the measurement of research output; and the astonishing pay levels of vice chancellors to the present global financial crisis. These are explained as part of a general malaise of institutions, which has its roots in the early Enlightenment. Drawing from semioticians Charles Sanders Peirce and John Deely it uses the terms ideoscopy and cenoscopy to characterise the hijacking of unwarranted scientific status for much of the way our world is managed. But crisis can lead to opportunity. Consequently, the paper points to the glaring opportunity for thinkers who can articulate the present situation in a way which could avert disaster.
Introduction
of these two words as to do with something that probes into unusual places with a light at the end. However, 19th
How will the looming Global Financial Crisis (GFC) Mark
century philosopher of semiotics and pragmatism Charles
II affect our lives? How will it affect universities here and
Sanders Peirce would have had no idea about this future
overseas? What will courses and students look like under
implication. He coined the terms to mean respectively:
a regime of global austerity? Will Europe disintegrate into
knowledge originated in special scientific ways which it is
social strife? And, not to put too fine a point on it, what is
hard to understand if you are not a relevant specialist; and
going to happen to our superannuation? Nobody seems
knowledge which can be worked out by many people if
to know the answers to any of this. But, as TV financial
they apply logic and experience to common sense, (Peirce,
pundit Alan Kohler put it in an ABC interview in January:
1955, p. 66), (Peirce, Weiss, & Hartshorne, 1974, passim).
‘This is a very interesting time for people in my caper.’
Deely (2008) and (2009) uses these terms to explain how
Kohler was talking about his excitement as a specialist
modernity from Descartes onwards went too far down
journalist during this ‘once in a lifetime financial crisis
the ideoscopic track – the ‘trust in the experts track’ –
event’. But is this also an interesting time for those of us in
the ‘call for the consultants track’. Deely’s argument in his
the ‘academic caper’? I’d like to answer: well, yes. But, well,
2009 book contrasts Peirce’s ideoscopic and cenoscopic
perhaps no. I’ll attempt to justify this vacillation with the
notions to make the point that philosophy took an unrea-
two words:‘ideoscopy’ and ‘cenoscopy’. And this is where
sonably nominalist turn in the 17th century. Deely’s multi-
it gets a bit academic...
book project champions a deeper understanding of the realism of the correct semiotic approach, as opposed to
The cult of ideoscopy
misunderstandings of semiotics. He writes in the tradition stemming from the scholastics which runs through John
Readers whose internal health has ever been questioned
Poinsot (1589-1644) and Peirce (1838-1914). Part of his
would probably be among the first to recognise the suffix
concern is the difficulty caused by over-fascination with
40
Recession-oscopy, Steve Mackey
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
science and social science. He argues that scholarship was
Because of this sleight of hand, one of the most important
a cenoscopic activity from the times of the early Greeks
foundations of civilisation has been ceded to people now
right up to the 17th century when:
revealed to be either not at all clever or not at all ethical.
One way of understanding that historical period or epoch in European history called ‘the Enlightenment’ is precisely as that period when ideoscopy began to take hold and demand institutionalisation within the framework of the developing ‘community of inquirers’ inspired by the idea of the university... The exuberance of the early generation of inquirers who turned to ideoscopy, especially in the mathematisation of the results of experimentation and observation acquired by the systematic use of instruments which extended the unaided sense powers of the human body, led to a naive but general expectation that ideoscopy, the development of science in the definitively modern sense, would ‘slow by slow’ supplant cenoscopy entirely (Deely, 2009, p. 4).
It is apparent that many of them are at best so confident
The argument of this paper is that Enlightenment over-
ing from the mythology of expert scientific management:
enthusiasm for ideoscopic ‘experts’ rather than more
Expertise becomes a commodity for which rival state agencies and rival private corporations compete. Civil servants and managers alike justify themselves and their claims to authority, power and money by invoking their own competence as scientific managers of social change. (MacIntyre, 1985, pp. 85-86)
generally dispersed cenoscopic good sense bears responsibility for many aspects of the pretty pass which we are in today. Using Deely and Peirce’s terms it appears obvious that the world’s financial maestros have been operating in an ideoscopic manner. They have expounded their expertise in the use of hard to understand, mathematically designed ‘financial products’, ‘products’ which have resulted in economic chaos. They have honed their ‘instruments’ behind a veil of: ‘You wouldn’t understand.’ But now they are coming into view cenoscopically, i.e. in
of their own infallibility that they are deluded. At worst many are charlatans who have taken advantage of ideoscopic cultural tendencies in a way which now threatens financial ruin for many.The bankers of course continue to extract high fees or retire on big pensions.
After virtue But it is not only financial managers who have enjoyed undeserved status because of the ideoscopy of modernism. In After Virtue Alasdair MacIntyre implies that the whole of western society is riddled with people benefit-
But what if effectiveness is part of a masquerade of social control rather than reality? What if effectiveness were a quality widely imputed to managers and bureaucrats both by themselves and others, but in fact a quality which rarely exists apart from this imputation? (MacIntyre, 1985, p. 75)
common terms, to show what these ‘instruments’ really
Civil servants and managers who legislate and run uni-
are. They are ‘schemes’ ...and they are often schemes
versities are a case in point. They tend to welcome ideo-
which look quite odd. Some are schemes which should
scopically justified instrumental and vocational studies at
not be associated with the terms ‘science’ or ‘expert’.
the expense of the more cenoscopically friendly humani-
What this sudden ‘the King has no clothes’ vista suggests
ties.At the same time pure science - studies of what science
is that in the post Enlightenment world, mass estrange-
really is - is similarly downgraded. Because of the mind set
ment from participation in the creation of knowledge,
of ideoscopy the ability of students to critique and explore
mass alienation from great swathes of understanding, has
is reduced. Why would graduates need to think for them-
allowed vital areas of life to be unnecessarily obscured
selves when the world is so complicated? Why can’t they
sometimes with disastrous consequences. Earning, bor-
call in the experts, call in the consultants, call in someone
rowing, paying back and spending money is one of these
to do their thinking for them? This is the unadmitted rubric
areas. This is an area which is not rocket science. In the
of universities which are increasingly driven by the priori-
credit card era most of us earn, borrow, pay back, and
ties of industry and the priority of client career choice.This
spend every day. We are highly experienced in this activ-
concentration on doing things rather than thinking risks
ity. But those who do this on a scale capable of collapsing
eroding the intellectual culture, the intellectual quality of
the world economy while they make big money out of it
universities. It has led to professors looking like rabbits
have opted to pretend that what they do is far too hard
caught in the car headlights, impotent and dumbfounded
for ordinary people to understand. Instead of engaging in
in the current crisis. Where is their understanding about
transparent, public debate these ‘experts’ have secreted
what is really going on as we slide ever closer towards what
themselves and their processes away. They have renamed
Bank of England Governor Sir Mervyn King has described
schemes – ‘products’ and ‘instruments’ in order to make
as:‘the most serious financial crisis at least since the 1930s,
them sound more scientific, more ‘the realm of experts’.
if not ever?’ (Elliot, 2011).
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Recession-oscopy, Steve Mackey
41
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
The looming crisis After a seemingly prosperous expansionary period suddenly we face a decade when in Europe and the US, if not
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Athens’s ancient city wall contained the inscription: ‘The man with no public business has no business’. Underscoring that observation, the ancient Greek word for a person mute on public affairs was ‘idiot’. (Hauser, 1999, p. 19), (eNotes, 2011)
more widely a trillions of dollars disruption is imminent. This means food, heating, healthcare, shelter, transport,
Major economic malaise is urgent public business. Eve-
education, employment and the organisation and fund-
ryone should be discussing it intelligently. Why are we
ing of these, whether public or private, will be in shorter
not? Are we all idiots? Or are we mute because of the cult
supply. Where this does not result in people dying earlier
of ideoscopy? Has everyone, including university staff
it certainly means life will be less pleasant. Would it have
ceded this sort of discussion to the realm of the ‘expert’
come to this if people had been educated to really under-
– the opinion editorial writer; the political pundit; the
stand what was going on with their countries’ finances;
blogger; the whoever-appears-on-the-TV-screen? What
with their countries’ governance; with their countries’
seems to be the case is that where mass thinking is
morality? If universities had properly stimulated thought
not trapped into totally irrational literal religiosity – as
into what the financiers were risking would citizens have
in much of America – it is trapped into an irrational
happily agreed to the greed involved? If voters had been
belief in experts. Democratic systems require politicians
sufficiently taught the history of similar episodes would
to at least feign alignment with majority public belief.
they have gone along with the deception? If people were
But majority public belief is stuck at the ‘modern’ stage
participating in cultural expression which reflected the
described by Deely. The ‘post-modern’ is still not a term
nonsense would they have remained content with politi-
to be used in polite company without a smirk. Conse-
cal processes? Would aware, informed and intelligently
quently, politically controlled universities are unlikely
participating populations have been content to let a semi-
to pass on the realisation that the omnipotence of the
secret industry blight personal lives for a large part of the
modern scientific expert is as much a myth as is literal
21st century?
religion. Individual scientists and individual scientific
We hear little snippets of ‘research’ here and there... the
projects are of course often brilliant and indispensable.
Greek suicide rate is up; the Irish are increasing migra-
But this does not qualify institutions to claim pseudo-sci-
tion again; UK household incomes are sliding; the use of
entific justification for their methods of deciding what
water cannon has been considered on the UK mainland.
should and what should not get taught; how it should
But what is happening in universities at this interest-
or should not be taught; and what status and encourage-
ing time for those of us in the ‘academic caper’? Where
ment should be attached to particular subjects.
are the major debates? Where is rigorous analysis of the financial viability of advanced western societies and
Ideoscopy and academic management
analysis of the viability of other societies which depend on our viability? Where are the insightful forecasts of
For the same reasons the feigned ‘scientific management’
what sort of countries both varieties will be in ten years
of academics should be opposed.The inappropriate appli-
time? What opportunities might be taken of a shattering
cation of ideoscopy is the core contradiction of both
of post-war presumptions about how the world might
performance related pay for academics and journal rank-
be? How might the enormous resource of millions of out
ing fetishism as discussed in AUR vol.53, no 2, (Harkness,
of work income seekers be harnessed? How could envi-
2011), (Young, 2011). Cenoscopically we would argue that
ronmental and sustainable-planet improvements mesh
it is intelligent and moral academics who do the better job
with these factors?
in comparison to academics who are on incentive bonuses or whose work is more closely measured. But profession-
Are we all idiots?
alism; intelligence; a sense of vocation; and morality are difficult attributes to measure.They are the priceless qual-
These sorts of questions and the responses which they
ities which enable any department or group of employees
seek are not beyond the understanding of most of us.They
to function well together. But these are qualities which
and many similar discussions should be everyday parlance
are downplayed or ignored when ideoscopy becomes a
– pub talk, hair salon gossip. In the cenoscopic era of the
cult which demands the ‘hard facts’ - the mathematisa-
Greek polis ordinary citizens were referred to as ‘idiots’ if
tion of everything. There is another striking manifesta-
they were not able to articulate these sorts of public affairs:
tion which comes to the fore when ideoscopy becomes
42
Recession-oscopy, Steve Mackey
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
a cult. This is the proliferation of increasingly higher piles
educational priorities from churning out masses of rarely
of cash that are dropped like votive offerings at the feet
read technical trivia in order to meet irrelevant metrics to
of so called experts who achieve the rank of demigods:
a deeper examination of the basis of contemporary under-
top bankers; VCs; other CEOs. It is not their professional-
standings.We need a better grasp on what is really obscure
ism, their morality, their collegiality which is measured to
knowledge and what is merely obscurity. University Coun-
qualify them for their bonuses. Instead they promise inter-
cils’ members drawn from industry and commerce must
view panels that they will achieve performance targets
be replaced by genuine, intellectually committed educa-
which can be validated in some mathematical manner:
tionalists. We cannot risk another decade without people
university research ranking; student satisfaction statistics;
being educated properly. As Kohler says of his profes-
budget outcomes and so on. But piles of cash and the
sion this is indeed an interesting time for people in our
super-executive power and status which wealth implies
‘caper’: academia. It is a time of crisis – and consequently
tends to insulate top managers. They become cocooned
of opportunity. It is a time when the bases of many social
behind an outer office of those much lower on a steep
and economic understandings are vulnerable to construc-
power gradient. Underlings are people who are far more
tive questioning. One of these constructive questions is to
likely to take a ‘Yes Minister’ approach than to be criti-
do with the balance between ideoscopic and cenoscopic
cal peers. In their private lives the ostentation of VCs as
ways of investigation the world. Deely and Peirce are clear
the enriched beneficiaries of the cult of misplaced ideos-
that proper scientific method and mathematics are vital to
copy further undermines the power and morale of ordi-
the ways the contemporary world works. But we need to
nary, well meaning professionals. Cenoscopic collegiality
review what can really be understood scientifically and
declines as ideoscopically based propaganda dominates
where science is merely being hijacked for the propagan-
organisational relations.
distic exploitation of its prestige.
In this way it can be argued that every time we hear about a vice chancellor being awarded an obscene pay
Dr Steve Mackey is a Senior Lecturer in Public Relations in
level we are in fact seeing a further blow to the profes-
Deakin’s Faculty of Arts and Education.
sional nature of higher education. As VC pay levels reach the stratosphere, higher education falls into line with an intellectual repression now overseen by the business people and technocrats – the ideoscopically justified ‘experts’ who have displaced educationalists on university councils. Vocational education is all very well and good. Universities were founded on the need to teach medicine and law. But every time an academic manager says something like a dean once said to me: ‘I think you should leave that semiotics stuff alone’ [and concentrate more on my vocational subject – public relations], then, just like happens in Peter Pan, something dies somewhere
References Barrie, J. M. & Unwin, N. S. (1951). Peter Pan. London: Hodder & Stoughton. Deely, J. N. (2008). Descartes & Poinsot : the crossroad of signs and ideas. Scranton, Pa. ; London: University of Scranton Press. Deely, J. N. (2009). Augustine and Poinsot : the protosemiotic development. Scranton: University of Scranton Press. Elliot, L. & Allen, K. (2011, October 7). Britain in grip of ‘worst ever financial crisis’: Bank chief: ‘There’s not enough money’: £75bn of quantitative easing announced. The Guardian. eNotes (2011). Idiot (Athenian democracy). eNotes Retrieved from: http://www. enotes.com/topic/Idiot_(Athenian_democracy)
of academics, [with apologies to]: (Barrie & Unwin, 1951).
Harkness, P. & Schier, M. (2011). Performance related pay in Australian universities: The case of Swinburne University, Australian Universities’ Review, 53(2), 50-58.
Conclusion
Hauser, G. A. (1999). Vernacular voices : the rhetoric of public and public spheres. Columbia: University of South Carolina Press.
The current economic sickness is a symptom and a
MacIntyre, A. (1985). After virtue : a study in moral theory (2nd ed.). London: Duckworth.
– something fundamental to the deepest responsibilities
wakeup call which points to deafness and blindness towards public affairs in many modern institutions. In the institution of the university it is the academic’s responsibility to throw off a central aspect of this sickness: the misuse of the ideoscopic legacy. Proper status needs to be reattached to cenoscopic thought, to the realisation of the
Peirce, C. S. (1955). Philosophical writings of Peirce. New York: Dover Publications. Peirce, C. S., Weiss, P. & Hartshorne, C. (1974). Collected papers of Charles Sanders Peirce. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press. Young, S., Peetz, D. & Marais, M. (2011). The impact of journal ranking fetishism on Australian policy-related research: A case study. Australian Universities’ Review, 53(2), 77-87.
ability of ordinary people to understand and intervene into the way their world works. This implies a change of vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Recession-oscopy, Steve Mackey
43
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
The managerialist university: an economic interpretation Tony Aspromourgos University of Sydney
The rise of the managerialist university, in terms of a shift towards supposed corporate forms of governance in universities, associated also with greater competition between universities, has been the subject of considerable controversy. Dissent with respect to these developments has commonly appealed to the notion of the university as a special kind of corporate entity that at least partly transcends merely economic considerations. This paper demonstrates that a purely economic analysis of the university provides a sufficient basis for repudiating the managerialist model.
Introduction
ture in which it is clear that each level of management is responsible to those further up the structure, not those
The changing character of universities in recent decades,
‘below’, has entailed a repudiation of the traditional col-
both in Australia and internationally, has been the subject
legial model of the university.
of considerable discussion, debate and indeed, concern. While a variety of forces has no doubt been at work in
Managing the university product
these institutional and other developments, at least in the Anglophone world, the shift in the political atmos-
Rather than treating the university as some kind of spe-
phere since the end of the 1970s seems to have been
cial corporate entity, that in some manner at least partly
the key factor – notably, with respect to the role of the
transcends merely economic considerations, one may,
public sector. Just as there have been a variety of forces
provisionally, approach the issue by treating the university
at work, so also there are a number of distinct (if con-
as an enterprise, ‘just like any other’, producing a set of
nected) aspects of the evolution of universities that have
commodities. (This will be qualified below.) But of course
stimulated controversy. Here, the focus is on just two par-
commercial enterprises are not all of the same kind, even
ticular and related aspects. First, the rise of a managerialist
as purely commercial enterprises. However, the key point
approach to university governance and thereby, the emer-
here, rather than singling out the universities as in some
gence also of an academic managerial class that exercises
sense unique corporate entities, is to recognise universi-
power in the contemporary university, as a class distinct
ties as belonging to the subset of enterprises that produce
and largely separated from the bulk of working academ-
services, rather than physical commodities. And then fur-
ics. The second is the implementation of a sort of com-
ther, it is necessary to understand that universities belong
petition model of the university system. The adoption of
to that sub-subset of service providers in which it is quite
a managerialist approach, with a ‘line management’ struc-
impossible for a managerial group within the enterprise
44
The managerialist university: an economic interpretation, Tony Aspromourgos
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
to enforce upon the workers a set of activities and endeav-
damage to the reputation and standing of the university in
ours so as to ensure the services of the corporate entity
the wider community. But perhaps the standing of the uni-
are provided to a desired quality standard.
versities’ products will not be damaged in the eyes of the
Under such production conditions it is always possible for the workers to shirk with respect to the provision of
wider community, even as the objective quality of those products declines. We return to this possibility below.
some aspects or other of the activities and endeavours
Now, if academic workers are induced to minimise
that go into forming the final product. This is only rein-
their work efforts, in ways that cannot be observed or
forced when some aspects of the product or services
ascertained by managers, in response to stick-wielding
being produced involve voluntary contributions by the
vice-chancellors, deputy vice-chancellors, deans, associ-
individual workers, contributions that are not, and cannot,
ate deans, and so on down the food chain, then it is not
be written into explicit labour contracts. It is impossible
likely to be their research time or research output that is
for management to enforce all aspects of the workers’
primarily affected. The self-image and self-regard of aca-
activities, either because such supervision and enforce-
demics – certainly those at research-intensive universi-
ment are too costly, or because any such surveillance
ties – in general is inevitably more closely bound up with
would actually undermine service provision, thereby det-
their research achievements than with teaching or wider
rimentally changing the product. With regard to the latter,
service. Academics who are induced to shirk in response
imagine university management watching over the con-
to stick-wielding academic managers are likely, as much
duct of research, either in the office or the laboratory, or
as they can, to protect their research time and efforts at
overseeing every minute of every lecture, and so on.There
the expense of teaching and service. It is in particular in
are many, many things that academic workers do that they
teaching where a minimum or merely serviceable effort
could cease doing, without compromising their contracts
will suffice, without the corporate entity having any
with the university, but which if they ceased to be done
capacity to enforce that effort which produces something
by many, most, or all academic workers, would certainly
better, even immensely valuable, in the way of pedagogy.
compromise the overall product that universities deliver.
But would this not then force management to alter its
It is these peculiar conditions of academic produc-
methods, since the consequent decline in teaching quality
tion which make ‘Management 101’ inapplicable to the
might compromise a university’s standing with potential
university industry, or makes its application damaging
students and thereby threaten the student load, which is
(whether or not it is usefully applicable to any other kind
the funding base for both teaching and a considerable
of commodity production). Certainly, one cannot induce
amount of research time, at least for most universities?
academic workers, individually or collectively, to deliver
Perhaps it will not.
an overall product of quality research, teaching and wider community service merely by way of management wielding a stick of one form or another. The goodwill of the
Competition and the higher education industry
workforce is essential to enable quality product provision. University management or leadership must be able to take
To see why this reputational effect might not occur takes
the academic workers with them, by making the work-
us to a second dimension of the managerialist university:
ing academics willing participants in the endeavour; an
the rise of the academic-manager class within the univer-
antagonized and demoralised workforce will find a myriad
sities has been associated, presumably not by accident,
of ways, individually and collectively, to cut corners in the
also with the notion that universities should engage in
provision of research, teaching and/or service. Hence fol-
competition with each other, in some sense. (The most
lows a joke recounted to me by an Italian colleague some
obvious connection between the two developments is
years ago (but like all good jokes, half serious):‘We [Italian
that if universities can be conceived of as usefully com-
academics] have an implicit contract with the Italian State:
peting with each other, then an application to univer-
they pay us very little – and we do very little.’ This need
sities of supposed private sector governance methods
only be qualified by acknowledgement of the motivating
appears, to that extent, more plausible.) Underpinning
role in academic life of non-pecuniary ‘remunerations’ as
the endorsement of competition is a belief, articu-
well; but these too are part of the implicit contract.
lated only in the vaguest of ways, that competition will
The overall character and quality of what the univer-
improve service quality, as well as perhaps contributing
sity produces in the aggregate will be compromised by
to other desirable outcomes; notably, cost minimisation.
such shirking, with – one might suppose – consequent
In fact, this notion has only been specified in the vaguest
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
The managerialist university: an economic interpretation, Tony Aspromourgos
45
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
of ways because if any precision is attempted, the plausi-
remunerations. Or to put the same point differently, rela-
bility of the idea evaporates.
tive to non-academic remuneration possibilities open to
One may picture the competitive process, albeit in a
the brightest, even academic positions with abnormally
brief and somewhat loose way, along the following lines.
high remunerations cannot compete on purely pecuni-
Let us say the generic product under consideration is beer.
ary terms. When a ‘trophy professor’ is headhunted from
There are a number of suppliers providing the product,
one university to another, with an abnormal remunera-
which is differentiated and branded. They can compete
tion offer, the aggregate of research in the world is not
on both price and quality, with tradeoffs between the two
increased. Income and resources are probably transferred
dimensions. They are supplying into a market – let us call
from the trophy professor’s new colleagues to the trophy
it ‘Australia’ – in which there is a large body, indeed, a very
professor, likely with some degree of demoralisation of
large body, of experienced and hence informed consum-
those other staff; the headhunting university management
ers on the demand side of the market. One would expect
congratulates itself on its strategic genius, and of course,
under these conditions that, at the same price, a better
makes sure an article about the trophy professor appears
quality beer will succeed over a lesser quality beer; and at
in the alumni magazine; and that is all.
the same quality, a cheaper beer will prevail over a dearer
Returning to competition with respect to degree provi-
one.This is of course consistent with beers that exhibit dif-
sion, the first difference to note between competition with
ferent price/quality combinations surviving in the market,
respect to beers and with respect to university degrees is
side by side – when it is further allowed that beer quality is
that almost by definition, there cannot be a large body of
multidimensional, and that consumers have heterogeneous
informed consumers – in fact, there can hardly be any such
tastes. Then it is also possible that a beer A, which is infe-
potential consumers – on the demand side of the degree
rior to a beer B, in quality dimension x, while higher priced
market. The peculiarity of university degree consumption,
than beer B, may yet also survive in the market, if superior
vis-à-vis most other commodity demands, for both final
to beer B in some other quality dimension y, valued by at
consumption goods and capital goods, is that it is virtu-
least a sufficient segment of consumers.
ally always a unique act of consumption, strictly speaking,
Is this kind of typical competitive process transferable
never to be repeated. (We mention capital goods because
to competition with respect to the services universities
education is often conceived of as accumulation of ‘human
provide? In answering this, let us put aside the research
capital’.) That is to say, for any particular degree on offer
and community service dimensions of the product uni-
from competing producers on the supply side, any single
versities provide and focus just on education; in particular,
potential consumer will only ever wish to consume one of
degree provision. In doing so we nevertheless acknowl-
them in a lifetime, at most.To end up consuming, for exam-
edge that the three dimensions are not separable in real-
ple, two Bachelor of Science degrees, or whatever other
ity; they are ‘joint products’. For example, the teaching
degree, would be almost always a very great disaster for
and community service aspects of the product are cer-
the consumer.
tainly not independent of the research achievements and
To return for a moment to the beer example, if I am a
research activities of the academic staff. Nor are these
person who has never before consumed beer, and I wake
three dimensions independent of each other in the com-
up one morning and decide to become a beer drinker, I
petition that occurs between universities. For example,
could go out every night for, say, 40 days, and drink three
universities’ research standing can influence their stand-
to five beers of a particular and different brand each night.
ing as degree providers, though it seems, both positively
No doubt I would in this process drink some shockingly
and negatively!
bad beers. (Let us leave them nameless here.) But in a rela-
However, before putting aside research and community
tively short time (i.e., relative to my remaining expected
service, one parenthetical comment may be made with
lifespan of prospective beer drinking), and at relatively
respect to competition among universities for research-
low cost (relative to the benefits from my remaining life of
ers. It is highly unlikely that any of this competition, even
beer drinking), I would become an informed beer drinker.
if it increases remuneration for a few, will increase the
I would thereby become an addition to the large body of
aggregate of human intelligence and effort devoted to
informed beer drinkers that makes competition a signifi-
the sciences and humanities, rather than merely reallocat-
cant force in shaping the pricing and quality of the variety
ing intelligence and research effort between institutions
of beers supplied to the market.
and perhaps between disciplines. People do not choose
A further impediment to competition between uni-
an academic life based primarily upon relative pecuniary
versities being capable of beneficially shaping the
46
The managerialist university: an economic interpretation, Tony Aspromourgos
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
degree product is that the quality of the product is to
It may be added here that the multidimensionality of
a considerable extent opaque, or non-transparent, even
the product and heterogeneity of consumer tastes or pref-
after it has been consumed. This is not only because
erences, which were earlier noted in the case of beer, may
it is a one-off consumption item, but also because it
have some analogy in the market for particular degrees, or
is in the nature of knowledge- or information-rich
they may not. We leave this issue aside here. But it should
products and services that they entail an information
not be taken for granted that competition among univer-
asymmetry between supplier and consumer. The poten-
sities will encourage greater diversity in the character of
tial consumer, in making a choice, is reliant upon the
particular degrees, across different universities; it may
advice of the potential suppliers, causing thereby also
instead lead to greater homogeneity. And the information
an asymmetry of power. This asymmetry between the
asymmetry problem in the degree market means that con-
‘demander’ and the supplier is intrinsic to the situa-
sumer preferences are considerably more influenced by
tion. Most consumers of car repairs cannot know pre-
the suppliers than could possibly be the case in the beer
cisely what service has been provided, and whether it
market (in the latter case, for example, by way of advertis-
was required. When one attends a medical doctor with
ing). This aspect of the situation can foster homogeneity
an ailment, one asks this supplier of medical services:
in degree offerings as well.
what do I need to purchase? Similarly, to a considerable
In fact, it is doubtful whether advertising by universities
extent, the one-off consumers of degrees will never know if it was worth it. Whatever degree of satisfaction graduates may record concerning their degrees – one, five or ten years after graduation – they will not have any very clear and definite
conception
of
what their education could
has any significant influence
When a ‘trophy professor’ is headhunted from one university to another, with an abnormal remuneration offer, the aggregate of research in the world is not increased. Income and resources are probably transferred from the trophy professor’s new colleagues to the trophy professor, likely with some degree of demoralisation of those other staff...
have been, better than that
in shaping the preferences across universities of degree consumers, other than by way of letting potential consumers know, or reminding them, of the conventional rankings
of
universities
within the industry. Putting aside research students, consumer
preferences
across
universities are largely an
which they received.
expression of self-validating
In particular, a decline over time in the quality of the
circular causation. For example, in the Australian context,
education provided in degrees will not be evident, or at
the research-intensive Group of Eight (Go8) universities
least will not be transparently evident, to the students
rank high in degree-consumer preferences, not because of
and graduates who have consumed just one degree of
any objective superiority in their teaching performance,
any type, at one point in time. An engineering graduate,
but mainly, because they already, previously, ranked high.
or graduate in any other discipline, will never know, at
To a very substantial extent, the perception of their qual-
least with any definiteness, the difference between a
ity as degree providers is merely due to the quality of their
2012 engineering degree and a 1982 engineering degree,
previous students, which in turn was a result of those
even from the same institution. There is of course much
universities previously ranking high in degree-consumer
public debate about declining standards in university edu-
preferences.This perception then attracts another genera-
cation (and in many other areas of human life!); but the
tion of quality students, and so on. (It is difficult, but not
non-transparency of the product will always make these
impossible, for this virtuous circle to be broken.)
claims contestable and less than compellingly evident. This is the basis for our comment above, that a decline in
Conclusions
teaching quality, resulting from managerialism, need not be inhibited by competitive pressure, because it will not
We have been pursuing here a line of critical argument
necessarily damage the reputation of a degree supplier,
about the contemporary university within a fairly nar-
and in particular, the relative reputation of the supplier
rowly economic frame of reference. That of course is not
with respect to other suppliers. To that extent, competi-
an adequate conceptual framework for a properly com-
tion will not motivate university managers to change gov-
prehensive accounting for the purposes and character
ernance regimes and methods.
of universities. Our aim has been precisely to show how
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
The managerialist university: an economic interpretation, Tony Aspromourgos
47
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
thoroughly one can repudiate the managerialist model,
It is undoubtable that academic work must be subject
without need of appeal to special or unique characteris-
to audit by, and accountability to, those who fund the
tics of the university.
activity; most obviously, government, but also fee-paying
But before drawing some conclusions arising from our
students. Economic theory also provides justification
argument, it is worth pointing out one further limitation
for public funding or subsidisation of the ‘public good’
of the crude application of a vague notion of competi-
dimensions of the university product: as well as pure or
tion to degree provision. In standard economic theory, the
fundamental research, with particular regard to educa-
autonomy or independence of consumers’ preferences
tion this concerns fundamental knowledge and generic
(i.e., desires, wants or tastes) – independence from the
skills – that which purely profit-seeking entities could
consumption they undertake – is an essential assumption
not provide in desirable quantity to self-funded, unsub-
to enable the competitive model to produce its typical
sidised students. In the absence of public funding, these
conclusions. Preferences (together with the constraints of
educational attainments and the degrees in which they
prices and incomes) cause consumption; but consump-
are embodied would also be provided, less on a merito-
tion influencing preferences must be ruled out. Without
cratic basis and more with regard to private ability to
that restriction, there would be no independent and stable
pay. Furthermore, whatever the balance between public
criterion by which to determine whether individuals are
and private funding, to the extent that some parts of a
better or worse off as a result of competition; the individu-
comprehensive university that undertakes education
als themselves, as constituted by their preferences, would
across the whole range of the sciences and the humani-
become endogenous to the economic process, depriving
ties cannot be self-funding, cross-subsidisation, in some
the theory or model of the capacity to generate definite
measure, is intrinsic to the nature of the ‘universe-ity’
conclusions. Now, whether or not that assumption is rea-
– intrinsic to its universal mission. If competition with
sonable in relation to the consumption of material goods,
such institutions from niche providers is allowed (for
it is beyond question that the consumption of educa-
example, from free-standing business schools), then, as
tion changes people. Indeed, it is clearly a conscious and
the cross-subsidisation is undermined, so also is the very
central purpose of individuals in pursuing education, to
existence of the university proper.
change themselves into something different. And is this
But even allowing for legitimate audit and accountabil-
not at least part of the reason why graduates’ perceptions
ity, the managerialist university has a natural tendency to
of their education commonly differs some years after
overregulation and excessive bureaucratisation.
graduation, from their perceptions while undertaking their degrees?
First, the managerial class must create a semblance of work for itself. Developing and implementing ‘strategic
The most important conclusion to be drawn from our
plans’ are popular fillers in this respect. The crude quan-
argument is that the managerialist model, in combination
titative targets commonly incorporated in such plans are
with a vague conception of competition between univer-
also an easy benchmark by which the managers can justify
sities, is not going to produce or promote a quality uni-
themselves to those further up the hierarchy. The propa-
versity system. The managerialist model cannot serve as a
gation of ‘learning and teaching’ agendas and activities,
substitute for traditional approaches to quality assurance,
which have been the catalyst for a thriving bureaucracy-
which ultimately rest upon embodying in all individual
cum-industry within the university system, populated by
and collective academic activity, professional norms and
non-academic or quasi-academic staff, is also a popular
ethics of conduct, collegially regulated by the community
managerial pursuit. This learning-and-teaching industry is
of academics. With regard to the education dimension in
a striking instance (and perhaps not the only one) of an
particular, for genuine, quality university teaching to occur
‘emperor’s-new-clothes’ phenomenon in the contempo-
requires an ‘inner commitment’ grounded in professional
rary university. While some educational theory and practi-
ethics and professional self-respect. While the informa-
cal teaching advice may be useful for academic teachers
tion asymmetry between potential degree consumers and
– especially junior staff – virtually everyone in the system,
degree suppliers necessitates a certain limited external
including the academic managers, knows that the learn-
and internal regulation to enforce minimum acceptable
ing-and-teaching industry, as currently constituted, pro-
standards (for example, via accreditation systems), such
duces little of value for genuine university education
regulation – however much extended and over-extended
and teaching. But while virtually everyone acknowledges
– is never sufficient: internalised professional norms are
this privately, publicly, almost everyone pretends that it
also essential.
is important and worthwhile. However undesirable this
48
The managerialist university: an economic interpretation, Tony Aspromourgos
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
kind of phenomenon is in normal commercial enterprise,
contracts.And the attempt to do so certainly undermines
such collective dishonesty is obviously particularly corro-
the traditional academic norms and ethics that are nec-
sive in institutions that are supposed to be in the business
essary to its provision; for example, as indicated above,
of truth-telling, in some sense or other.
encouraging shirking with respect to those contribu-
Second, and here economic analysis again provides par-
tions to academic life that are not and/or cannot be indi-
ticular insight, there is almost never any attempt to esti-
vidually contracted for. Explicit or implicit performance
mate the net benefit from proposed regulatory and audit
indicators, particularly when applied down to the level
policies. This is primarily because the costs of regulation
of the individual academic, tend to crowd out whatever
are largely externalised by those who implement it (the
is not included in them; for example, reviewing, journal
implementation and compliance costs in particular), and
editing, refereeing – activities traditionally regarded as
rather, borne by those further down the food chain. Under
important service undertaken by good academic ‘corpo-
these conditions, with most of the costs ignored by the
rate citizens’, for the benefit of academic communities.
decision-makers, there is a natural inclination to extend
They also deter elements of good teaching for which
regulation until the perceived or supposed increment of
robust empirical evidence can never be provided, and
benefit falls to zero, even if any additional benefit (real or
service activities that are not career-enhancing.
illusory), net of the costs of acquiring that benefit, is nega-
Second, given the great limitations on the capacity of
tive (i.e., marginal supposed benefit is less than marginal
degree consumers to ascertain quality (both before and
cost).The managerialist regulatory and performance audit
after undertaking a degree), competition between degree
processes, with all the attendant acquisition, measure-
providers leads to a diminution of degree quality. This
ment and processing of data, themselves absorb resources
tendency will be reinforced to the extent that there is an
that could otherwise better be devoted to research, teach-
inclination on the part of the degree consumers, individu-
ing and service. Governments impose regulation on the
ally, to minimise their effort in acquiring a degree. Indeed,
universities; the university bosses push the costs down
to the extent that degree consumers’ primary motivation
to the faculties; the faculty deans push them down to the
in acquiring a degree is their perception of its usefulness
schools and departments – with the last port of call for
in advantaging them in the labour market, merely rela-
the costs, the working academic. To put the economic
tive to others, they may be rather indifferent to the intrin-
point of view bluntly, in most human activities, the opti-
sic usefulness of their education. This is possible so long
mal number of screw-ups is unlikely to be zero; rather,
as lack of intrinsic degree quality does not compromise
some positive number.
the relative advantage in the labour market, provided by
It was asserted earlier (five paragraphs above) that
possession of the degree. It is then tempting to wonder
managerialism and quasi-competition will not deliver a
whether the universities and many of their students are in
quality university system. In fact, they are impediments to
a kind of tacit conspiracy to advance a pretence concern-
that. The managerial class, probably more or less uncon-
ing the educational enterprise.
sciously, supposes that its recourse to contractual modes of governance of academic life will leave traditional norm-
Suffice it to conclude by noting that quality is easier to destroy than it is to rebuild.
governed academic conduct intact. It will not. Not only are managerialism and quasi-competition not substitutes
Tony Aspromourgos is a professor at the School of Econom-
for traditional quality assurance grounded in professional
ics, University of Sydney, Australia.
ethics, they serve to undermine it. Two examples suffice
Acknowledgement
to make the point. First, the contract mentality which is part and parcel of the Management 101 approach to governance seeks
The author is indebted to P. Docherty, T. Fisher, M. Paton,
to reduce the entire conduct of academic life to an
R. Swain, A. Thomas and two anonymous referees for
exchange process in which rewards and punishments,
comment, without thereby implicating them in the final
at the level of the individual academic, are traded for
product.
‘outcomes’. A key point of our argument above is that a quality university product, of research plus teaching plus service, cannot be reduced to key performance indicators, and therefore its provision cannot be ensured merely by recourse to more or less explicit individual vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
The managerialist university: an economic interpretation, Tony Aspromourgos
49
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Placing a value on academic work The development and implementation of a time-based academic workload model John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson University of Tasmania
This paper presents a detailed case study of the development and implementation of a quantifiable academic workload model in the education faculty of an Australian university. Flowing from the enterprise bargaining process, the Academic Staff Agreement required the implementation of a workload allocation model for academics that was quantifiable in terms of hours with a stipulated annual maximum. Upon its eventual implementation, evidence emerged of academic workloads well beyond the supposed upper limit to hours. The case study demonstrates the highly political nature of defining academic work. With the emphasis in a modern university on competition driven by reduced funding and limited resources, academics are increasingly held accountable through performance management for teaching and research outcomes. The case study revealed the inherent tensions that arose between academics and managers as the related issues were negotiated.
Introduction In recent years, changes to the university operating envi-
accountability. Meeting challenges to deliver outputs and outcomes while simultaneously preserving valued process and academic discourse is a complex balancing act (Houston et al., 2006, p. 20).
ronment have resulted in reduced funding for higher education and greater external and internal accountability
The academic role includes teaching, research, engage-
for academic work. The push for efficiencies and a focus
ment with students, local communities and professional
on mass education which has placed increasing empha-
bodies, and leadership within the university. The degree
sis on utilitarian forms of knowledge and research have
of complexity of the role makes its definition somewhat
occurred contemporaneously with issues about good
problematic. Individual differences, due to discipline,
teaching and research. Increasingly staff are expected to
career stage or emphasis placed on research, teaching or
conform to externally defined performance outcomes in
administrative duties, add an extra layer to nominally simi-
research, teaching and administration (Barnett & Middle-
lar roles. Houston et al. (2006, p.27) argued that the com-
hurst, 1993; Henkel, 2007; Houston, Meyer & Paewai, 2006;
plexity of universities and the diversity of academic work
Lyons & Ingersoll, 2010; Vardi, 2009). In this new context:
both within and across disciplines make any attempt to
Managers, leaders and individual academics are expected to be responsive to diverse student needs and expectations, a competitive research environment, community expectations for relevance, declining public funding, and increased administrative and fiscal
‘standardise workload expectations... is fraught by differ-
50
ent realities’. Traditionally, many academics approach their role as a vocation (Lyons & Ingersoll, 2010), characterised by a high degree of personal commitment, intrinsic motivation
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
to succeed, self-regulation, flexibility and autonomy (Bel-
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Managing academic workload
lamy, Morley & Watty, 2003), which is difficult to reconcile with the new managerial approach. The consequences
Despite the difficulty of defining academic work, many
include intensification, de-professionalisation, increased
universities have developed models to allocate and moni-
casualisation, along with a more demanding and diverse
tor academic work (Houston et al., 2006; Lazarsfeld Jensen
student cohort and greater use of technology in mass
& Morgan, 2009; Soliman, 1999; Vardi, 2009). A National
education (Barnett & Middlehurst, 1993; Bexley, James &
Tertiary Education Industry Union (NTEU, 2011) report
Arkoudis, 2011; Burgess, Lewis & Mobbs, 2003; Coates, et
reveals that in 32 of 34 Australian universities, industrial
al., 2009; Dearn, Fraser & Ryan, 2002; Kenny, 2008, 2009;
agreements include an academic workload clause with
Langford, 2010; Lyons & Ingersoll, 2010; McInnes, 2000;
an upper annual time limit on academic working hours.
Vardi, 2009; Winter & Saros, 2002) to the extent that ‘(t)
Many also contain provisions for transparent, equitable
ime for research appeared to be that remaining after
and quantifiable mechanisms to determine academic
teaching and administrative requirements had been met’
work, including the establishment of a committee with
(Houston et al., 2006, p.25).
union representation.
Although intensification of academic work is an inter-
Vardi (2009) described some advantages and disad-
national issue (Altbach, Reisberg & Rumbley, 2009), it was
vantages of three basic types of workload models: Con-
observed by Coates et al. (2009, p.27) that by comparison
tact hours model, based on actual time spent teaching;
‘Australian academics – both in junior and senior ranks –
Actual hours model, which attempts to allocate time for
report among the highest number of hours worked per
various activities and; Points based model, which assigns
week’, 43.8 and 50.4 hours respectively. Langford’s (2010)
relative points to a range of activities. Another approach
benchmarking survey of 17 Australian universities, 26000
not mentioned by Vardi (2009) is one based on Equiva-
respondents, comparing 31 work practices and outcomes
lent Full-time Student Load (EFTSL). She noted a trade-off
with a range of other industries, is also pertinent. Over
between complexity and simplicity in the models, adding
half, 17, of the practices were significantly worse than in
that ‘where academics are required to undertake a wide
other occupations. It was concluded that ‘the high levels
variety of duties, or where the work duties between aca-
of stress’ reported by academic and general staff ‘are worse
demic staff vary greatly within an area, greater detail in a
than observed in many other industries’ (p.41) and, more
model is often demanded.’ She therefore advocated using
disturbingly, the levels of stress ‘may be the combined
an approach with a blend of allocated times (presumably
result of both high work demands and poor work con-
for components such as teaching) and undifferentiated
trol’ (p.50). Despite academic workloads being the second
times for other duties (e.g. research) as a way of meeting
worst of ‘all other measured practices and outcomes’, and
these needs.
experiencing the highest levels of stress the ‘dissatisfac-
Research also links the success of academic workload
tion with many management practices … is outweighed
models to other factors such as the degree of collabora-
by the belief...that they are involved in important work
tion, transparency, credibility and regular review (Burgess
and contributing to the community’ (Langford, 2010,
et al., 2003; Houston et al., 2006; Vardi, 2009), but this
p.52). Furthermore, academic staff were ‘moderately sat-
provides no description of how the collaboration should
isfied with their jobs’ (Langford, 2010, p.50). This sense
occur, or to what extent academic staff had input into the
of mission and commitment to work is also reported by
development of the workload processes. A key goal of
Houston et al. (2006, p. 27) with the qualification ‘that
this research was to fill this gap.
workloads allocation (is) underpinned by principles of equity and transparency.’ unless workloads are managed well and… time is provided for scholarship and research as well as teaching and service - those things that are valued by academics… the lifestyle of an academic will be affected and the original motivators for career choice may dissipate’ (Houston, et al., 2006, p.28). The previous quote implies ‘staff well-being, motivation and work performance’ are central to the effectiveness of modern universities (Vardi, 2009, p. 500; Kenny, 2009). vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
The apparent failure of workload models to prevent work overload is linked to factors such as the lack of credible time allocations and issues not usually covered in workload models, such as the number of staff available, the budget, and change initiatives within an organisation (Houston et al., 2006; Vardi, 2009): Some departments were simply attempting to do too much, leaving the achievement of objectives largely dependent on the willingness of a dedicated workforce to add additional work without corresponding decreases in other duties. Concerns were also raised
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
51
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
about the match between resource distribution and work requirements (Houston et al., 2006, p. 25).
issues that arose during the development and implemen-
Burgess (1996, p.69) noted that in time-based models
1. What factors impinge on academic workload?
‘workload hours which do not accurately reflect actual hours are no better than utility values. In fact they may be worse since they foster a spurious sense of accuracy.’
tation of the model and address three key questions: 2. What are the characteristics of a realistic and fair academic workload model? 3. What are the future implications for academic work?
Lyons & Ingersoll (2010, p.144) identified more general limitations: ineffectiveness in placing ‘limits on the exer-
Methodology
cise of managerial prerogative in the development of workload policies generally, and the resolution of disputes
A case study approach, involving the study of a bounded
concerning the allocation of academic workloads in par-
system, (Creswell, 2008) was chosen because it provided
ticular’. Kenny (2008, p.6) attributed managerial reluc-
a rich description of the events which unfolded as the
tance for meaningful engagement to an awareness that
workload model was developed.
‘the process of truly quantifying what academics actually
This account clearly reflects the authors’ perspective
do would finally expose the extent of ‘good will’ associ-
as participants and insiders, faculty members and elected
ated with academic work’ and ‘would provide hard evi-
academic representatives in the events. In acknowledg-
dence … that many academics are working significantly
ing this potential for bias, the authors point out that they
over what might be considered a fair and reasonable
drew extensively on a wide range of evidence such as cor-
workload…’
respondence, minutes of meetings, records of emails and
Although noting the inverse link between increased
discussions with many academic colleagues and manage-
complexity of workload models and transparency, Vardi
ment representatives during the relevant period. Because
(2009, p.506) commented on the comprehensiveness of
the case study is localised, the findings are not necessar-
time-based models’ coverage of academic work and their
ily generalisable to other situations, but some factors may
direct link to ‘human resourcing and costing of units’.
have relevance.
To explore how academic work can be managed in the
The 2006 Enterprise Bargaining Agreement guidelines
context of broader organisational and sectoral concerns,
were very general, specifying the need for transparency,
this paper reports on a case study in which academic staff
equity and balance, whilst allowing faculty and school dis-
took a leading role in the development and implementa-
cretion in balancing the components of academic work,
tion of a time-based academic workload model in a faculty
teaching, research and administration/service.
of education over the period 2005-2010.
As there was no systematic analysis or evaluation of the
The aim was to reflectively explore the situation in
implementation of the workload clause at the University
detail as the academics and faculty managers, often with
during this period, the degree of staff input into the vari-
competing priorities and perspectives, dealt with the
ous models remains unknown.
A Case Study: Developing and implementing an academic workload model
hours in class. Workload was therefore spread unevenly between staff.
Workload balance, funding sources Context In accordance with the Academic Staff Agreement Prior to the case study period, the Faculty of Education
(2006-2008) (ASA) and ‘Guidelines for the Allocation of
operated a legacy system of workload allocation, largely
Academic Work’ (The Guidelines), negotiations began
based on effective full-time student load (i.e. teaching
in 2005 between management and academic staff in
duties only). Over the previous decade the load per staff
the Faculty to devise a time-based academic workload
member had slowly risen from about 15 EFTSL to 20-25
model. A model based on a workload balance of teach-
EFTSL. In terms of workload, EFTSL did not adequately
ing (40 per cent), research (40 per cent), and service/
distinguish between many related tasks related to teach-
administrative related duties (20 per cent) (40:40:20)
ing such as the time involved in preparation or actual
was proposed. To be compliant with the ASA, the model
52
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
had to be demonstrably fair, transparent and equitable
Academic staff were soon disappointed in their hopes
and ensure the annual workload for academics was no
for a more collegial approach to the workload issue.The
greater than 1800 hours.
Acting Dean, appointed in mid 2006, proposed an alter-
Problems soon arose when the then Dean disagreed
native model (deemed the ‘Trust model’) describing it
with the assumption of (40:40:20) and proposed an
as a more ‘flexible’ approach to the ‘complex’ May 19th
alternative, 50:30:20 model. Its implementation, without
model.8 Despite the overwhelming vote in its favour,
staff consultation, in 2006 increased staff teaching time
many academics remained unsure about the time-based
and reduced that for research. At the behest of staff,
May 19th model, and were willing to try the Trust Model,
the NTEU became involved and, in February, mooted
even though it was not supported by any documenta-
a ‘Workload Review Committee’(WRC) to develop an
tion nor quantified academic work time in any transpar-
ASA-compliant workload model. The brief of the WRC,
ent way. Some well-established academics feared that a
consisting primarily of academic staff, was to ‘consult
time-based model would prevent them from pursuing
widely with staff, … collect data and mak(e) workload
their research and feared the focus on time would de-
comparisons both within and external to the university’
professionalise their work. Other staff, generally those
and offer advice to academics on workload.’1
less established in their careers or with large under-
In response, the Deputy Vice-Chancellor and the Director of Finance, asserted that academic research should be self-funded so to justify a 35 per cent research allocation for staff:
graduate teaching loads, wanted the more transparent time-based model. NTEU sent an open letter to the VC expressing its concern that there was still no academic workload
‘would need to generate approx (sic) 35 per cent of their salary cost. A staff member earning $85000 (pa) would need to earn block grant funding of $30000 (pa)…The faculty currently earns less than 5 per cent of its income from research…I would suggest 15 per cent allocation to research at most. Within that overall allocation of 15 per cent, some staff might be allocated much higher allocations for research and others might dedicate most of their time to teaching.’3
model compliant with the Academic Staff Agreement, ASA(2006-2008),7 and soon after the Acting Dean released a one page description called ‘Workload Principles 2007’ proposing a balance of 80 per cent teaching and 20 per cent research.9
Tactics of delay
Following this directive, the Dean then altered her
The catalyst for further action was a letter from the NTEU
proposal to (70:15:15), with teaching clearly to be the
of intending formal dispute, 2 May 2007, on the grounds
overwhelming priority for academics. 2, 3, 4, 6 It emerged
of non-compliance with the ASA and citing underfunding
from the development of a workload model that there
of the Faculty as a cause.10 A response by the Director
was a clear divide between staff and management on the
of Human Resources rejecting both claims increased dis-
place of research and the earning capacity of the Faculty.
satisfaction11 and led to the initiation of a formal dispute
Despite some further resistance, the WRC was
by the NTEU. The Acting Dean proposed a series of fora
established4 and with staff consultation, developed a
for staff to discuss ‘further revisions to the current work-
revised model, the ‘May 19th model’ which proposed
load model which both reflect the needs of individual col-
a (50:30:20 ) workload balance and provided for
leagues and the Faculty and are consistent with the EBA’.12
more realistic times for teaching and related duties;
However, these fora were delayed until late August due to
but left research and administrative tasks less clearly
the Acting Dean taking leave, meaning staff workloads for
defined. At an extraordinary Faculty meeting, called by
2007 could not be revised. Two one-hour ‘workshops’ for
the WRC under University ordinances, the May 19th
staff were scheduled in September, with a decision on the
model was overwhelmingly accepted by staff, with
revised workload model to be made at a full faculty meet-
one abstention. Again the Dean objected on financial
ing on October 23.13, 14 The aim was to implement the
grounds and insisted on the (70:15:15) model. Con-
new model ‘…BEFORE the end of the year’.15
5
tinued opposition by the Dean resulted in academic
The workshops and discussions were conducted
staff protest, the Vice-Chancellor’s intervention, an
in good spirit16 resulting in a report17 proposing some
offer of another post for the Dean and the appoint-
‘Notional Reference Points’ (NRPs), or estimates of the
ment of an Acting Dean.6
times to be allocated for a range of academic tasks. The
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
53
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
report stressed the aspirational goal of having a 40:40:20
with the suggestion of the AIRC, the Dean agreed to the
model implemented by 2010.17 To help staff calculate
formation of an Academic Workload Review Committee
workloads, the NTEU developed a spreadsheet with the
(AWRC), to develop a time-based workload model compli-
NRPs built in, which enabled academic staff to easily
ant with the ASA.The AWRC comprised three representa-
estimate their total workload on a holistic basis.
tives of Faculty management (Head of School, Associate
In December 2007, the Acting Dean accepted the report and committed to its implementation.
18
The
Dean Teaching and Learning and a senior professor) and three staff representatives (the authors of this paper).
NTEU was prepared to work with the newly negoti-
Fundamental differences between the two parties
ated model, despite noting the limited range of NRPs
were soon apparent. The appointed chair (the Head of
for teaching duties. Unexpectedly, however, the Acting
School) insisted that the workload allocation process
Dean stepped down in January 2008 and was replaced
had to operate within the constraints of the Faculty
by another Acting Dean.
Despite initially avowing to
budget whereas staff representatives insisted that the
implement the new model, adding that ‘our intention is
model had to be able to quantify individual workloads to
not just to fix the immediate issues but to put in place
determine whether they were ASA-compliant. The staff
better processes which will provide greater certainty
representatives also argued that the model should allow
and transparency’20, the new Acting Dean unilaterally
for the aggregation of individual loads, so the Faculty
reduced a key NRP, the preparation time for a 12.5 per
would be better able to estimate the Faculty’s teaching
cent unit, from 75 to 36 hours.21, 22 In arguing for this
resource needs and thus help frame the budget.
19
change, the new Acting Dean also indicated the need for
The decision was made to build on the existing NRPs
further changes ‘to ensure a more equitable distribution
and to determine realistic time allocations for other tasks
of workload across staff…’21 The NTEU raised concerns
not covered in the earlier consultations. The workload
about the lack of transparency and suggested a joint con-
spreadsheet was used to calculate academic workloads,
sultative committee of management and NTEU nomi-
with individuals reporting estimates of 124 per cent, 168
nees to discuss the situation. 22, 23 This idea was dismissed
per cent, 165 per cent, 130 per cent, 104 per cent (an
on financial grounds, with the Acting Dean arguing the
average of 138 per cent), equivalent to an average of over
NRP was ‘not reasonable (or even sensible)’, without
50 hours per week, with a maximum of over 60 hours.29
presenting any evidence to support this claim. 24
Comments gave further insight into staff attitudes:
Another formal dispute was initiated by the NTEU which was heard by an internal University ‘Dispute Resolution Committee’ (DRC) on April 17, 2008. 25 NTEU presented specific examples of staff who were disadvantaged and argued that the level of trust of the workload process in the Faculty was very low. 26 The DRC did not reach a consensus about the dispute and recommended further consultation to resolve the problems.27 Following receipt of the report of the DRC27 the VC opined that ‘an average research workload component of 40 per cent in a voca-
‘I was worried that …(protesting about workload)… would make me visible, vulnerable and a target for retribution. The track record of our management to date has been marked by vindictive responses to the issue of workloads….at no point has my performance manager looked at my total workload with me and considered my research or admin needs…’29, 30 ‘I face the dilemma of sacrificing my research while I seek to maintain high standards of teaching. I’m tired and saddened by a climate of despair amongst diligent staff members.’ 29, 30
tionally oriented discipline area sounds very high to me
The staff representatives presented a draft document
and it is something that the …Senior executive will need
to the AWRC, including a rationale for the model, re-
to discuss with Professor … (the soon to be appointed
stating the commitment to a 40:40:20 balance by 2012,
permanent Dean) shortly after his arrival.’28 It was at this
defining key terminology and descriptions of academic
stage that the NTEU decided to pursue the case in the
activities. The teaching section expanded to cover tasks
Australian Industrial Relations Commission (AIRC).
not included in previous staff consultations and recognised gradations within teaching patterns. It followed a
Going to court
similar pattern for research and service/administration to ensure a holistic coverage of workload. The time allo-
By the time the case reached the AIRC for the formal hear-
cations were benchmarked against models collected
ing, a new permanent Dean had taken up his post. In line
from other universities and faculties. Management rep-
54
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
resentatives opposed some time allocations but did not
summary data for planning by identifying overloaded
support their views by research or evidence. In regular
staff or areas needing more resources. The data also re-
meetings, the AWRC progressively refined the draft and
confirmed that staff were working considerably over
periodically presented it to staff for consultation and
1800 hours, (even allowing for a 10 per cent tolerance
comment over the remainder of 2008.31 A negotiated
margin), estimates indicated that 50 per cent of the staff
revised workload model was eventually adopted for trial
were working over 150 per cent of the annual limit, and
at the start of the 2009 academic year.
60 per cent of staff were working over 130 per cent.32
31, 37
The revised model provided a rationale, a compre-
AWRC meetings continued throughout 2009-2010,
hensive set of transparent time-based allocations for
consulting with individual staff, groups such as course
key aspects of academic work, a common language to
coordinators and new academic appointments. Gradu-
discuss workload, and outlined a process to raise griev-
ally the workload model began to be embedded within
ances about workload.The spreadsheet was also further
normal Faculty processes. Once again, however, finan-
refined to enable individual academic staff and their per-
cial considerations threatened the model. The centrally-
formance managers to accurately estimate workloads on
determined Faculty budget had not increased to support
a holistic basis and negotiate adjustments as needed. .To
the adoption of the new model and the Dean’s requests
ensure transparency, the documentation was made avail-
for more funds were unsuccessful. Early in 2010, with
able to staff, along with the spreadsheet via the Faculty
a $1 million deficit looming, University management
website. For those less inclined to accept a time-based
insisted that the Dean balance the budget.
model, the notion of ‘allocated hours’ was introduced.
In a specially convened meeting of senior Faculty staff
This deemed that the time for which academic staff
that followed, the AWRC managerial representatives, led
could be held accountable was limited to 1800 hours
by the Head of School, argued that the workload model
p.a., thus enabling those who wished to work longer
was unaffordable and had exacerbated the financial prob-
hours to do so by choice.
lems. However, the staff representatives pointed to other factors, such as the Faculty decision to initiate a full rede-
Implementation of the workload model
velopment of all degree courses during 2009-2011, which also involved duplication of all courses for delivery in a
Implementing the model in practice, however, presented
fully online mode in 2010 were more relevant. Arguing
new problems. It was complex, and neither staff nor their
that these course changes had created significant extra
managers were used to looking at their work this way.The
teaching work and required substantial additional sup-
staff representatives designed and conducted a series of
port staff and infrastructure costs, the staff representa-
training sessions, including scenarios of typical cases, with
tives claimed that the workload model simply quantified
individual staff and performance managers to facilitate
the increased teaching burden, but had not created the
understanding of the model and use of the spreadsheet.
problem. When it was revealed at the meeting that the
As predicted, implementation of the model had con-
Faculty had unsuccessfully applied for $1 million in stra-
sequences for the Faculty budget, framed on the pre-
tegic funds to finance the course redevelopments, the real
sumption of 70 per cent teaching loads, resulting in an
source of the financial stress became evident.
increase in the expenditure on casual teaching. Some
So at the start of 2010, after 18 months of meetings
senior staff remained skeptical and uncommitted to the
and a year of operation, rather than abandon or modify
model, complaining of staff ‘double dipping’ or inflating
the course re-development project, the AWRC manage-
their workloads, and arguing that aspects of the model
ment representatives targeted the workload model.They
were ‘generous’. Staff representatives countered that
expressed a lack of confidence in the model and with-
these were training or performance management issues
drew from the AWRC. The Dean re-structured the AWRC
rather than faults with the model, adding that the pro-
into an ‘Academic Workload Advisory Panel’ (AWAP) to
cess was in trial so needed monitoring and evaluation.
conduct further benchmarking and advise on changes
Eventually, a table was compiled summarising the total
to the model.32
and balance of workload for 95 per cent of the academic
The benchmarking, however, re-confirmed the reason-
staff and made available at a school meeting.32 Here the
ableness of the teaching time allocations. Some minor
Dean noted the ‘artistry’ of the model and usefulness of
adjustments and improvements were made, based on
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
55
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
the experience in 2009, and a revised model was used in
guidelines which are published on the UTAS website
2010. No aggregate summary workload data was made
and set minimum ‘thresholds’ for research, and standard
available for 2010 because some senior staff expressed
time allocations for teaching duties and administrative
concerns about privacy. Without this information the
roles.36 These are to be implemented across the Univer-
staff representatives argued that transparency of the
sity in 2012.
process was compromised. In September 2010, a new industrial agreement was implemented, ASA (2010-2012)34 which contained an amended workload clause that stipulated a (40:40:20) model for most academics. This required some further refinement of the model for 2011 because it also stipulated a reduction in the total working hours to 1717 p.a. Aggregated workload summary data published at the
References – Documentary evidence 1. Email: NTEU to Dean, Feb 21, 2006. 2. Memorandum: Dean to NTEU, Feb 21, 2006. 3. Email: Dean to Faculty of Education staff, Feb 21, 2006, 7:08pm. 4. Email: NTEU to Dean, Feb 28, 2006. 5. Email from Dean to staff, Fri June 2, 2006. 6. Memorandum: VC to Education staff, July 10, 2006.
end of 2011 indicated the persistence of high overall
7. Letter: NTEU to VC, December 20, 2006.
allocated workloads for individuals, with an average of
8. Letter: Director of Human Resources (HR) to NTEU, Jan 3, 2007
128 per cent (one as high as 183 per cent).33 On aver-
9. Document: ‘Workload Principles 2007’ Feb 2007.
age, teaching loads had not reduced significantly but
10. Letter NTEU to Director of Human Resources, May 2, 2007.
there was evidence of staff increasingly negotiating
11. Letter from Director of HR, May 23, 2007.
teaching relief which was not presented in the data.
12. Letter: Acting Dean to the NTEU, June 7, 2007.
However, with the 40 per cent teaching component
13. Letter: NTEU to Acting Dean, September 3, 2007
largely accepted, there was evidence that teaching loads
14. Email: Acting Dean to staff, September 5, 2007.
reduced significantly in 2012. 33
15. Letter: Acting Dean to NTEU, September 19, 2007. 16. Email: Acting Dean to staff, November 13, 2007.
The Future- beyond the Faculty
17. ‘Report to Head of School of the results of Consultation of Academic Staff concerning Their Advice as to Workload Arrangements for 2008’, (no date)
While the model has undergone constant refinement, it
18. Acting Dean’s report, Faculty/School meeting, December 6, 2007.
still needs reasonable time allocations for administrative
19. Email: Acting Deans to staff, January 24, 2008.
tasks, and fair mechanisms to account for research. Gradually, however, the idea of the workload model is being accepted. Reduced teaching demands through marking relief has enabled many staff to improve their research performance: a recent Faculty report noted 120 per cent increase in research output in 2011 and contributions to research by 75 per cent of staff, in contrast to the situation in 2006-2008, where research was in decline. 35 The new industrial agreement, ASA (2010-2012)34, embedded the 40:40:20 workload balance across the
20. Email: new Acting Dean to staff, February 13, 2008. 21. Email: new Acting Dean to staff, February 18, 2008. 22. Email: person who led the workload discussion to one of the authors February 28, 2008. 23. Letter: NTEU to Director of HR, February 26, 2008. 24. Email: the new Acting Dean to Director of HR and NTEU, March 13, 2008. 25. Letter: NTEU to Director of HR, April 7, 2008 26. Minutes: the DRC, April 17, 2008. 27. Final report of the DRC, April 24, 2008. 28. Letter: VC to Director of HR and others, May 12, 2008.
University and also mandated the University to negoti-
29. Various emails and workload documents submitted to NTEU by individual staff members, May-June 2008.
ate with the NTEU to establish common workload guide-
30. Collated staff responses sent to AWRC administration officer.
lines for all academics, through the establishment of the
31. Academic Workload Model, draft for implementation in 2009.
Academic Workload Development Committee (AWDC), with equal membership of NTEU and University man-
32. Minutes: the Academic Workload Review Committee (AWRC) August-Sept 2008.
agement.This committee was to monitor compliance of
33. Summary of academic staff workloads, 2009, 2011, 2012.
all workload models at the University to ensure that fair, transparent and realistic workload expectations apply to all academics.34 Recently (April 2012) the AWDC and UTAS management agreed on a set of common academic workload
56
34. Academic Staff Agreement (2010-2012). 35. Email: from Associate Dean Research to staff, March, 2012. 36. Academic Workload Guidelines, published and endorsed by NTEU and UTAS senior management, April 19, 2012.
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
Discussion of the case study
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
the industrial agreement underpinning the results was the same for 2011 and 2012, statistical comparison was
The difficulties encountered in implementing an academic
done and a two tailed t-test reveals (p = 0.0094) indicat-
workload model in the Faculty, despite the existence of
ing a significant decline in teaching loads at the 99 per
a workload clause in the academic staff agreement, have
cent confidence level. Overall, this shows the model has
been used to illuminate a range of potential issues. Other
been effective in reducing teaching loads, and, the authors
faculties in the same university had managed to devise
argue, this is a key factor in the improved research perfor-
and successfully implement models in 2006, whereas the
mance reported in the case study.
Faculty took over five years. Thus, generalisations from this case study may be difficult because of specific factors
The final part of this article explores the three research questions.
and personalities involved. As Burgess (1996) and Burgess et al. (2003) warned, the case study demonstrates that an inadequate Faculty
What factors impinge on academic workload?
budget can cause conflict and affect the workload allocation process. In this case, differing priorities about
The case study illustrates explicitly the potential for politi-
resources to support research hindered the development
cal tensions inherent in considering academic workload
of the model. Whereas managers emphasised teaching
priorities in a climate of resource limitations (Burgess,
as the key source of funds for the Faculty, academic staff
1996; Burgess et al., 2003). In a higher education environ-
valued their research time. Thus the allocation of aca-
ment beset with insufficient funds and greater account-
demic work raised concomitant issues such as the nature
ability requirements, issues of power and control soon
of the academic role and equity for academics. In this
arose around the question of how to quantify the work of
context, the industrial agreement was crucial because it
academics. In this case, the main priority of management
required academic as well as managerial input to ensure
to meet a pre-determined budget clashed with the staff
credibility of the workload allocation process.
priority to develop a fair, transparent, quantifiable work-
Ultimately, the case study demonstrated some improve-
load model compliant with the ASA.
ment in workloads. As teaching was the only quantifiable
The research emphasising the importance of collabo-
component of academic work during this period, an anal-
ration in the development of a credible workload model
ysis of the teaching workloads was undertaken using the
(Burgess et al., 2003; Houston et al., 2006;Vardi, 2009) was
published summary data. Based on teaching loads of 19
illustrated in the case study, by the key role of the staff
staff who were continuously employed at the University
representatives. They insisted on realistic time estimates,
during this period (about 40 per cent of the on-going aca-
a fair and a transparent mechanism to quantify academic
demic workforce), Table 1 shows average teaching work-
work, and other key aspects of credibility. Under pres-
loads in 2009, 2011 and 2012.
sure to meet an inadequate budget, and with teaching the
The data collections in 2009 and 2010 were raw data
major source of Faculty income, managers tended to focus
derived from the workload spreadsheets. In 2011, there
on maximising the teaching component at the expense of
was anecdotal evidence of the workload model being
other aspects of the work.
used to negotiate lower workloads than indicated here. By
The industrial agreement, and the willingness to use
2012, the data collection was more reliable and showed
its legal status, provided the staff representatives with a
the actual teaching time (percentages).
degree of authority to back-up their insistence on an evi-
The data reveal that the average time (percentage) allo-
dence based process to determine realistic time alloca-
cated to academics for teaching remained constant for
tions. This avoided the situation noted by Vardi (2009, p.
the first two years, then changed significantly. Because
502) that in time-based workload models ‘allocation often underestimates the real time it takes to complete tasks.’
Table 1: Available summary teaching workload data. Year
2009*
2011**
2012**
Mean time estimated for teaching (hours)
1037 (58%)
1035 (60%)
850 (49.5%)
Note: two different industrial agreements applied as indicated: *ASA(2006-2009) and **ASA(2010-2012) vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Equal staff and management representation on the AWRC ensured that this point had to be taken account of and attempts to distort the process could be challenged. The meetings provided an opportunity to discuss the issues and present alternative arguments. Due to the demands of the role, the NTEU insisted that the staff representatives were provided with some time release to do the neces-
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
57
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
sary background work and attend the meetings of the
mance expectations on academics. Academic staff were
committee.
empowered to enter performance management with a
With confidence that the model was realistic, due to the
realistic estimate of their work and a tool to negotiate a
consultation and benchmarking, the staff representatives
fair and reasonable outcome within the limitations of the
argued that the model should do more than simply ensure
allocated hours. Staff, however, remained free to devote
that everyone was equally overloaded. Rather, the mod-
any extra hours they wanted to their passions, but this
el’s validity should allow staff to confidently determine
would be a personal choice rather than a requirement
if their workload exceeded the annual limit, as provided
driven by unrealistic expectations. This approach pre-
for in the industrial agreement, and seek some reduction
served elements of a vocation attitude approach (Coates
accordingly.
et al., 2009; Langford, 2010; Barnett & Middlehurst, 1993).
The spreadsheet empowered academic staff to esti-
The case study’s evidence indicates this approach has
mate easily their workloads on a holistic basis for the
contributed to a significant improvement in research
first time. It provided objective quantifiable evidence
output in the Faculty.
rather than the more anecdotal or self-reported data in much of the research, and coupled with the release of the aggregated academic workload data, it provided evi-
What are the characteristics of a realistic and fair academic workload model?
dence which forced management to take genuine steps to reduce workload.
Despite the need to quantify academic work, and the
The case study revealed inherent doubts for some aca-
fact that workload models from other faculties and insti-
demics which impinged on the model’s development and
tutions indicated that such a task was possible, the case
acceptance. Consistent with Soliman (1999, p.4) some
study documents a highly fraught process. This chiefly
felt using time to quantify academic work compromised
arose due to the different priorities of the management
‘the notion of professionalism.’ In particular for some
and academic staff.
more established in their careers, or some younger ambi-
Staff AWDR representatives, supported by the NTEU,
tious academics, it raised fears that a workload limit might
were intent on meeting the requirements of the ASA
prevent them from pursuing their research passions and
(2006-2009) by working with the AWRC to develop a
thus negatively affect their career or promotion pros-
credible time-based workload model. Through an evi-
pects. When the first estimates from the model appeared,
dence based process of consultation with academic staff
many academics and managers doubted the credibility
and benchmarking against existing models, the AWRC was
of the model. It also highlighted the inherent tensions
able to identify the range of activities in academic work,
between the traditional self-regulation that many aca-
develop clear definitions, consistent terminology and real-
demics wanted to retain over their work and the mana-
istic associated time allocations. The model was framed
gerial paradigm requiring control over the allocation of
to included a range of measures including both input
resources (Lyons & Ingersoll, 2010; Bellamy et al., 2003).
(e.g. preparation for teaching) and output activities (e.g.
The data revealed a degree of normalisation of work
research publications, or number of students taught) and
overload, probably flowing from the way in which many
process guidelines for the allocation of work and internal
academics approached their work as a vocation. The
resolution of any grievances.
authors argued, however, that in a managerial paradigm,
Extensive consultations with staff and the benchmark-
the quantification of this level of commitment is neces-
ing against other workload models added considerable
sary, as individuals, particularly younger academics, are
validity to the figures in the model. In discussions about
increasingly held externally accountable for performance
the draft documentation in the AWRC, any attempts to
and have less control over their work.The deterioration in
adjust time allocations were met with a call for evidence
working conditions for academics in the Faculty occurred
to support their view. This prevented the previous prac-
in the absence of a fair and transparent mechanism. The
tice where time allocations were determined according to
development of a credible model was the first step in put-
financial considerations, rather than reflecting the actual
ting limitations on ever increasing workload demands and
nature and complexity of the tasks which would under-
expectations.
mine the model’s credibility (Houston et al., 2007; Burgess
The dedication of 40 per cent of self-regulated work-
et al., 2003).
load time specifically to research, and the workload limit
Ultimately, time based allowances were developed for
on ‘allocated hours’, provided a means to limit perfor-
all identifiable activities with a ‘catch-all’ allowance to
58
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
acknowledge a range of unforeseen minor tasks. By 2010-
As the case study illustrates, the problems were largely
2011 the model had evolved into a hybrid of the models
budget driven, but while the resource needs are more
described and recommended by Vardi (2009). It contained
clearly quantifiable, the constraints on the Faculty remain,
detailed time-based elements for teaching, incorporat-
as these decisions are made centrally by University man-
ing allocations for tasks that were independent of stu-
agement. At the time of writing, in early 2012, political
dent numbers (e.g. preparing a lecture); some that were
and economic factors within the Faculty and University
dependent on student numbers (e.g. marking & consul-
again threaten the implementation of the model. This
tation); and undifferentiated time allocations for adminis-
emphasises the importance of an institutional approach
trative and research duties. Consistent with the research,
to these matters and does not imply ineffectiveness of
while this tended to increase the model’s complexity it
the model.
also contributed to its credibility (Vardi, 2009).
Central to driving through these changes in the face
Lazarsfeld Jensen and Morgan (2009) emphasised
of contradictory cost pressures to increase teaching
that a lack of understanding of the model could be a
loads and improve research performance, a clear picture
major source of dissatisfaction. In an attempt to allevi-
of what the academic role entails is essential. The vision
ate the unavoidable complexity of the model, training
underpinning this model is that research and scholarship
was organised to explain it and instruct staff and per-
are fundamental to the role of academics.This view is also
formance managers in the use of the spreadsheet. Indi-
embodied in the industrial agreement ASA (2010-2012)
vidual staff could quickly obtain an accurate and holistic
which has required the formation of an joint committee
estimate of their total workload, including breakdown
of management and NTEU representation, to review and
of the teaching, research and administration-service
develop common standard guidelines for academic work
components. This improved transparency of the process
to apply across the institution.
and enabled staff to approach their performance man-
The case study indicates that the AWDC can be an effec-
agement with a clearer picture of the demands on their
tive way to develop a meaningful approach to allocating
time, and led to more meaningful discussions about their
academic work. It also has a monitoring role to ensure
workload and career priorities.
adherence to the ASA. The intention is to build on the
Transparency and fairness was further enhanced by
experiences of the last five years and improve on the
the aggregation of individual workload data into a sum-
existing situation by providing a common language to
mary workload document showing the total workload
discuss workload, common transparent time-based allo-
and percentage of teaching, research and administrative
cations and other measures to equitably determine aca-
duties for every academic in the faculty. Consistent with
demic workload across the Institution. This outcome will
the research (Burgess et al., 2003; Vardi, 2009), the case
ensure a more transparent link between the budget pro-
study showed that this information could assist Faculty
cess and staffing needs in all schools, and a more reliable
managers to better determine the level of staff resources
and fair platform to gauge the performance of academics.
to meet the work demands and to identify gaps and staff
This will lead to further research, as called for by Lazarfeld
who may be overloaded.
Jensen and Morgan (2009, p. 69) for ‘comparative information about the methods of (workload) calculation other
What are the future implications for academic work?
universities are using at schools level, and how agree-
The case study illustrates the inherently political nature of
deterioration in academic working conditions as reported
developing a workload model because it raises tensions
in the research, requires an urgent response from profes-
between the managerial and collaborative paradigms. In
sional bodies, such as the NTEU, to capture workload data
this case, it manifested itself as the different priorities
across the nation. Taking control of the development of a
relating to meeting an existing budget model. The trans-
set of common, credible, academic workload guidelines
parency of the process involved a fundamental change in
and practices for the academic profession as a whole will
the way managers had to negotiate workloads with indi-
be a step towards adequate resourcing of universities.The
viduals. Gradually, as academics learned about the process
proposition here is that in many ways this managerial
and it became embedded in the normal operations of
debate has been lost. In this reality, the only option is for
the Faculty it changed the way many academics thought
the academic staff to be actively involved in the develop-
about their work.
ment of credible workload processes that are designed to
ments are invigilated.’ The authors also contend that tackling the widespread
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
59
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
retain the essence of their work, and serve the needs of the institution. In a modern university environment, to be effective in their work, academics need credible and transparent mechanisms to quantify and justify what they do and to place reasonable limits on the performance expectations imposed on them. A credible workload model, developed by genuine consultation, as outlined here, is an important step towards this outcome; one which will protect the health and well-being of academics by limiting excessive demands on them.
Summary Our goal in this research was to use the case of the development of a quantifiable time-based academic workload model in an education faculty in an Australian university to explore issues around academic workload. With increasing managerial control, accountability and reduced funding having a dramatic effect on the way universities operate, the quantification of academic work has become an important issue throughout the tertiary education sector. If academic performance is to be properly evaluated and universities are to be effective, then clear, credible and meaningful guidelines for defining and estimating reasonable workload expectations are needed. These guidelines must account for the nature and extent of academic work in a credible and transparent way such that the processes for allocating the work and measuring performance are demonstrably fair and retain the essence of academic work. The authors point out that the serious deterioration of academic work has occurred in the absence of clarity about how to quantify academic work within a managerial paradigm that mandates accountability and measureable outcomes. The case study indicates that the development of a quantifiable model is only the beginning. Implementing a time-based model requires a significant cultural change in how many academics, and their managers perceive and support academic work. The processes must link into broader organisational performance mechanisms and provide credible data for planning purposes and to ensure adequate resourcing through the budget. John Kenny, Andrew Fluck and Tim Jetson are academics in the Faculty of Education at the University of Tasmania.
References
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Barnet, R. & Middlehurst, R. (1993). The lost profession. Higher Education in Europe, 18(2), 110-128. Bellamy, S., Morley, C. & Watty, K. (2003). Why business academics remain in Australian universities despite deteriorating working conditions and reduced job satisfaction: An intellectual puzzle. Journal of Higher Education Policy and Management, 25 (1), 13-28. Bexley, E., James, R. & Arkoudis, S. (2011). The Australian academic profession in transition: Addressing the challenge of reconceptualising academic work and regenerating the academic workforce. Centre for the Study of Higher Education, The University of Melbourne. Burgess, T.F. (1996). Planning the academic’s workload: different approaches to allocating work to university academics. Higher Education 32, 63-75. Burgess, T.F., Lewis, H.A., & Mobbs, T. (2003). Academic workload planning revisited. Higher Education, 46 (2), 215-233. Coates, H., Dobson, I., Edwards, D., Friedman, T. Goedegebuure, L., & Meek, L. (2009). The Attractiveness of the Australian Academic Profession: A comparative analysis. A research briefing paper, Melbourne: ACER: University of Melbourne. Retrieved from: http://www.lhmartininstitute.edu.au/about-theinstitute/our-staff/2-assoc-prof-leo-goedegebuure ] Creswell, J.W. (2008). Educational Research: Planning, Conducting, and Evaluating Quantitative and Qualitative Research (3rd Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Education. Dearn, J, Fraser, K. & Ryan, Y (2002). Investigation into the Provision of Professional Development for University Teaching in Australia: A Discussion Paper. DEST programme. Henkel, M. (2007). Can academic autonomy survive in the knowledge society? A perspective from Britain, Higher Education Research and Development, 26 (1), 87-99. Houston, D., Meyer, L.H., & Paewai, S. (2007). Academic staff workloads and job satisfaction: Expectations and values in academe. Journal of Higher Education Policy and Management, 28 (1), 17-30. Kenny, J. (2008). Efficiency and effectiveness in higher Education: Who is accountable for what? Australian Universities’ Review, 50(1), 11-19. Kenny, J. (2009), Managing a modern university: is it time for a rethink? Higher Education Research & Development, 28 (6), 629-642. Langford, P.H., (2010. Benchmarking work practices and outcomes in Australian universities using an employee survey. Journal of Higher Education Policy and Management, 32(1), 41-53 Lazarsfeld Jensen, A. & Morgan, K. (2009). The vanishing idea of a scholarly life: Workload calculations and the loss of academic integrity in Western Sydney. Australian Universities’ Review, 51(2), 62-69. Lyons, M. & Ingersoll, L. (2010). Regulated autonomy or autonomous regulation? Collective bargaining and academic workloads in Australian universities. Journal of Higher Education Policy and Management, 32(2), 137-148. NTEU (2011). Analysis of Round 5 Outcomes. Melbourne: National Tertiary Education Industry Union. Soliman, I. (1999). The academic workload problematic. Paper presented at HERDSA Annual International Conference, Melbourne, Australia, 12-15 July. [Retrieved from: http://www.herdsa.org.au/wpcontent/uploads/conference/1999/ pdf/Soliman.PDF] Vardi, I. (2009). The impacts of different types of workload allocation models on academic satisfaction and working life. Higher Education, 57 (4), 499-508. Winter, R. & Saros, J. (2002). The academic work environment in Australian universities: A motivating place to work? Higher Education Research & Development, 21(3). 241-258.
Altbach, P.G., Reisberg, L., & Rumbley, L.E. (2009). Trends in global higher education: tracking an academic revolution. A report prepared for the UNESCO 2009 World Conference on Higher Education.
60
Placing a value on academic work, John Kenny, Andrew Fluck & Tim Jetson
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
OPINION
Transfer of teaching materials between universities Where is the boundary between legitimate transaction and violation of moral intellectual property rights? Matthias Maiwald KK Women’s and Children’s Hospital, Singapore, and National University of Singapore
Kathy Harrington National Tertiary Education Union, University of South Australia Branch, Adelaide, Australia
Intellectual property rights have various facets. The best-known one is copyright, enabling the owner to legally utilise intellectual materials. However, there is a separate set of legal entitlements, termed moral intellectual property rights. The purpose of these is to prevent false attribution, damage to an author’s reputation and some forms of plagiarism. In the current example, a teaching curriculum was licensed by one Australian university to several others. While this is consistent with copyright ownership, the moral rights aspect was overlooked. Teaching materials had the names of the original authors removed and were used at the receiving institution either without attribution, or with sole attribution to the other set of staff. This constitutes a breach of authors’ moral rights and would also fulfil common definitions of plagiarism.
Background and introduction
Around 2006/07, it became known to academic staff at Flinders Medical School that the curriculum would be
The Flinders University of South Australia’s School of
licensed to other medical schools; the names of Deakin Uni-
Medicine is a well-respected medical school within Aus-
versity in Victoria, Griffith University in Queensland, and St.
tralia. The curriculum is that of a four-year postgraduate
George’s Medical School in the UK were mentioned. This
entry medical course, whereby having a prior degree is
was generally commented upon and viewed as a sign of rec-
an entry requirement.The curriculum is also described as
ognition and success for the School. It also made sense; the
a hybrid course; a major emphasis is placed on problem-
other medical schools were start-up medical schools at uni-
based learning (PBL), but there are also more traditional
versities that previously had only offered other disciplines.
teaching elements, such as lectures, practical classes and
A transfer of the Flinders curriculum would allow these
electives. The typical intake of Flinders Medical School is
other schools to become functional much more quickly
120-130 students per year.
than if they had to develop their own curricula de novo.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Transfer of teaching materials between universities, Matthias Maiwald & Kathy Harrington
61
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
Situation observed
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Deakin academic staff. This pattern was characteristic of systematic usage.
In late 2008, a Flinders academic staff member happened to see some of the teaching materials at Deakin University,
Raising the issue
one of the universities that had obtained the Flinders curriculum. The picture was intriguing. The PBL cases in use
In September 2008, a Flinders academic staff member
at Deakin were almost identical – except for very minor
raised the issue in a letter to the Medical School, described
adaptations – to the PBL cases that were in use at Flinders
the findings and asked for appropriate attribution and
University. However, what was missing was the attribution
acknowledgement of authorship. It was stated that the
to the Flinders academic staff who had been involved in
hard work of Flinders academics should be appropriately
writing and updating the cases. It is worth noting that the
acknowledged and recognised. However, in a response in
writing of good PBL cases is quite a demanding task, since
July 2009, the School effectively declined this request.The
it requires a combination of good clinical knowledge and
letter stated that the teaching materials at Deakin were
teaching skills.
used appropriately and in accordance with the terms of
A slightly different picture was seen for the lecture mate-
the Licence Agreement (i.e. the one between Flinders and
rials. The degree of identity of the Deakin lectures with
Deakin concerning the transfer of teaching materials). In
the Flinders lectures varied, but generally one-half to twothirds of the Deakin lectures were identical with the corresponding Flinders lectures. The rest were different by way of modification, extension or shortening.There was
addition, the letter stated that
Most of the Deakin lecture slides were not direct digital copies; the text appeared to have been retyped. However, some Deakin lectures also contained images that looked like copied and pasted images from digital files of the Flinders lectures.
also variation between differ-
only PBL cases but no lectures had been transferred. It was further stated that according to a statement received from Deakin Medical School, the lectures had been independently developed by Deakin academic staff.
ent lectures and between dif-
However, what was evi-
ferent Deakin staff; some lectures had very little similarity
dent from reviewing the materials was that the Deakin
to the Flinders originals, and a few were more than 90 per
lectures were so strikingly similar to the Flinders ones
cent identical to the originals. However, what was strik-
(see description above) that independent development
ing was that none of the Deakin lectures showed any of
appeared to have been next to impossible.
the names of the Flinders academic staff who were the original authors. Instead, the names of Deakin academic
Involving the NTEU
staff not only appeared on the title slides of the lectures (as was the practice at Flinders), but were recorded on
In late 2009, the National Tertiary Education Industry
every one of the lecture slides. Examples of lectures and
Union (NTEU) became formally involved in the matter.
PBL cases from Flinders and the corresponding ones from
First, the NTEU provided an analysis and further infor-
Deakin University are on file.
mation. The legal situation is that there are different
Some of the features seen in the teaching materials are
requirements for copyright and authorship. While most
worth noting. The lectures commonly contained text pas-
Australian universities, including Flinders (Flinders Uni-
sages that were either (i) word-for-word copies of the Flin-
versity 1998; Reid 2004), assert the copyright to intellec-
ders texts, or (ii) passages that were essentially the same
tual materials developed by their academic staff, and with
text but with some changed wording. Most of the Deakin
it the right to utilise and market the materials, there are
lecture slides were not direct digital copies; the text
separate requirements for authorship. The latter is part of
appeared to have been retyped. However, some Deakin
Australian Commonwealth law, regulated in the Copyright
lectures also contained images that looked like copied
Act 1968 Part IX (Commonwealth of Australia 1968), and
and pasted images from digital files of the Flinders lec-
is termed Moral Intellectual Property Rights. Under the
tures. That means it appears conceivable that Deakin had
Act, a creator’s moral rights are defined as the rights: (i)
been in possession of digital file versions of the Flinders
to be attributed as the creator of their work; (ii) to take
lectures. Overall, there was a clear pattern with significant
action if their work is falsely attributed; and (iii) to take
amounts of similarity or identity, but sole attribution to
action if their work is distorted or treated in a way that
62
Transfer of teaching materials between universities, Matthias Maiwald & Kathy Harrington
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
is prejudicial to the creator’s honour or reputation. While
was still no path to authorship attribution on the actual
moral rights cannot be sold or transferred, an author can
lectures. The University also offered a formal apology, but
consent to have his/her moral rights waived (e.g. elect not
only to the single individual who had originally raised
to be named as author).
the issue. The situation at the other universities that had
Effectively, the Copyright Act intends to prohibit some
been recipients of Flinders materials was not addressed.
forms of plagiarism: falsely claiming to have authored,
Further, the University advised that it was now review-
invented or created something that someone else has,
ing its own processes and had engaged one of its deputy
by omitting appropriate attribution to the appropriate
vice-chancellors to ensure that the issues of copyright
source(s), or by providing false attribution. This is also
and attribution of authorship would be systematically
consistent with the widely known principles of academic
addressed when curriculum materials would be provided
integrity that when the work of others is used, appropri-
to third parties.
ate credit and attribution should be given.
At the time of writing, the matter is still under investigation and a full resolution is still pending.
Further developments Further analysis In February 2010, the then NTEU President, Dr Carolyn Allport, wrote to the Vice-Chancellor of Flinders Uni-
It was interesting to see that some of the lectures at Deakin
versity, describing what was happening as a violation
University contained material that looked like it had origi-
of intellectual property moral rights. She asked the
nated from digital file versions of the corresponding lec-
University to seek a remedy of the situation. As part of
tures at Flinders. A potential source is Flinders Learning
the remedy, the University should: (i) acknowledge that
Online (FLO), a digital repository of teaching materials
there is a problem, (ii) take steps to rectify the situation,
at Flinders University. Flinders academic staff regularly
(iii) apologise to any academic staff whose moral rights
deposited their lecture files in FLO, which was meant as
had been violated, and (iv) undertake a review to ensure
a resource for students. Could this have made it possible
that all teaching materials contained appropriate attribu-
to transfer digital lecture files to other universities? This is
tion of authorship.
unknown, but none of the Flinders University academics
Flinders University responded in June 2010. A path to
were informed that such a transfer would take place.
acknowledge the authors of the PBL cases was agreed
There is another interesting aspect to this case. Staff
to. However, other concerns that had been raised were
members of the receiving institution would be expected
still not resolved.This included a failure to provide a clear
to be familiar with basic academic principles. What trig-
path to appropriate attribution of authorship of lecture
gered anyone to think that it is acceptable to have the
materials to their original authors, a failure to address the
names of originators removed from the materials and to
situation at the recipient universities other than Deakin
replace them with other names as if they were the authors?
of Flinders materials (despite the fact that this had been
This is despite the common negative notions surrounding
raised and queried in earlier correspondence), and a fail-
plagiarism, and the fact that Deakin University apparently
ure to provide a formal apology to academic staff. The
has a strong anti-plagiarism policy in place towards its stu-
University’s response also contained a number of factual
dents that is also frequently highlighted to them by aca-
inconsistencies, such as a claim that only materials from
demic staff. While the actual reasons are again unknown, a
one teaching block were affected and a claim that the sim-
potential explanation comes from what has been defined
ilarity between the lectures only pertained to images and
as ‘institutionalised plagiarism’ (Martin, 1994). According to
other components that were in the public domain. In fact,
this definition, there may be a hierarchical or contextual
materials from other blocks were part of the observed
framework at some institutions that suggests that certain
pattern and extensive identical written text passages
ways of dealing with authorship and intellectual property
were present. Subsequent correspondence in which the
issues are convenient and acceptable.
University’s response was criticised ensued.
There is an interesting potential twist to the typical
In January 2011, the University responded again and
scenario whereby universities can lay claim to copyright
advised that steps had now been taken by Deakin Uni-
ownership of intellectual materials generated by academic
versity to provide, on their internal website for students,
staff employed and paid by the university. In most Austral-
a list of original Flinders lectures and their authors, and
ian medical schools, including Flinders, there is often a sig-
also, in the lectures, a reference to that list. However, there
nificant number of hospital-employed medical specialists
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Transfer of teaching materials between universities, Matthias Maiwald & Kathy Harrington
63
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
who have unpaid academic joint appointments and teach
principles of academic integrity and to respect the moral
at the schools. Whether universities own the copyright to
intellectual property rights of academics. These issues
these authors’ work appears unclear and is untested in
may ultimately need to be addressed by way of national or
Australian courts. In the Flinders example, materials gen-
international standards or codes of conduct.
erated by hospital-employed specialists were clearly also a significant part of what was transferred and in use at
Matthias Maiwald was an Associate Professor of Medical
Deakin University.
Microbiology at Flinders University School of Medicine,
There are a number of other examples of Australian
and is now a Consultant Microbiologist at KK Women’s and
universities that have transferred curriculum materials to
Children’s Hospital, Singapore, and an Adjunct Associate Pro-
other institutions. Some universities have involved their
fessor at the Department of Microbiology, National University
academic staff in legal arrangements concerning these
of Singapore.
transactions, and in some instances, monetary arrangements were made with the authors (source: unpublished
Kathy Harrington was the NTEU Flinders University Branch
observations coming from casual conversation with aca-
Division Industrial Officer, and is now at the University of
demics from other universities). However, the extent to
South Australia Branch of the NTEU.
which moral intellectual property rights of academics from other institutions are respected or not respected is
Acknowledgements
unknown. It appears that there are no publicly available data in Australia concerning these kinds of details pertain-
The authors thank Paul Kniest, NTEU, for insightful discus-
ing to these transfers.
sions and helpful comments on the manuscript, and Brian Martin, University of Wollongong, for other useful informa-
Conclusions
tion surrounding questions of academic integrity.
This report provides an example of a transfer of teach-
References
ing materials between universities where the way in which the materials were handled constitutes a breach of authors’ moral intellectual property rights. The case was raised with Flinders University by the NTEU. A number of conclusions and interesting viewpoints emerge from this case. First, it needs to be pointed out that academic staff have a legal entitlement to be named as authors or creators of their work, even if the copyright (and with it the right to engage in commercial licence
Commonwealth of Australia. (1968). Copyright Act 1968. Retrieved from http:// www.austlii.edu.au/au/legis/cth/consol_act/ca1968133 Flinders University. (1998). Intellectual Property Policy (amended January 2011). Retrieved from http://www.flinders.edu.au/ppmanual/policySecretariat/ ip.htm Martin, B. (1994). Plagiarism: a misplaced emphasis. Journal of Information Ethics 3 (2), 36-47. Retrieved from http://www.uow.edu.au/~bmartin/ pubs/94jie.html Reid, T. (2004). Academics and intellectual property: treading the tightrope. Deakin Law Review 9 (2), 759-774.
agreements) lies with their employer. Second, the way in which the teaching materials in this case were handled is clearly against the established principles and common notions surrounding academic integrity, even aside from a legal framework. Third, it even meets the common definitions of plagiarism. This case also has broader implications for Australian academia than just being an incident between Flinders University and Deakin University. Potentially, there are also implications for academics in other parts of the world. Transfer of intellectual property between institutions is increasingly becoming an important part of academic interaction. Entire curricula are being transferred between institutions via licensing arrangements, and there are usually benefits on both sides. However, as the level of commercialisation of intellectual property increases, it is also becoming clear that there is a need to maintain the
64
Transfer of teaching materials between universities, Matthias Maiwald & Kathy Harrington
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Grand crews Tasting notes on the Group of Eight universities Arthur O’Neill Retired gentleperson
The intentions of makers and the experiences of drinkers are brought into a concert by quaffing wine. Likewise, the bouquets of universities are fruitful sources of appreciation for teachers and consumers. Here, in a selection of offerings, reds and whites are presented for tasting by each of the self-styled ‘great growths’ of Australian higher education. Supplemented by the author’s comments, the body of the paper consists of extracts from appraisals of these wines (sources of quotations are given at the end). The author suggests that tasting panels, call them focus groups if you will, be established by the Quality and Standards Agency; and that a bibulous candidate, such as himself, has strong claims for membership.
Introduction Of course, to talk of ‘teachers’ is old hat. The brave new
So little is measurable, and nothing is reproducible, about the senses of smell and taste. Language serves them only lamely, leaning on simile and metaphor for almost everything illuminating that can be said.
higher education enterprise is conducted by coaches and mentors; and to fit them for work, new chums must
The wonder is, as he notes, that there is so much
undergo coaching and mentoring by those who used to
common ground between several people tasting the same
be employed in Education Resources and like-named
wine. There is a more-or-less shared language of appre-
support units. Since there are new tricks of trade, modes
ciation because varieties of grape can be related to their
of discourse will alter. Rather than learning to be coach
aromas and to bouquets of the wines made from them.
and/or mentor, the tyro academic must, as the celebrated
In providing a catalogue, Max Lake says that ‘These [the
Australian comedian, Mo MacCackie (Roy Rene 1892-
words he uses to refer to typical grape aromas and wine
1954), used to say,‘suck it and see’. In-service taste train-
bouquets] are memory hooks only.You may well perceive
ing is required.
them differently. Not all occur at the one time’ (1989, p.
The same applies at the consumer end: student course
123).A lexicon of sorts is made by associating wine smells
experience questionnaires, with their reliance on Likert
and tastes with what are held to be typical smells and
scales, will need to be replaced with tasting scorecards
tastes of animals, minerals, fruits, vegetables and some
like the one produced by Michael Broadbent and Hugh
manufactured products; and so, I argue, the senses can be
Johnson in 1975 (Johnson, 1991, p. 555). Some extensions
employed in higher education.
are needed in order to allow report of scarcely realised
To assist the preparation of guides to the appraisal of
olfactory repellents and attractants – not only ‘did the
quality, I put together tasting notes on some Australian
course stink or smell like roses?’ but also ‘what subtle
universities, members of the self-styled Group of Eight
odours does the place give off?’
(Go8), that distinguish themselves from the rest by their
It can be argued that objectivity is not well-served by the senses. Hugh Johnson (1991, p. 552) says:
superior characteristics, like: ‘Go8 universities have nurtured every Nobel Prize winner educated at an Australian University’; and ‘Go8 universities count among their
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Grand crews, Arthur O’Neill
65
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
alumni 83 per cent of all current Australian Government Ministers including the Prime Minister, Deputy Prime Minister and Minister for Innovation, Industry, Science and Research’ (Group of Eight Australia, 2011, p. 3). We must smack our lips and get stuck into these bottlers.
Tasting Notes
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
However, one wrote: I was curious about this brew with shiraz but nothing like a shiraz here. Only the faintest tartness. Almost watery pale ale like, and then the high carbonation with giant bubbles making it more like pale ale with coca cola. A few codgers from colleges still feel like that about amalgamating with universities.
Adelaide Since the University’s administrative actions in recent
Australian National
years are said by disaffected staff to have been marked
A hard one, but where better to start than with a Merlot?
by rigidity and heavy-handedness, it is fitting that we are
– ‘Yet another well-made wine in the Ministry Series
offered a red made in South Australia by the outrider of
releases; has unequivocal varietal character from the cassis
an Austrian winery. Its Syrah and Virgonier blend offers
fruit and spicy tannins.’ A Reserve Shiraz from this winery,
‘syrupy black fruit aromas with an overlay of exotic
described as being ‘all about controlled power’, might be
spice, earthiness and maybe a hint of Vegemite …’. I am
closer to the University’s mark; but we must work with
reminded by the ‘hint’ of a reviewer finding a Barossa
the Merlot we are given.
Shiraz to have ‘… a concentrated essence-like assembly
Like the ANU, this variety does not take easily to dif-
of rich, ripe dark black fruits, leather, tar, black cherry
ficult conditions.As Hugh Johnson says, Merlot ‘is a preco-
and hoisin sauce …’; and of Max Schubert repeating
cious grape that buds, flowers and ripens early, making
an unnamed taster’s comment about his early vintages
it more vulnerable in spring … Unfortunately, at harvest
of Grange Hermitage: ‘A concoction of wild fruits and
time its tight bunches need only a little rain to start them
sundry berries with crushed ants predominating’.Withal,
rotting’ (Johnson, 1991, p. 50). There are folks at the Uni-
many have remarked on unlikely tastes left with them
versity who reckon Canberra is an unseasonable place.
after encounters with the University. But back to the
They cop the frosts of government expenditure reviews
Syrah and Virgonier blend: ‘A long finish and finely bal-
and endure showers of indignation from colleagues in the
anced tannic grip complete the picture’. Is this akin to
States over supposedly preferential treatment given to the
the Masonic grip practised at the Temple on the other
ANU by federal authorities.
side of North Terrace from the University?
Methinks they do complain too much. But if life is not
A second red was considered. I give an extract from the
all Merlot and Skittles beside Lake Burley Griffin then we
opinion of those promoting it: ‘This delicious Shiraz has
must seek out a means of relief. How about a glass or two
hints of chocolate, menthol and tobacco leaf on the nose’.
of a local chardonnay that captures (or maybe causes) the
I recollect those dear old days when someone was always
feistiness that is so often encountered at University House,
chewing cough lollies in the Staff Room, and you could
at a nearby dining place in the University’s grounds, and
smoke a pipe in there. Smells of wet wool and leather
on the surrounding highways: ‘Bold barrel ferment wine
are also common in tasting notes, perhaps because Harris
with ripe peachy fruit, and just enough acidity to keep the
Tweed jackets with leather elbows used to be de rigeur
show on the road’.
for academic chaps taking their beverages. The University’s reputation was much improved by the
Melbourne
incorporation of oenology courses after the Roseworthy
A promotion sheet for the Shiraz says that it has the ‘Typi-
College of Advanced Education joined it in 1991. A white
cal One Eye nose of black fruits, tar and violets. A hint
from Roseworthy does not offer itself and instead, an
of gum leaf and spice lifts and complexes the bouquet’.
interesting substance casts symbolic light on the merger
Some assert that the University’s foray into postgraduate
process. A label says, coyly, that the product ‘…
brings
professional education is one-eyed and on the nose; and,
together the best in craft brewing and contemporary
somehow, the combined smells of black fruits, tar and
Barossa winemaking’; and that contents include the pro-
violets does accurately convey mixed opinions about this
ducing winery’s ‘… very own Barossa Valley Shiraz’. While
institution. That it is well endowed is made plain: ‘Mid
sticking Shiraz grape concentrate in beer sounds like
pallet [sic] richness is a hallmark of One Eye’.
mixing theory and craft, academic toffs and vocational
One taster described the Sparkling White as exhibit-
proles, beer tasters have been positive about the blend.
ing ‘a kaleidoscope of mega-rich citrus flavours, minerals,
66
Grand crews, Arthur O’Neill
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
wet slate and divine nuttiness’. Who can resist divine nut-
New South Wales
tiness, especially when political scientists and psycholo-
As they say at Kensington, you can take ‘Technology’ out of
gists have their feet in the crushing, and when mouthfuls
the title but you can’t take the University out of technology.
of unadulterated lemon flavour emanate from Law and
It may have absorbed a Paddington arts mob but an indus-
Social Work?
trial strength university deserves an industrial strength
I’ve had to eat crow in my time but felt obliged to savour
winemaking company. One brand fits the University’s bill:
that roofing staple of august institutions – wet slate. I did
‘…whilst proud of heritage, [the company] lies still at the
so by climbing atop Old Arts at night in order not to draw
cutting edge of modern winemaking technology’.
attention and found it wet and cold, which fits the presen-
Besides, this winery has undergone more takeovers,
tation of a sparkling white. But wait! I made a mistake! A
mergers and makeovers than ever Dawkins dreamed of.
wine expert lists the aroma of slate in the course of advis-
Its latest incarnation is as one of numerous brands owned
ing that names be matched to smells (Schuster, 2000, pp
by a newly-minted Australian company with a majority of
12-14). Smelly Old Arts …
private equity backing. Its Chief Executive Officer says:
Monash
‘Our mission is about being global, our global brand and our global footprint’. The mission is quite in line with a
Here, the long lunch was perfected as a device for real-
reason given for the existence of the Group of Eight:‘[To]
ising amalgamations. Mind you, the Greater Monash pro-
strengthen Australia’s capacity to engage in and benefit
vides timely reminder of the error promulgated by some
from global developments and opportunities to respond
in its Business School (in business schools more generally
to global and local challenges’ (Group of Eight, 2011, p. 2).
and amongst purported management experts): that silos are an organisational no-no. I say: long live departmental fermentation vats! A Shiraz Mourvèdre whose ‘intensity and length are prodigious’ suggests the thrusting style of the University’s negotiators during merger discussions. But the wine was
The massification of Australian higher education runs parallel to output: The winery now has an impressive 45,000 tonne crushing capacity and ‘state of the art’ technology, which allows 12 million litres of grape juice to be cold fermented fortnightly during vintage.
ruled out of contention because it did not come from Vic-
The product is four litre bladders of wine in cardboard
toria and, surprisingly, Monash has not sought out univer-
boxes. Since tasters do not write about wines produced
sity brands from near-by Australian States for takeovers.
in large volumes and at low cost, the task fell to me, at high
Something grand is required, to match the University’s
cost to my liver. Of the thirteen sorts at last count, I chose
ambitions; and something sweet, to convey the veneer
the Shiraz Cabernet, described on the box as ‘An appeal-
of its bonhomie. As perfumers relay their international
ing medium bodied dry red wine exhibiting vanillin oak
credentials with location statements in advertisements
characters and ripe berry fruit flavour’; and what is called
(‘London – Paris – Tokyo’) so also does Monash tell read-
a Fresh Dry White, described as ‘An aromatic, fresh, fruity
ers of its global reach: ‘Australia –Malaysia – South Africa
dry white wine’.
– Italy – India’. A Victorian-made varietal, Sagrantino, reso-
A taster only can go so far at one sitting when faced
nates with the University’s foothold in Italy – a holiday
with eight litres of wine (or eight universities, for that
retreat in Prato; and fits in with labyrinthine workings of
matter). My rather indecipherable notes say that the red
its managers at headquarters in Clayton: ‘There’s a mix of
and white were fruity and on the bland side; eminently
berries and a foxy, almost feral, gamy complexity here; and
drinkable, mind you, but unmemorable. Both improved
there’s herbs in the mix too’. In the good old days, there
by being made sparkling with the infusion of soda water.
used to be an abundance of herbs in the Student Union
Tasting them accords with my limited experience of the
building too.
University: a bit overripe but reliable.
Blended whites from a South African producer capture the university’s global pretensions: ‘Reputation is slightly
Queensland
ahead of quality at this stage’.To think local for a moment,
I have but vague memories from youth of a Port from
a Noble Riesling from Gippsland ticked all the boxes. It
Bassett’s Romavilla winery: of a next-morning aftertaste
delivered ‘sweet, fragrant floral aromas, lime marmalade,
of dry fur on the tongue and of pervasive, sickly aromas.
quince and spiced apple’. The palate is ‘underpinned by
The sensations reminded me of post-examination experi-
brisk, crunchy acid that ensures the sweetness doesn’t go
ences when attending this University as an undergradu-
unchecked’.
ate. In those days we may not have been very selective
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Grand crews, Arthur O’Neill
67
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
but we drank exceeding deep from the demijohn of for-
no aroma other than a minerally tingle and perhaps the
tified knowledge.
faintest wisp of grass or herb … ‘; after five years, ‘the
The University is represented by wineries that dem-
wine will start to open up, the colour moving to pale
onstrate its preference for family-owned and family-run
green-gold, the bouquet releasing lemon-citrus, herb
businesses, and this may affect judgment. There is a no-
and a hint of toast …’; and after another five years, ‘the
doubt biased but long-standing opinion that winemaking,
colour will intensify, glowing green-gold as if lit from
like intellectual work, does not prosper in the tropics. As
within by a tiny unseen light bulb’ (surely the Eureka!
our taster said about a Stanthorpe white: ‘Vibrant colour;
moment at the end of doctoral studies); the bouquet
lifted and smoky tropical fruit bouquet; quite juicy on the
will have ‘a mix of honey, grilled nuts and lightly
palate; a little simple’.
browned toast’; and the palate ‘will be a magical com-
The 2005 Cabernet Merlot drew similar reserve, with the same taster reporting:
bination of honey, fig and buttered toast on the one hand, and lively acidity on the other’. There you have
An altogether strange feeling when you pick up the plastic bottle – is it empty? No, it’s full. Also it has the positive statement ‘best before 30 June 2010’. The wine itself is not as remarkable as the package.
it: doing an Arts course at this University is all about
One is left with the impression that the University
In comparison with the rest, this University is the ‘Quiet
is resting in the shade of its membership of the Grand
Man’ of the Group of Eight; and the first selection goes
Crews. The best that can be gleaned from tasting authori-
some way to explain why: ‘A light- to medium-bodied
ties is that, as an external assessor might say, ‘promising
spicy/savoury red, with good balance but not a lot of
advances have been made from a poor start but more
thrust or character’. How could this be? There are pretty
work needs to be done to meet entry standards’.
interesting characters at the University (not least, the Vice-
Sydney Lusty Hermitage and Semillon wines from the Hunter Valley represent a university with historic links to the Push. The amorous red – called Kiss Shiraz – is rated amongst ‘The Best of the Best’ wines made from this grape variety. A reviewer says that it is impressive for the depth, ripeness and weight that it carries – even the first impression bowls you over. Aromas of ultra-ripe dark plums and spice here: cola, toasty oak and dark cherries, super-concentrated…. Will cellar like a trooper . From a panel report on the frisky white: ‘Lemon and ruby grapefruit zest are striking upfront and very inviting;
nosing armpits and scoffing toast.
Western Australia
Chancellor). However lively the inner person the trick for lower academic growths, like tutors, is to keep their heads down. Sticking them up is to risk pruning. The white does indicate that staff can hide their talents under a barrel: … an engaging combination of grapefruit, sandalwood, bacon bones and ginger are all evident on the bouquet; the palate is lacy and fine, and while oak is present the fruit handles it with ease; surprisingly powerful and precise … When such a combination of odours invades their noggins, we can understand why a few staff have been heard to refer to their university as the piggery, and why others have supplicated for the taste of fried eggs.
leading to buttered toast with lots of complexity and well woven richness throughout’. Here, it is timely to remem-
Conclusion
ber what Max Lake had to say about the powerful sexual influence of bodily odours. He goes on: There are other pheromones in wines. Some great rieslings and semillons occasionally have a ‘sweaty’ tone among the fragrances. Not a five-day unwashed labourer, rather the freshly bathed underarm of an excited and nubile female, or male, if you wish. Not everybody denies this attraction (Lake, 1989, p. 30).
As Dan Murphy insists, ‘It is the vineyard that matters … Top quality wine is obtained only from top quality vineyards’; and ‘… tasting is the only criterion which should be used’ to decide on the overall quality of wines from particular areas (Murphy, 1974, pp. 20 & 21). However, ‘not every wine from a great wine area is a great wine’, the reason very often being ‘that the maker does not know
The formation of students as they move through this
how to use the first class material that is available to him’
august academy is in line with the maturation of Semi-
– which suggests that ‘wines should be classified accord-
llon from the Hunter Valley. To quote James Halliday
ing to their makers as well as according to their districts’.
(2004, pp 63-64): ‘When bottled there will be little or
But ‘a classification according to winemakers and labels
68
Grand crews, Arthur O’Neill
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
will be entirely variable’ as makers come and go, and the
Here is as plain a ‘buy me’ hook as the gold disc stuck
management of wineries changes for good or ill. Besides,
on a wine bottle, announcing First Prize in Class 11 at the
they produce many blends from disparate areas and from
Bindiwallop Agricultural Show.
vineyards in their own areas (pp. 53-54).
When it comes to choosing what and where to study,
Here are guides to classification in a grape skin. First,
I’d forget the Group’s marketing hoopla, the institutional
the system has to be relatively stable in its application.
hype of slate and hoisin sauce, and head for the place
Second, criteria for placement will depend on location
running a course that has, as Len Evans wrote (1973, p.
while giving due heed, if not recompense, to smelly under-
292) about a Morris Imperial Dry Red from Rutherglen:
armed labourers in the vineyard.Third, though blends can
‘a very good straightforward flavour, with plenty of it, and
turn out trumps, they are best ignored for the purposes of
finishes agreeably crisp and firm’.
maintaining the classification. So it is with the Group of Eight. Age is on their side.
Acknowledgements
They have what real estate agents call ‘position’ in their favour. Occasionally they pay heed to hired hands, at least,
This article owes much to the assistance of and com-
to the ones who they can boast about. By and large, they
ments by: Bob Speechley, long-suffering member of the
have avoided mixing the product with the fruits of more
wine tasting panel at University House, The University of
recent higher education plantings; or if they have, like
Melbourne; and Jon Burfurd, with Antoinette, proprietors
Monash, then a glossy blue label will serve to cover a mul-
of the Lincoln Hotel, Carlton, Melbourne. Opinions about
titude of Terroirs.
the universities are all my own.
But there must be a spring to a classification, to the manner it which facts and objects are assembled. Darwin
Arthur O’Neill is a retired gentleperson, and regular imbiber
says he learnt a good lesson from an early error: ‘never to
of a fine drop or three.
trust in science to the principle of exclusion’ (Darwin, 1995 [1876], p. 31). That is just the principle followed by the Group of Eight: members establish themselves as a group by making other universities into a class apart. For example, a graph is presented to support the characteristic that ‘International students [at Go8 universities] succeed at a similarly high level as Australian students’. Universities
References Darwin, C. (1995 [1876]) ‘Autobiography’, pp 5-54 (Ch. II), in Darwin, F. (1995 [1902]) The Life of Charles Darwin, 2nd ed. London: Senate. Evans, L. (1973) ‘Wine of Australia’, in Evans, L., comp. (1973) Australia and New Zealand Complete Book of Wine, pp 173-384. Sydney: Paul Hamlyn.
are plotted as dots (or as stars for Go8 members) on x
Group of Eight Australia (2011) ‘Characteristics of Go8 Universities’ in Brochure, Group of Eight Australia. www.go8.edu.au
and y axes of ‘International student progress rate (%)’ and
Halliday, J. (2004) Varietal Wines. Pymble, Sydney: Collins.
‘Australian student progress rate (%)’ (Group of Eight Aus-
Halliday, J. (2009) Australian Wine Companion, 2010 Edition. Melbourne: Hardie Grant Books.
tralia, 2011, p. 3). Some dots intermingle with stars. In other words, there is a degree of overlap, with some non-Go8 universities doing as well as or better than some Go8 universities in comparative international/local progress rates. It is only by lumping the eight together that a principle of exclusion can be applied and a binary classification of universities can be presented. For all their terminological shortcomings, wine writers do not fall into this trap. In sum, members of the Group of Eight define them-
Johnson, H. (1991) Hugh Johnson’s Modern Encyclopedia of Wine (3rd rev. ed.). New York: Simon & Schuster. Lake, M. (1989) Scents and Sensuality. The Essence of Excitement. London: John Murray. Murphy, D (1974) Dan Murphy’s Classification of Australian Wines. Melbourne: Sun Books. Schubert, M. (1979) ‘The Story of Grange’, pp 260-270. In Caillard, A. (2004) The Rewards of Patience. A Definitive Guide to Cellaring and Enjoying Penfolds Wines, 5th ed. Adelaide: Penfolds.
selves, and hawk for recruits, by the sweet smell of their
Schuster, M. (2000) Essential Winetasting. London: Mitchell Beazley.
success. Collectively, they are in the Grange range; and
Stock, N. (2011) The Age/The Sydney Morning Herald Good Wine Guide 2012. Camberwell: Penguin.
they sing their individual praises on house labels.The University of Melbourne has posters on one of its street walls that announce in big bold lettering above and small type below:
No. 1 In Australia* Melbourne’s world standing reaffirmed * 2011 Academic Rankings of World Universities Shanghai Jiao Tong University vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Tasting Notes Passages in quotation marks come from the following sources: Adelaide ‘… offers syrupy black fruit … ‘, Salomon Fleurieu Peninsula Syrah Viognier Grand crews, Arthur O’Neill
69
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
2009, Salomon Estate, McLaren Vale, S. A. Ralph Kyte-Powell, ‘Wine of the week’, The Age, Epicure, 11 October 2011, p. 23. ‘… a concentrated essence-like assembly … ‘, The Laird Shiraz 2005, Torbreck Vintners, Marananga, S. A. Stock, 2009, p. 335. ‘A concoction of wild fruits and sundry berries with crushed ants …’. Schubert, 1979, p. 267. ‘This delicious Shiraz has hints of … ‘, Heartland 2006 Shiraz, Langhorne Creek/Limestone Coast, S. A. In a flyer promoting the wine, n. d. (2011). ‘… brings together the best in craft brewing … ‘ and ‘… very own Barossa Valley Shiraz’. From neck label on bottle of Pepperjack Hand Crafted Ale, Saltram Wine Estate, Angaston, S. A. ‘I was curious about this brew with shiraz … ‘. Review by jesperhammer – Copenhagen, Denmark, on 14 February 2011 & posted the next day on www. ratebeer.com/beer/saltram-of-barossa-pepperjack-hand-crafted-ale/78565 Australian National ‘Yet another well-made wine in the Ministry Series … ‘, The Backbencher Merlot 2006, Capital Wines, Weetangera, ACT Halliday, 2009, p.142. ‘… all about controlled power … ‘, Kyeema Vineyard Reserve Shiraz 2007, Capital Wines, Weetangera, ACT Halliday, 2009, p.142. ‘Bold barrel ferment wine … ‘, Canberra District Chardonnay 2006, Lambert Vineyards, Wamboin, N. S. W. Halliday, 2009, p. 369. Melbourne ‘Typical One Eye nose … ‘, One Eye Shiraz, 2005, Heathcote, Vic. In a promotion sheet for this wine, n. d. (2011). ‘… a kaleidoscope of mega-rich …’, Blanc de Blancs, Yarra Burn, Yarra Valley, Vic. In brochure: Dan Murphy’s 20 Recommended Sparkling Wines, n. d. (2011). Monash ‘… intensity and length are prodigious … ‘, Private Cellar Barossa Valley Shiraz Mourvèdre 2009, Hewitson, Mile End, S. A. ‘James Halliday’s Top 100 Wines’, The Weekend Australian Magazine, ‘The Wine Issue’, November 19-20, 2011, p. 35.
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
New South Wales ‘… the Stanley Wine Company, whilst proud of heritage, lies still at the cutting edge of modern winemaking technology’. www.cwines.com.au ‘Our mission is about being global, … ‘. Troy Christensen, CEO of Accolade Wines, in ‘New Name, New Vision, New Mission’, 27 June 2011. www.accoladewines.com ‘The winery now has an impressive 45,000 tonne … ‘. www.stanleywines.com.au ‘An appealing medium bodied dry red … ’ & ‘An aromatic, fresh, fruity …’. On cask labels for Shiraz Cabernet & Fresh Dry White, The Stanley Wine Company, Buronga, N. S. W. Queensland ‘An altogether strange feeling … ‘, First Step Reduced Carbon Footprint Cabernet Merlot 2005, Sirromet Wines, Mount Cotton, Qld. Halliday, 2009, p. 592. ‘Vibrant colour; lifted and smoky tropical fruit … ‘, Co-inoculated Granite Belt Verdelho 2008, Witches Falls Winery, North Tamborine, Qld. Halliday, 2009, p. 707. Sydney ‘The Best of the Best’ & ‘…for the depth, ripeness and weight … ‘, Kiss Shiraz 2009, Thomas Wines, Hunter Valley, NSW. In Stock, 2011, pp. 16 & 334. ‘Lemon and ruby grapefruit zest … ‘, Mount Pleasant Blue Label Hunter Valley Semillon 2006, McWilliams, Pokolbin, NSW. Dan Murphy’s Fine Wine Buyer’s Guide, 10th ed. (October 2011), p. 5. Western Australia ‘A light-to medium-bodied spicy/savoury … ‘, Margaret River Classic Red 2007, Evans & Tate, Wilyabrup, W.A. Halliday, 2009, p.231. ‘… an engaging combination of grapefruit …’, Cherubino Chardonnay 2010, Larry Cherubino Wines, Margaret River, W. A. James Halliday (winecompanion. com.au), quoted in Dan Murphy’s Fine Wine Buyers Guide, 10th ed. (October 2011), p. 5.
‘There’s a mix of berries and a foxy … ‘, Chalmers Sagrantino, 2008, Chalmers Wines, Mildura, Vic. Stock, 2011, p. 375. ‘Reputation is slightly ahead of quality at this stage’, about wines of the Boschendal vineyards, Groot Drakenstein, South Africa. In Johnson, 1991, p. 515. ‘… sweet, fragrant floral aromas …’, & ‘… underpinned by brisk, crunchy acid ... ‘, Friends of Punch Berrys Creek Vineyard, Noble Riesling, 2009, Gippsland, Vic. Stock, 2011, p. 403.
70
Grand crews, Arthur O’Neill
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Uncapped university Andee Jones
Apart from the odd compulsive student, like me, or the
the academic equivalent of a chockers London Under-
odd obsolete teacher (also like me), few people know that
ground lift. For the first tutorial, 25 students sidled into
what now passes for a university isn’t a university.
a 35-degree, airless closet. I scored a seat at a back table,
More than a decade ago, philosopher Raimond Gaita
straddled the corner, balanced a notepad on my knees,
(1997) reported an exchange between UK philosophers
wedged my pen and specs on the table between my
and a Minister for Education about the closure of univer-
neighbours’ clipboards — and waited. My joy of joys is
sity philosophy departments. The philosophers said that
a new course brimming with the promise of passionate
no institution that lacked a philosophy department could
intellectual engagement.
rightly call itself a university.The Minister — described by
As in the petri-dish question on biology exams, within
Gaita as a cultured man — listened carefully but finally
five minutes the class had doubled. The latecomers sat
replied,‘In that case, we will call it something else!’
on the floor, backs against the walls, knees jammed into
They haven’t had to bother. Penny pinching by federal
the behinds of the lucky sods that’d scored chairs. Just
governments has destroyed everything but the name. By
as any semblance of humanity was long gone from the
2007, compared to public university education in the rest
London Underground lift, so all vestiges of teaching had
of the OECD,Australian students paid amongst the highest
fled the uncapped classroom.
tuition fees in the world and their governments contrib-
The airless closet was a taste of things to come. From
uted less than half the amount they once did per student.
2012, the Australian government will fund universities for
Over the decade to 2005, student fees increased by 70
as many students as they can enrol (excepting postgradu-
per cent and resources per student fell, saving the govern-
ate and medical students). In the three years prior to the
ment the equivalent of $1 billion (NTEU, 2007).
anticipated uncapping, Australian universities increased
Staff cuts and student increases have forced universi-
their enrolments by 20 per cent (DEEWR, 2012). At RMIT
ties into a two-stream system in which islets of senior academics supervise shoals of research students, while a sea of casual staff — desperate to make landfall before they hit retirement — carry the vast bulk of the teaching load. As a
this year, places report-
As in the petri-dish question on biology exams, within five minutes the class had doubled. The latecomers sat on the floor, backs against the walls, knees jammed into the behinds of the lucky sods that’d scored chairs.
university teacher last century, I learnt to teach while treading water and also on dry land but nothing prepared me for my experience as a student in 2011.
edly increased by 1,343 while the cut-off scores for admission to some courses plunged. For one business course the entry rank fell from nearly 70 last year to 50 this year; for one civil engineering course, 79 to 62; and for one psychology
course, 81 to 68 (Topsfield & Butt, 2012). As enrolments skyrocket and cut-off scores plummet,
Last year I enrolled in masters-level courses at two
many universities are slashing staff numbers — and play-
self-exulted Australian universities. I wanted to choose
ing the old blame tune. Announcing cuts of 340 at Sydney
the one that better suited me. I didn’t realise I’d entered
University, Vice-Chancellor Dr Martin Spence said the
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Uncapped university, Andee Jones
71
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
university could no longer carry those staff members ‘not pulling their weight’ (Bennet, 2011). In the university context, ‘not pulling their weight’ is executive-speak for ‘publishing fewer papers than Canberra wants’. To Canberra, only numbers count. It doesn’t matter to an auditor that one timely, substantial paper might contribute more to scholarship than four light-weight pieces put together. Muttering ‘not pulling their weight’ in the general direction of academics keeps them treading water. The slogan taps into community suspicions — already trained by the tabloids — that university teachers don’t have enough to do. But on Canberra’s publish-or-perish showboat, the survivors try to keep the sharks at bay. Sometimes against
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
References DEEWR (Department of Education, Employment and Workplace Relations). (2012). Demand driven funding for undergraduate student places Fact Sheet, Canberra: DEEWR Retrieved from: http://www.deewr.gov.au/HigherEducation/Resources/Pages/FundingUndergradStudent.aspx Bennet, J. (2011). Sydney University confirms job losses. Campus Review 21 Nov. Retrieved from: http://www.campusreview.com.au/blog/news/sydney-universityconfirms-job-losses/ Gaita, R. (1997). Truth and the Idea of a University. Australian Universities’ Review, 40(2), 13-18. NTEU (National Tertiary Education Union). (2007). The Funding of Australian Universities 1996-2005. Retrieved from: http://www.nteu.org.au/library/ view/id/477 Topsfield, J. & Butt, C. (2012). 3000 more uni places. The Age 17 Jan.
their better academic judgment they publish prematurely or turn one paper into several. After all, why feed Jaws a single prey when tossing him two halves has him behaving as if he’s twice as full? Under-the-knife and underpublished academics join forces, set up new journals and publish each other. Meanwhile, in vain, scholars scour the literature for something that’s still breathing. Back in the airless closet, the masters-level subject comprised a series of unpaid visitors ad-libbing on ‘what I do to earn a buck in this industry’. At both universities the justification for the absence of teaching was that we masters students were already proficient. What we’d get out of the course was the know-how to sell our wares in the marketplace. So why wouldn’t we just do a marketing course? ‘Indeed,’ said one lecturer, ‘some of our best students have’. In his article, philosopher Raimond Gaita mourned the loss not only of a serious conception of the value of learning for its own sake, but also of the very language with which to articulate such a conception. He quoted Hazel Rowley: ‘Never before has there been so much talk of “excellence and quality assurance” and never before [has there been] so little concern for either’, and added, ‘For a long time we did not notice what we had lost’. Not that it’ll worry the auditors; they’ll just call it something else. Andee Jones is a retired psychologist and academic.
72
Uncapped university, Andee Jones
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Déjà vu all over again: what next for universities? Warren Bebbington University of Adelaide
Unter den Linden is old Berlin’s most picturesque boule-
many, and the rigorous secondary schools (Gymnasien)
vard. Its west end is marked by the imposing Brandenburg
that still exist today. But he had already implemented his
Gate, and the aisle of lime trees for which it is named runs
plan for a new kind of university.
down the centre to Schlossbrücke, bridge to the palace
Humboldt did not want his university to offer a rigid
gardens in the east. Frederick the Great sits in stone on
curriculum like the vocational Stuttgart Hochschule
horseback at the centre, glancing towards the rebuilt State
where his friend the poet Schiller had passed a miserable
Opera he inspired, his eyes averted from the neo-Baroque
time. Nor did he want the traditional university pattern,
State Library, for which he cared little.
where the focus was on the study of often ancient books,
It is a street redolent with history. Napoleon’s troops
transmitted by the professor in lectures for students to
paraded through the Gate in 1806 after defeating Prus-
copy, summarise and memorise, for he was sceptical of
sia; Hitler led a torchlight parade there when he became
granting any book unquestioned authority. One modern
Chancellor.The Berlin Wall still divided the city in the early
book he was in more sympathy with was Diderot’s lively
1980s when I came to study in the State Library, and armed
Encyclopédie (1751-80), which invited readers to educate
border guards watched from gun turrets at the Gate to see
themselves in any branch of knowledge, all contained
no-one approached too closely. All that has changed now.
in a single work. But Humboldt believed the discovery
Yet one thing that has survived two centuries is in the
of knowledge was an unending scientific process, and
rebuilt palace next to the Library: Berlin University, opened
doubted it could be codified in this way. Scientific dis-
in 1810 and now renamed after its founder, whose statue
covery was pursued at meetings of the Royal Society in
graces the entrance—Wilhelm von Humboldt.
London and the Prussian Academy of Sciences in oral
Philosopher, diplomat and admirer of the Enlighten-
demonstrations, but those he felt lacked the stimulation
ment, Humboldt had travelled to Paris in 1789 during
dealing with students would bring. His aim was to bring
the storming of the Bastille. He was amongst the circle of
objective scientific discovery and subjective student
reformers who, in the wake of Napoleon’s occupation of
learning together as one (McNeely & Wolverton, 2008).
Berlin, were charged with rebuilding Prussia as a modern
In his 1810 paper ‘On the Internal and External Organi-
state. In 1809 he was appointed head of culture and educa-
sation of the Higher Scientific Institutions in Berlin,’
tion of the Prussian Ministry of the Interior, and he imme-
Humboldt explained his vision of ‘work on knowledge
diately proposed a reform of the entire Prussian education
[Wissenschaft] in the deepest and broadest sense of
system, arranging it into three tiers. He resigned after just
the word.’ Around a seminar table, students would orally
16 months, too soon to see the lower tiers come to reality:
report on projects they had chosen to work at under
the 30,000 free primary schools that spread across Ger-
their own guidance. The successful work of one would
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Déjà vu all over again: what next for universities?, Warren Bebbington
73
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
thus inspire the others: it would be ‘a collaboration that
attraction of science was especially great; flushed from
is uninterrupted, constantly self-renewing, but unforced
wartime achievements in the hour of national need, and
and without specific purpose.’There would be no curricu-
confident of ongoing government funding for the Space
lum, no exams, and no grades; the learning would be stu-
Race and other ambitions, science seemed to offer limit-
dent-centred, with professors present not to lecture but
less horizons. Staff members were free to work at applied
to guide these ‘inherently undetermined and in a sense
research or choose to follow their curiosities into long-
accidental activities.’ The credential would be a new
term basic research, some of which was funded in the
degree, the PhD, awarded for a dissertation demonstrating
research and development departments of commercial
original research, orally defended in a seminar. Students
companies as well. And not all needed to pursue research:
would graduate as rational, critical and independent think-
it was accepted that some would be immersed in teach-
ers, ready to follow careers in law, medicine, education
ing instead. Universities catered for the traditional profes-
or the church. The professors, appointed and salaried by
sions, while training for the growing number of skilled
the State, would be required to give public lectures, but
occupations and for teachers—where employment
otherwise had ‘solitariness and freedom’ to pursue topics
opportunities and demand were now strongest—were
as their curiosity dictated. The State was to refrain from
handled by technical institutes and teachers’ colleges. It
prescribing them particular technical problems: it was to
was a steadily expanding binary system of higher educa-
have ‘the inner conviction that when they achieve their
tion, a divide legislated by the Menzies Government in
final purpose, they will also fulfil its purposes, namely
1958, as it later was in the UK in 1963 (Larkins, 2011).
from a much more elevated perspective.’ Basic research
No-one much complained that just four per cent of school
would take time, and the university’s autonomy was
leavers attended a university: concerns over social restric-
important (Humboldt, 1809).
tion in university participation were yet to become a
Needless to say, the student who could at once embark
major preoccupation.
on independent research under his own guidance would
Contrast this with the present situation. Numbers in
require rigorous high school preparation to ‘bear within
Australian universities now are huge—more than 1 mil-
himself a yearning to lift himself to science.’ And thus a
lion students are enrolled. The student: staff ratio aver-
problem was entrenched: while Humboldt had sought to
ages 20:1, and classes of 1,000 or even 1,500 students are
end aristocratic privilege, the Gymnasien remained all-male,
not unknown in first-year subjects. Few campuses have
elite fee-charging institutions throughout the 19th century,
grown in proportion to accommodate such numbers, and
and thus admission to the university was socially restricted.
not surprisingly, students are unhappy with their expe-
Still, Humboldt’s university attracted brilliant professors
rience, expressing in the national Course Experience
and students from across Germany, from Schopenhauer
Questionnaire and other surveys often modest levels of
and Hegel to Karl Marx and Albert Einstein. It inspired
overall satisfaction. Few of them are on campus full-time,
the German research university which, by the Great War
though most are enrolled as if they were, for the average
in 1914, was admired throughout the world. To be sure,
student is now employed 12-15 hours a week, and a size-
it was not the only locus for research at the time: Louis
able minority over 20. Not at the kind of work they want
Pasteur in France had shown that important and useful
in the future, however: they are well aware that over a
science could thrive in free-standing research institu-
third of all employment in Australia now requires a profes-
tions too. But many British and American scholars were
sional qualification, and most worry that their courses are
attracted to study in Germany in the 19th century, and
not specifically preparing them for work after graduation.
the German research university model eventually came to
They sit in classes often overtired from work, distracted
reshape their own universities, from Harvard in the USA
by texting from friends on ever-present laptops or smart-
to Oxford in the UK (Anderson, 2009).
phones, or even online gaming which, as one recent study
In Australia, the German research university model was
shows, some believe is a legitimate activity in lectures.
more slowly assimilated, the PhD at last adopted in the
The digital world impacts students in other ways too.
late 1940s and 1950s. The early 1960s were halcyon days:
For a decade now fewer have bought prescribed text-
student: staff ratios were a luxurious 8:1 and many classes
books, believing that if the lecturer’s online materials fail
were small, offering close encounter with a lecturer. The
to serve, then they can always make do with searching
students arrived at university generally well prepared by
Google or reading Wikipedia which, despite its own dis-
school matriculation classes, and being supported by their
claimers, many treat as if it were no less reliable than a text
families or on scholarships most had no need to work.The
by academic experts.They are thus ill equipped to read or
74
Déjà vu all over again: what next for universities?, Warren Bebbington
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
understand the research literature in their field, and when
they find more attractive rewards and more stimulating
an enterprising lecturer refers them to a research article,
work outside universities.
those that read it come away often mystified and irritated
Yet despite their massive size, universities cater for a
at its obscurity, and seldom energised by the idea of the
participation rate of no more than 32 per cent in Australia,
search for new knowledge. The chance that independent
so some social inequity remains.To achieve the goal of 40
research would play a significant role in such undergradu-
per cent set by government since the Bradley Report, let
ate teaching seems remote.
alone the 50 per cent aspiration in the UK, requires yet
Moreover, the promises of e-learning have not yet cap-
further expansion. Subjects with 2,000 students perhaps?
tured their attention in ways we might have hoped. They
Anything Humboldt would have recognised will then be
love downloadable lectures, for they like being able to
very hard to find.
review and revise through that format, being free to skip,
How did our universities come to this? The turning
highlight, or replay passages as they wish—just as their
points were in the 1970s. The Oil Shock and the western
forebears did with a textbook—or even play at double
economic crisis that followed brought the first significant
speed, to make the droning of a particularly ponderous
constraints in government block grants to universities in
lecturer more interesting. They also like on-line drills and
Australia, and with those came the development of more
quizzes where there is instant response. But they com-
rigorous selectivity measures and quality assurance con-
plain that other kinds of online learning resources are
trol in national research grants. It was the worst possible
often poorly executed, boring, or only vaguely related to
moment for universities to expand, and a tidal wave of baby
the subject.Their lecturers are too often not skilled in the
boomers reaching school leaving age had already struck:
full potential of digital resources, using them simply to
the capacity to accommodate more students was at an
reinforce or substitute for face-to-face lectures.
end. Entrance quotas based on school scores were intro-
For these staff meanwhile, the pressures of research
duced, and for the first time, high school matriculation no
have come to dominate teaching. In an environment
longer meant a place at university.Tension rose over social
where available grant funding is far from adequate, com-
inequity in universities, and it was clear the binary systems
petition is fierce, and calls for measures of ‘impact’ alarm
would not last much longer. The end approached in 1988
those committed to long-term basic research where no
(and in the UK around the same time) when under John
impact may be detectable for many years. Pressure to
Dawkins a ‘Unified National System’ came into law. Fund-
climb the university ranking tables adds to the focus on
ing would now significantly increase, but the colleges and
research, for most such tables rank research rather than
technical institutes would all combine or be merged with
teaching, which they cannot seem to measure directly
existing universities; henceforth all higher education insti-
(Rauhvargersm, 2011).
tutions would be called universities, and thus all would be
Meanwhile, the cost of researching some of the most
required to adopt a research-intensive mission. In Australia
important problems has exploded beyond the capacity of
and the UK, all higher education institutions were now
any single university to afford. What Australian university
shaped by a single mould.
could purchase a $200 million Synchotron, or run a Very
Some countries had more nuanced ways of manag-
Large Array at $15 million a year? In one of the welcome
ing the enrolment explosion of those years. By far the
developments of the past decade, this has led to signifi-
most impressive was in the USA, where in California, the
cant partnerships, where universities, research institutes,
State’s university, teachers colleges and junior colleges
governments and corporations have formed consortia to
had been coordinated under a Master Plan for Higher
jointly purchase and operate research facilities none could
Education in 1960. The Plan mandated a tripartite system
afford alone. Some such partnerships have brought insti-
under a California Postsecondary Education Commission,
tutions together around the world, constructing global
in which the University of California would take the top
research capacity of impressive size. But ‘Big Science’
eighth of school leavers, the state teachers colleges (now
demands large numbers of staff too: a particle collider
renamed California State University and focussed on
may need a hundred research-only staff to run it, and this
applied research) the top third and the vocational junior
stresses further the tension between research and teach-
(now community) colleges would be open to all who had
ing. Such facilities often offer too few properly-funded
finished high school and are 18. All three tiers would be
opportunities for students. Research-Only staff numbers
tuition fee-free, and each would have its separate gov-
have grown strongly, while nationally research higher
ernance. It was a bold, quintessentially democratic solu-
degree student numbers have now started to decline, as
tion, which allowed significant and ongoing expansion
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Déjà vu all over again: what next for universities?, Warren Bebbington
75
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
of higher education, but based on academic merit rather
also needs to be made more attractive, finding ways to
than social class.
improve its rewards and widening opportunities for stu-
In the past few years the Master Plan has been revised,
dents pursuing higher degrees by research to work along-
the California Postsecondary Education Commission abol-
side staff in our most exciting research frontiers, including
ished, the global financial crisis (GFC) has brought finan-
even the most complex of our ‘Big Science’ projects.
cial crisis, and the gap between access to a university and
We need to embed cultivation of the character we wish
local junior college is substantial. But it remains a hugely
for in our graduates. Most universities have statements of
admired model, (Douglass, 2000) and several other US
graduate attributes, some only thinly connected with the
states followed suit: in New York, the State University and
actual learning. Every course needs to contribute in some
the City University (CUNY) systems were created, bring-
way to producing independent, critical, tolerant and open-
ing together senior and community colleges, and creating
minded thinking; to learning the skills of acquiring knowl-
a hierarchy of merit which serves between them over a
edge by navigating, analysing, and discerning credibility in
million students. At CUNY, despite its staggering size, the
information sources; and to developing interpersonal and
hierarchy of course types and teaching modes means that
communication skills, motivation, and the personal atti-
most undergraduate classes are under 30, and its graduate
tudes and work ethic essential to successful collaboration,
seminars usually less than half that.
discovery and—as it happens — to graduate employment.
What would Humboldt have made of Australia’s uni-
We will also need to develop e-learning resources that
versities today? No doubt he would have marvelled at
better support discovery and collaboration. Beyond pres-
the complex questions and imaginative methods of our
entation software like PowerPoint we need easily-usable
research, while likely censuring government for attempts
design tools and software that enable interactive discus-
to influence research autonomy. In large research centres
sion environments, runnable simulations, guided analysis
he would have thought the lack of a teaching programme
tools, process change exercises for example. These will
the same shortcoming he saw in the science academies
enrich face-to-face teaching, and enhance flexible learn-
of his own day. Likely he would have thought the set cur-
ing, improving a university’s ability to cut loose from set
ricula and limited scope in many courses a step back to
class timetables to serve the growing number of students
the vocational institutions he disliked. He would have
whose work commitments or geographical location pre-
seen the current uses of online resources as little more
vent them from attendance (Laurillard, 2002).
than continuation of the text transmission model he
Inevitably we will also need to intensify academic staff
sought to supersede, and in Wikipedia a compilation of
development in teaching, to equip staff with small group,
information no closer to spreading true knowledge than
collaborative teaching strategies and new IT skills. Aca-
the encyclopaedias of the 18th century. Everywhere he
demics typically spend most of their time teaching yet are
would have seen an urgent need to reconfigure teaching
least trained for it, and often least rewarded for it too. Uni-
for small group seminars, to liberate curricula and timeta-
versities need to professionalise teaching and its rewards,
bles for flexible learning, and to reinvent anew the close
so staff who choose to pursue teaching excellence may
interaction of teacher and students in an uninterrupted,
enjoy the same status as those who pursue research excel-
self-renewing collaboration of discovery.
lence (Seldin, n.d.).
So what can be done? Fundamentally, we need to
Finally, we need to share the excitement of discovery
affirm the vital importance of small-group learning and
with the public, by more often placing our leading aca-
close encounter with a teacher in high-quality university
demics on the public lecture podium or in the media to
learning. By this I mean finding a place in our courses for
speak of their work.
the self-renewing, open-ended collaboration Humboldt
Of course, no single model is right for all students: in
described—the oral seminar or interactive group encoun-
a truly inclusive university we are unlikely to have Hum-
ter where students take part in content design, peer
boldt’s restriction to rigorously-prepared students ready
assessment, and quality evaluation and where the teacher
to work independently. As they move towards 40 per cent
is a guide and partner rather than a lecturer.
participation rates,Australian universities will increasingly
We need to recapture the excitement of discovery
need to adapt to students of varying aptitudes, achieve-
in undergraduate programmes. There should be some
ments and interests. And in any case, ratios of 8:1 are
chance even for the first year undergraduate to experi-
unlikely to be seen again. How then do we simulate the
ence learning through independent inquiry and sharing
small cohort experience where it is appropriate in the
their findings in a small group. Graduate research training
midst of a diverse, mass enrolment?
76
Déjà vu all over again: what next for universities?, Warren Bebbington
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Some are trying to address this. At the University of
munism that followed; today it does not feature among the
California–Santa Barbara, a university ranked No. 32 in the
Top 100 of the ranking tables.And across the world the uni-
world (ARWU – Academic Ranking of World Universities)
versity model it inspired has all but drowned in the flood
with five Nobel Prize winners on its current staff, there
of massed enrolments and the weight of research demands.
are dual paths through undergraduate degree. Most stu-
Sensibly, the way forward is going back to Humboldt’s ideal.
dents choose from amongst majors taught in the custom-
Thus history repeats itself. Search for ‘historic recur-
ary classes; a smaller group, having met additional entry
rence’ and Google will lead you to long lists of sayings,
requirements, take independent work from the outset,
including ‘There is nothing new under the sun,’ ‘Those
working closely with full professors. Santa Barbara calls
who cannot remember the past are condemned to repeat
it ‘graduate school for undergraduates’; it does not let all
it,’ and ‘Its déjà vu all over again.’ Wikipedia will tell you
have a taste of small cohorts, however.
the authors of these are respectively Ecclesiastes, Santay-
Ultimately, governments need to sanction a broader
ana, and Yogi Bera. But to grasp the different context and
variety of missions from universities, instead of the single,
significance of each—the ancient pronouncement whose
research-intensive mould. Universities elsewhere choose
power transcends translation from Hebrew, the ironical
their characteristics based on their location and their envi-
aphorism of the Spanish-American poet, or the comic
ronment: in the USA over half the 4,400 degree-granting
malapropism of the American baseball legend—requires
institutions focus entirely on teaching. Australian universi-
knowledge not so easily extracted from an online search
ties need to be able to choose where they wish to place
engine. Which to choose to summarise this paper and
themselves on the continuum between teaching and
why? Perhaps the question for a seminar. . .
research, between transmitting known knowledge and discovering the unknown, between short-term applied
Warren Bebbington is the recently-appointed Vice Chancellor
and long-term basic research, between cultivating stu-
and President of the University of Adelaide, and this paper is
dents’ character and deepening their specific expertise, as
his inaugural address, delivered on 18 July 2012.
well as between building international scholarly reputation and building national identity, between serving the professions as they exist and changing their social shape, between partnering with the community and standing apart as its independent critic (McNeely, 2002). In Australia, we have not suffered from the model described by Harry Lewis in Excellence Without a Soul, where in some elite US universities the leading professors are seen only in graduate seminars, while green doctoral students handle the bulk of undergraduate teaching (Lewis, 2006). Yet at present Australian staff are not much motivated about teaching. In a survey of academics in 18 countries, US academics had the highest preference for teaching, while Australian had the fourth lowest. Australian students report much less frequent communication with staff than American students, they are less likely to receive prompt feedback, and thus are not motivated to work as hard to meet their teacher’s expectations (Norton, 2012). All in all, American universities offer students closer interaction with a lecturer. The single mould of government funding which has concentrated Australian focus on research means staff struggle to see teaching as a satisfying alternative. Like much else on Unter den Linden, Humboldt University suffered from the years of Nazism. Einstein and other distinguished professors fled and its academic standing plunged, to be rebuilt only slowly during the years of Comvol. 54, no. 2, 2012
References Anderson, R. (2004). European Universities from the Enlightenment to 1914. London: Oxford University Press, 2004. Anderson, R. (2009). The ‘Idea of a University’ Today. In K, Withers, ed., First Class? Challenges and Opportunities for the UK’s University Sector. London: Institute for Public Policy Research, 2009. Douglass, J. A. (2000). The California Idea and American Higher Education 1850 to the 1960 Master Plan. Stanford, Cal.: Stanford University Press, 2000. Humboldt, W. von. (1809). Schriften zur Politik und zum Bildungsesen [Writings on Politics and Education]. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft, 3rd ed., 1982, IV, 253-65. Translated by Thomas Dunlap, German History in Documents and Images, vol. II. Larkins, F. (2011). Australian Higher Education Research Policies and Performance, 1987-2010. Melbourne: Melbourne University Press, 2011. Laurillard, D. (2002). Rethinking Teaching for the Knowledge Society. EDUCAUSE Review 37/1 (Jan-Feb 2002), 16-25. Lewis, H. (2006). Excellence Without a Soul: How a Great University Forgot Education. New York: Public Affairs, Perseus Books, 2006. McNeely, I. (2002). The Unity of Teaching and Research: Humboldt’s Educational Revolution. Oregon Humanities (Fall 2002), 32-35. McNeely, I. & Wolverton, L. (2008). Reinventing Knowledge: From Alexandria to the Internet. New York: W.W. Norton. Norton , A. (2012). Mapping Australian Higher Education. Melbourne: Grattan Institute Report, 2012. Rauhvargersm, A. (2011). Global University Rankings and Their Impact EUA Report on Rankings. Brussels: European University Association, 2011. Seldin, P. (n.d.) Improving College Teaching. Retrieved from: www.olemiss. edu/depts/vc_academic_affairs/improve.html.
Déjà vu all over again: what next for universities?, Warren Bebbington
77
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Quality in teaching and learning One path to improvement Geoff Sharrock L H Martin Institute, University of Melbourne
In response to the concerns raised by John Buchanan in his recent article about the uses and abuses of student surveys (AUR vol. 53, no. 1), this paper outlines one method for using student feedback to inquire into the quality of teaching and learning in classroom settings, and identify improvements to this and other aspects of a program of study at the subject level.
Introduction
to reaffirm my own sense that all was indeed well, and to reassure my programme coordinator of this. But, as a
I read John Buchanan’s article just after receiving the results
systematic way of using survey-based student feedback to
of a short ‘quality of teaching’ survey with nine items and a
gain insights into the dynamics of a specific teaching and
rating scale, widely used at my own institution, for a subject
learning situation, and generate meaningful improvements
I had taught in 2010. I had given the survey to my students
in that situation, the approach taken here was too static,
in their final class, in October. The completed forms were
too anonymous, too slow and too simplistic. On the last
mailed off to be processed, and I received the summary
point, for example, the content of the survey propositions
results back in March, with an average score for each item
underplayed the extent to which aspects of the learning
on the list, and some supplementary comments where stu-
environment, positive or negative, are co-produced by stu-
dents had elected to offer these. As a relative newcomer to
dents themselves (for example, by doing the reading, turn-
academia, and as someone new to this programme, teach-
ing up, asking questions, engaging in thoughtful and open
ing a subject with few pre-existing course materials, I was
discussion - or failing to do these things).
happy to see that, having scrambled to be ready for many of
In practice, a quality of teaching survey designed to be
the classes, my student ratings weren’t bad: there was room
short, sharp and simple to administer too easily becomes
to improve, but no cause for concern.
a blunt instrument, wielded slowly and indiscriminately, to
Clearly this process serves reporting purposes of value
yield data that are, diagnostically speaking, dead on arrival.
to a university (particularly one such as mine which,
Student survey processes like this seem designed to suit
having made big changes to its curriculum, can now pre-
the needs of central planners, faculty managers and policy
sent aggregated ‘quality of teaching’ survey data captured
researchers far more than those of front line practition-
over several years which show that, despite what some
ers, raising the kinds of ‘fitness for purpose’ concerns that
critics may claim, the Melbourne Model has merit). How-
Buchanan highlights. No doubt the delay I experienced
ever, while recognising these benefits, I can also say that
between seeking and getting student feedback can be mini-
at the front line of teaching, the information generated by
mised by adopting an online approach to administering
this survey was not much help to me at all. It did serve
surveys, as some institutions have done (and as my own insti-
78
Quality in teaching and learning, Geoff Sharrock
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
tution now does). And a longer, more detailed list of survey
cational quality than do their teachers’ and misguidedly
propositions, with some optional extras, would yield a more
privileges the ‘student as client’ (2011, p. 67). The more
fine-grained snapshot of students’ experiences of a particu-
nuanced view offered by James, for example (2002, p. 79),
lar programme or subject (as my own institution allows for).
seems more persuasive:
Typically, however, fixing one problem exacerbates another. Depending on how it is administered, a significantly longer survey may lower the response rate where participation is voluntary. As Buchanan notes, a survey administered in class is more likely to have a high response rate than one undertaken out of class and online. How then to ensure that the process will be systematic, transparent, user-friendly and also detailed and nuanced enough to be of use to practitioners seeking meaningful improvements from meaningful feedback? The conventional processes for capturing, consolidating and sifting through student feedback seem to offer little scope for a lecturer or programme coordinator to: • engage students in a conversation that elicits the story behind their individual responses; • assure students that their specific concerns are understood and taken seriously; • assure students that where it makes sense to do so, changes can be made; or • communicate to students why a proposed change is unnecessary, infeasible or unwise.
Since student expectations must have some bearing on their motivation and satisfaction, expectations must in turn influence the quality of higher education for students are co-producers of this quality…Students are well-equipped to judge the quality of certain aspects of higher education…Students can be expected to be reasonable arbiters of the impact on them of the availability of computers, the quality of teaching spaces, the teaching skills of academic staff, and so on… They expect the fundamentals of effective teaching — clear goals, feedback on progress, and transparent assessment requirements and grading practices — and they welcome personal interaction with teaching staff and being treated as individuals by staff who show concern for their progress…But the student expectation-quality relationship is not altogether this straightforward…There are deeper dimensions to quality in higher education, such as the overall coherence of the curriculum, into which students have fewer insights. These aspects of higher education quality are usually less tangible, less intuitive and require a longer term view. Students are not necessarily in the best position to judge these aspects of quality, creating potential clashes between individual student preferences and what is educationally desirable…
In sum, many of the methodological concerns that
Common indicators of ‘quality’ or ‘excellence’ in higher
Buchanan and others have raised about the uses of stand-
education are well represented by the Australian Teaching
ardised teaching quality, course experience or student satis-
and Learning Council (ALTC) criteria which have ‘become
faction surveys to improve the quality of provision remain
accepted as a proxy list of skills and practices of effective
unresolved. The survey items may be clear, their relevance
university teaching in Australian higher education’ (Devlin
to student learning may be well supported by research,
& Samarawickrema, 2010, 115-118). The ALTC list high-
and the ratings produced may, in aggregate, be statistically
lights engaging and motivational teaching; coherent and
valid. But this is small consolation for the fact that, from
up to date course material; both formative and summa-
an improvement point of view, the information produced
tive assessment and feedback; support for individual stu-
by these processes offers little of immediate value to the
dent development; and reflective and evaluative practice.
practitioner.The indicators produced are not very informa-
Also, several universities have excellent material available
tive, and tend to be all ‘lag’ and no ‘lead’: if a problem needs
online to guide teaching and learning practitioners, sol-
attention, the survey data flagging this tends to land too late,
idly based in a wide range of scholarship. The University
and when it does land, offers few clues as to what exactly
of New South Wales, for example, has a framework based
should be done differently, by whom and for whom.Where
around 16 principles (UNSW, 2004), and the University of
the prompt for change is expressed by a minority of stu-
Melbourne, has one based around nine principles (Uni-
dents, the lecturer has no firm basis for knowing whether
versity of Melbourne, 2007). Both frameworks are widely
a particular change of approach will suit the majority of
referenced, well-articulated and user-friendly, translating
students in that class, let alone the next.
robust principles of teaching and learning into detailed
All that said, Buchanan’s critique of the uses and abuses of student surveys does not go on to propose a more effec-
lists of good practice that practitioners can use to reflect on their own approach, and build their repertoire.
tive and appropriate alternative, which would enable the
The student surveys I have seen are not inconsistent
more constructive, formative uses of student feedback he
with any of this. But the basic design problem, which
seeks. Nor is it enough to object that a reliance on student
Buchanan’s analysis illustrates so well, is that the system-
surveys ‘presumes that students know more about edu-
atic, standardising and summative aspects of conventional
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Quality in teaching and learning, Geoff Sharrock
79
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
student feedback processes tend to trump the local practitioner’s need for more individualised, context-specific and
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
• Volunteer explanations as to why they scored particular items as they did.
formative processes - just as they do with other university
• Discuss whether low scoring items represent a signifi-
management processes, such as quality assurance gener-
cant problem for the whole group, a problem for a few
ally, or staff appraisal. Hence the difficult balancing act,
individuals, a minor concern, or a misunderstanding.
where the design of student feedback processes fails to
• Volunteer suggestions as to how any serious concerns
bridge different educational and administrative priorities, and formative and summative purposes.As Biggs observes (2001, pp. 231-232): Many institutions have mandatory SFQs [student feedback questionnaires] as summative evaluations at the end of each course, using standard questions across all courses, where the lecture is assumed to be the norm. Ratings then vary according to students’ own conceptions of teaching, and penalise teachers using other methods… Used formatively, however, SFQs make eminent sense where questions are tailored to specific courses on aspects [where] the teacher wants feedback…
discussed might be dealt with. • Consider whether any changes proposed are feasible and beneficial, and would not downgrade some other valued aspect of the subject. • In some cases, adjust expectations that, on closer examination, seem unrealistic. By the end of such a discussion we may have identified two or three issues that warrant attention, and (unless a problem is too intractable to resolve easily) agreed on what kind of change would offer benefits, if adopted. The immediate follow-up action is to report to the group with a snapshot of the most relevant parts of their survey data,
None of the observations I have made so far is new: I have
with some brief notes that state the problem(s) identified
no grand solutions to offer, that would resolve these issues
and the solution(s) to be tried. Usually I can do this a day
at an institutional level. However, the rest of this paper will
or two after the discussion takes place, while memories
outline an approach to working with student feedback
are still fresh, by copying a selection of screen shots into a
at the subject or programme level, which goes some way
Word document, and then emailing or posting the report.
toward bridging the summative-formative gap. For the past
The follow-up action is to implement any changes agreed
few years I have been using this in programmes where I
on, and see if these improve the learning situation.
have played a coordinating or lecturing role.
Using an ‘interactive survey’ as a basis for shared inquiry
How interactive survey data summaries are presented to students Figure 1 gives an overview of the seven themes used to
Figures 1-9 below present sample images of an ‘interactive
organise and present summary scores for my 42 survey
survey’ approach I use to capture, graph, play back and
propositions, with each theme representing a set of six
discuss student feedback data in a live group setting. The
propositions. The Overview shows the average score
aim of the exercise is to map, disclose and examine how
across the whole group for each theme, in this case for
students, individually and collectively, experience various
a class of 24 students at an early stage in the programme.
aspects of the subject, and the approach taken to organis-
Since all 42 survey propositions seek to represent ‘good
ing and teaching it. My toolkit for doing this is a one page
practice’, higher scores are seen in principle as positive (9
survey with 42 propositions and a nine point rating scale;
= Always), and lower scores as negative (1 = Never). But
a Windows based software platform to capture and graph
this is not always so. In discussing the examples people
the data; and a laptop and data projector to present it.
had in mind when rating a particular item, I can invite
For small groups of (say) 20 students, the process takes up to 60 minutes: 10 to fill out the forms, 15 to enter the data (usually in a short break), five to give the forms back, and 30-40 minutes for the group to explore the results, identify issues, diagnose causes, and consider possible improvements. As the summary results are played back, students are asked to compare notes and interpret their ratings of the survey items.Their main tasks are to: • See how their individual ratings of items compared with those of others in the group.
80
Quality in teaching and learning, Geoff Sharrock
Figure 1: Overview vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
Figure 2: Student Workload
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Figure 4: Student Workload
them to challenge the survey’s assumptions, and suggest
However, the volume of set reading may not be the
better propositions that would help to pinpoint the issue
issue. Clearly, a large part of students’ experience of course
we are seeking to diagnose. This summary view gives a
quality is essentially administrative. Their learning experi-
first impression of whether a group’s overall experience
ence will often depend on things like: the course materi-
has been positive; and if not, it indicates roughly where
als being available well in advance, and in a clearly set out
problems might be found. Usually there is no need to
and accessible form; ready access to the physical venues
discuss the Overview summary beyond noting that the
where classes take place; having enough power points in
survey data is arranged according to these general themes:
the room to plug in laptops; and getting assistance with
the discussion points come later, when considering and
the technical aspects of online procedures. In Figure 4
comparing data at a more detailed level.
for example, the discussion of workload associated with
Figure 2 gives an overview of propositions for one of the
‘keeping up with all the reading’ in a different class turned
seven themes, Student Workload. This second level of data
out not to be a concern with the volume of reading, as
shows average scores across the group (in this case, 16 stu-
the students found it relevant and did not want less. The
dents) for each of the six items in the set. Here I ask students
real concern for some was how soon they would have
to note which items have low average scores.This is where
access to the material, to prepare for classes and study
the issues are likely to emerge, to be probed and interpreted.
tasks. The context for this group of 16 students was that
Figure 3 shows the third level of data: how students’
as busy managers, studying part-time, often they had only
scores for each survey item are distributed across the
small windows of time for study, due to business trips and
group, as a percentage of all scores for that item.Typically,
the like. In response the first batch of course materials in
this screen highlights how diverse student experiences
the next subject was made accessible online some weeks
within a group can be. Here I ask students to check back
ahead of the complete set. (Normally this became avail-
to see if their scores are above, below or in line with the
able only after the complete set was revised, with updated
group. In this case, in a group of 11 students, two were
course notes, after different contributors had all had their
always able to keep up with the reading, two were able to
input, so that hard copies in folders could be mailed out).
do so less than half the time, and the rest sat somewhere in between. Since nearly half the group had struggled
Implications
with the reading load, we discussed this. I found that my reading list comprised a larger load than in their previous
These examples illustrate two simple points about the
subject, which had set expectations. (Next time, listing
reliability of student survey data:
core and non-core readings may help.)
• as shown in Figures 3 and 4, different classes may give the same average score for an item for quite different reasons (in this case, 6.4 and 6.3 for the same proposition); and • without a group discussion of survey results, the salience of the issue of timely access to course materials may not appear on the lecturer’s radar at all, unless a survey item expressly seeks this information. Regarding pedagogy, much depends on the preferred learning styles of students themselves. In the case of item
Figure 3: Student Workload vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
21 (Figure 5), I asked the lower-scoring respondents, who had rated my style of teaching as less engaging than it Quality in teaching and learning, Geoff Sharrock
81
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
Figure 5: Teaching Quality
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Figure 6: Improvement Processes
might have been, to volunteer specific comments and sug-
discounted in discussion with those who did the rating.
gestions. I found that some would have liked me to widen
• Sixth, individual students learn whether their own con-
the mix of activities, and rely less heavily on a ‘show, tell
cerns and judgements are widely shared, or are out of
and discuss with PowerPoint slides’ routine.This I can do.
step with the experiences and perspectives of others. • Seventh, there is scope to use a collective ‘differential diag-
Discussion – limitations and benefits
nosis’ of the data to challenge individual students’ assumptions or perceptions in a methodical, constructive way.
This kind of process won’t be for everyone, obviously. If
• Eighth, the feedback process tends to evolve rapidly
things are going badly, it may be too hard for the lecturer to
from one-way feedback to the lecturer, to two-way
process the feedback alone in a live group setting. It relies
dialogue between lecturer and student, to multi-party
on a fair bit of trust between the lecturer and the students,
dialogue across the group, creating the conditions for
since students may otherwise fear that any criticism they
mutual adjustment.
make may cause offence and come back to haunt them later,
• Ninth, there is scope to test with the group whether
when the lecturer assesses their work.And it has some tech-
a proposed change of approach seems likely to offer
nical limitations, particularly if used in larger classes, where
the kind of benefit sought, without collateral damage to
the process of collecting and entering the data can consume
other benefits of value to the group (or to wider con-
too large a chunk of the time available to the class. (In the
stituencies), that flow from the existing approach.
always-online, iPad world now emerging, a technical solu-
• Tenth, there is scope to report quickly and easily in
tion for this is likely to be one where students enter their
some detail to the students, and to colleagues or super-
scores directly, get individual profiles of results on their own
visors, on how students are experiencing a subject,
screens, and view the consolidated results on a large screen).
what concerns they have raised, and what steps can
But for someone in my kind of situation, teaching fairly small
sensibly be taken to improve their learning experience.
groups of postgraduates in a fairly low-tech seminar format,
• Eleventh, having detailed and verified quantitative data
where there is typically a fair bit of open discussion, and with
at one’s fingertips offers scope for a lecturer or depart-
well-motivated students who usually display the ‘amicable
ment head to respond readily and credibly to any unin-
co-operation’ that Buchanan so rightly recommends (2011:
formed or unfair criticisms that may be circulated by
69), there are perhaps a dozen potential benefits:
disaffected students on Facebook, unsupportive col-
• First, the process is inherently educative, with the survey
leagues in faculty networks, or overly competitive rivals
results used as a qualitative instrument of active inquiry, not (just) as a passive, quantitative measurement.
in other institutions. • Twelfth, the discipline inherent in the process, of gath-
• Second (unless class attendance is unusually low), a
ering and handling student feedback responsibly and
high response rate is guaranteed, leading to high confi-
transparently, cuts both ways: the lecturer must take
dence that the summative data is representative.
student views into consideration, but the views that
• Third, it is not hard for the lecturer to make the process
will carry most weight are those that represent well-
of mapping and probing student feedback an engaging
considered feedback – and ill-considered feedback is
and inclusive one for students.
soon revealed as such.
• Fourth, the process is extremely transparent, because
Overall, the process allows reasonable scope to bridge
the data are collated in front of respondents, and the
the formative and summative purposes that student
results are available almost immediately.
surveys are supposed to fulfil, while leaving room for
• Fifth, the findings are highly reliable, since interpretations of the various ratings are confirmed, qualified or
82
Quality in teaching and learning, Geoff Sharrock
practitioners to exercise professional discretion in their handling of student expectations and concerns. vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
Figure 7: Assessment and Feedback
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Figure 9: Student Orientation
As Figure 6 indicates, the lecturer can demonstrate that
In Figure 7 for example, most of the group rated item 25
student feedback is valued, without having to accept it
highly. Those who rated it lower had to consider whether
uncritically. The lecturer can make judgements and give
they had taken the same steps as their fellow-students to
reasons as to:
read and absorb all the information made available to them.
• Which student concerns warrant a response as a matter
Applications and adaptations
of priority. • Which should be recognised as relatively unimportant, given the context.
Early interventions
• Which should be recognised as valid concerns that may
There is also scope for the lecturer to use this kind of
not be resolvable given other priorities or resource con-
process as an intervention, perhaps half way through a
straints, and
subject, to check how students are faring and to clarify
• Which reflect an unrealistic expectation.
matters or make minor adjustments. (In the masters pro-
Further, as the person controlling the technology, the lec-
gramme I coordinate, organised as a series of three to four
turer can clarify the stories behind the data, unravel mixed
day residential schools, we run this process at the end of
messages, and test whether any particular viewpoint is as
each residential.) In the example at Figure 8 from a group
representative of the group’s experience as its proponents
of 24 students, those who have given a lower score to
claim. (Without fine-grained data at its fingertips, it is not
item 33 may be struggling with the course material, or
hard for a group to slip into relying too much on the asser-
confused about the rules of the game, or unwilling to disa-
tions, impressions or anecdotes offered by one or two vocal
gree with their more assertive classmates, or shy in group
individuals). Because students review in a group setting
situations. Or with a group this size, there may simply not
how they rated their individual experiences of the subject,
be enough airspace for everyone to have their say on a
the process tends to help individuals moderate their own
topic before the discussion moves on. In a setting where
sense of which aspects or the current situation are wholly
people are invited to declare how they experience a class,
positive or wholly negative, and how much weight to give
it is (sometimes) possible to sensitise more vocal students
these. This takes pressure off the lecturer to defend and
to the need of less vocal students for airspace, so they can
justify his or her approach in the face of any strident or
find their voice when they have something to contribute.
dogmatic claims about how things should be done, why
Likewise, in the example at Figure 9, taken at an early
something is not working, or what the lecturer should do.
stage of a subject, most but not all students were fairly
This applies particularly where a student’s negative view of
clear about what was expected of them. Having heard
some element of their experience is due, at least in part, to
what these students were uncertain about, it was not too
a misconception, or their own inattention.
difficult for the lecturers to give clearer guidance to these students on the matters they raised (in this case, mainly assessment tasks and assessment standards), so they could proceed without undue anxiety. Larger groups
Meanwhile, for larger groups using a low-tech approach like the one outlined here, it would make sense to get a colleague or student to enter the data while the lecturer engages the class in a separate activity, and then play back
Figure 8: Learning Outcomes vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
and discuss results. (Alternatively, students can be asked to Quality in teaching and learning, Geoff Sharrock
83
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
email their results to the lecturer during the week prior
engaged in a detailed discussion of this one. It is possible
to the class to allow for data entry before the class begins.
that doing this led to a better result in the official survey,
But, the risk with this is that some students will forget
since in the process outlined here, the lecturer is auto-
to email their results, or do so but then fail to attend, or
matically seen as responsive to student feedback, and stu-
forget to bring their completed forms for reference, or
dents have had a chance to share and discuss their views.
forget why they scored things as they did a week earlier.)
Varying the survey content
Finally, the process I have outlined here does not leave lecturers in a position where students can easily adopt the role of passive consumers of their education, or
Further, given control of the technology, the lecturer or
assume that the lecturer’s primary purpose is to satisfy
programme coordinator also has scope to vary the content
them by catering to every preference they express. As
and wording of the survey items over time, in the light of
students, their relations with their lecturers, each other,
experience. These things need not (and should not) be set
and the wider institution are more complicated than this.
in stone, since in a process designed primarily to identify
As I have argued elsewhere (Sharrock, 2000) university
localised problems and possibilities, statistical precision is
students play multiple roles when they attend an institu-
not the main game.The main trade-off here is the one iden-
tion to study for a qualification. They may be identified as
tified at the start of this paper, between a high level of con-
customers, clients, citizens or subjects, depending on who
text specificity (where flexibility to customise is a virtue),
and what they are dealing with at any given moment. As
and a high capacity to benchmark student feedback results
educators, we mediate a rather complicated set of insti-
across contexts (where standardisation is a virtue).
tutional responsibilities in our dealings with students,
While it makes sense to design this kind of interactive
blending detachment and concern as we balance student
survey in a way that will mirror the main elements that
interests with those of third parties (such as employers)
standardised instruments already in use in one’s institu-
beyond the student-teacher transaction. To balance the
tion seek to measure, it is at least as important to reflect
range of obligations this relationship entails, we need sup-
the specifics of the resources available to people in this
portive systems and discretionary space to define quality
programme, the aims and requirements of this subject, the
in ways that make good sense, and tools that are fit for
issues presented by this teaching and learning situation,
purpose in a wide range of contexts.
and what this lecturer is trying to accomplish. Geoff Sharrock is Programme Director at the LH Martin
Conclusion
Institute for Tertiary Education Leadership and Management, University of Melbourne.
Given the institutional need for standardised and summative information for planning and reporting purposes, the kind of process outlined here can only supplement, rather than replace, the passive surveys that are already in use. Institutions need summative measures of their teaching and learning performance, not least because whenever they make changes to programmes, they are at risk of being accused of dropping standards or ignoring the needs of students or both, on the basis of impressionistic or anecdotal evidence. But even so, there appear to be benefits all round in a supplementary approach such as this one. In the situation outlined at the start of this paper, where I received the results of the official student feedback survey undertaken some months earlier, there were no surprises or questions that I might have struggled to answer if my programme coordinator had asked me why I was getting this kind of result. Why? Because on that day in October, I also used
References Biggs, J. (2001). The reflective institution: Assuring and enhancing the quality of teaching and learning. Higher Education 41, 221-238. Buchanan, J. (2011). Quality teaching: means for its enhancement? Australian Universities’ Review, 53(1), 66-72. Devlin, M. & Samarawickrema, G. (2010). The criteria of effective teaching in a changing higher education context. Higher Education Research & Development, 29(2), 111-124. James, R. (2002). Students’ Changing Expectations of Higher Education and the Consequences of Mismatches with the Reality. In Coadrake, P. (ed.), Responding to Student Expectations. OECD Paris, 71-83 Sharrock, G. (2000). Why Students Are Not (Just) Customers. Journal of Higher Education Policy and Management, 22(2), 149-164. University of Melbourne. (2007). Nine Principles Guiding Teaching and Learning. Retrieved from: http://www.cshe.unimelb.edu.au/resources_teach/ framework_teach/docs/9principles.pdf UNSW (University of New South Wales). (2004). Guidelines on Learning that Inform Teaching at UNSW. Retrieved from: http://www.guidelinesonlearning. unsw.edu.au/
the approach outlined here. When asked to complete the official quality of teaching survey, my class had already
84
Quality in teaching and learning, Geoff Sharrock
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
REVIEWS
Am I still yearning? University Unlimited: The Monash Story by Graeme Davison and Kate Murphy ISBN 978 1 74237 866 4 (paperback) 978 1 74331 056 4 (hardcover). Allen and Unwin, Sydney, 2012 xxix + 385 pp. Review by Jim McGrath
Writing recent institutional history must be hard. Dust is
University Unlimited tells its story in two strands.
still settling. Evidence has yet to be collected or ‘declas-
One strand offers an account of how Monash came to be
sified’. Writers are therefore often dependent on inter-
as it is. It begins with the Victorian Government’s deci-
viewees, who are likely to admit to having been virtuous
sion, in the 1950s, to establish a second university in the
and close to the action but unlikely to be representative –
state, together with subsidiary decisions about when and
unlikely because, even aside from the silent majority, there
where, and what its purpose and flavour were to be, and
are two large classes of participant likely to ‘decline to be
who was to run it. Later chapters cover the ambitions and
interviewed’: those who have left the institution unhap-
achievements of successive vice-chancellors: Matheson -
pily and now refuse to reconnect; and those dissidents
over sixteen years the builder, who chose an impressive
still on the payroll who think it safest to lie low. There is
collection of Young Turks as the first professors; Scott –
therefore a danger that some, at least, of the end product
who filled in for a year; Martin – the collegial facilitator
will be what RG Collingwood called scissors-and-paste
and servant-leader; Logan – the political animal, salesman
history: he said ...; she said....
and first expansionist; Robinson - the impatient imperial-
Writing the recent history of Monash University must
ist, brought down in dramatic circumstances; Darvall, who
be harder still. The writers have to get their heads and
also filled in for a year; and Larkins, who maintained –
those of their readers around the shape and purpose of a
temporarily, at least– the Robinson ‘strategy’. Most of this
most complex organisation. Monash is not only Australia’s
strand of the story is told in a balanced way: in other
largest university but also its most scattered, and the one
words something is said on either side of nearly every
comprising the most, and most disparate, elements: a sci-
controversy, including the controversy about Robinson.
ence secondary school, a feeder college for international
There are frequent expressions of concern and occasional
students, ten or so mutually dissimilar tertiary campuses,
expressions of regret, but this strand usually stops short of
and innumerable other entities, operations, franchises
providing judicious and specific evaluations.
and alliances. The blind men who tried to describe the elephant had it easier.
The second strand describes various aspects of the student experience. Some of these impressions are of life on
On top of that there is already a standard-setting history
a particular campus – usually Clayton – and understand-
of the University: Simon Marginson’s Monash: Remak-
ably so given that most current Monash alumni were once
ing the University (2000) – a book which, after a short
Clayton students. Along the way you see that every new
but punchy account of the beginnings, covers the Logan
Monash campus seems to have opened prematurely, and
years– the first period of Monash expansionism.
that Monash pioneers have always done it hard. There is
So writers of another history of Monash have two
a full account of Clayton student radicalism in the years
options. One is to extend the Marginson approach – or a
1967 to 1974. Some reminiscences, and especially those
briefer version of it – over the whole of the first fifty years,
that relate to very recent times, are – if you omit the
updating the story of 1985-1996 and judgments thereon
proper names – as much about the experience of students
in the light of new information and intuitions.The other is
at any Australian university.This is as it should be: modern
to do something else. Emeritus Professor Graeme Davison
students, unless they live on campus, spend less time there
and Dr Kate Murphy have chosen the latter course.
than did their predecessors, and have more and stronger
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Am I still yearning?, Review by Jim McGrath
85
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
forces shaping their lives. The book provides a little statistical information about student life but relies mainly on reminiscence. This reliance again raises the question of whether the sources are representative. The elements of the second strand are, regrettably, interspersed loosely among those of the first. I kept losing my place. The authors’ frequent reliance on a single source can produce embarrassing results. The book reports (pp. 207—8) the complaint by some Science Faculty staff that Deputy Vice-Chancellor John Hay’s expertise in the field of English Literature didn’t qualify him to design a new classification
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Some sentences seem, for different reasons, out of place in a work of History: A decade of stability under Martin meant that Monash was ready to match the form of its more experienced competitors while retaining some of its youthful speed and vitality (p.181). The best antidote to nostalgia is to imagine what Monash might have been without the mergers. At a time when the middle classes were moving back to the inner city, it could have been marooned in a dying industrial suburb (p. 216).
system for general staff, and an endnote tells you the source
One day, surely, the dream will come true (p. 227).
of the story. Now if some staff had that concern then the
Diligent and grateful, Sunway students are a delight to teach, says lecturer Cathy Yule (p.324).
fact is significant. But the significance changes hugely if you add a second fact which the source seems not to have known. The missing bit is that the Hay review of general staff classifications had nothing to do with John Hay but got its name from Hay and Associates – the American firm of management consultants that supplied the methodology. (Just imagine: John Hay – an innocent bystander!)
To students and teachers in Kuala Lumpur and Johannesburg, as well as in Clayton and Gippsland, Monash is more than a brand or a logo; it stands for common standards and ideals (p. 328). The authors are sometimes guilty of Excessive Personification: they repeatedly use ‘Monash’ as the subject of
University Unlimited takes a biographical approach
verbs such as ‘feared’ or ‘aspired’ or ‘resolved’. But when
to history. It tells you each vice-chancellor’s family back-
they do so, they are presumably talking about the Vice-
ground, secondary school, hobbies and pastimes, wife’s
Chancellor, or the Vice-Chancellor and his henchpersons,
name (usually), and more. It provides biographical detail
or the Palace, and not suggesting unanimity, or even a con-
for other protagonists (including several student pro-
sensus, among members of the University. On p. 326 they
tagonists), sometimes saying more about an individual’s
write ‘Reaching outwards, rather than gazing inwards, is
background than about what the individual actually did.
[the University’s] natural disposition.’ Ouch! On p.327 we
It provides so much detail that I initially suspected the
read that Monash has been ‘a university in a hurry’. But
authors of taking the pseudo-psychological approach that
universities don’t hurry: people do. Where Monash vice-
you find in AC Bradley’s Shakespearean Tragedy (1904)
chancellors and their lieutenants have made quick deci-
or Manning Clark’s A History of Australia (1962 – 1987),
sions, the decisions have been a mixture: some the results
where every major personage displays a ‘character’, often
of government pressure; some deft; and some daft – ill-
with a ‘fatal flaw’, and then proceeds on rails, like a tram,
considered, and excessively costly in the long run. Even
towards an ‘inevitable’ destination. But they have actually
if the authors had evidence that Monash vice-chancellors
done something else: they have tried to engage their read-
have never procrastinated, they would have no grounds
ers by providing the sort of ‘human interest’ flavour that
here for inducing a generalised university character.
many magazine editors and producers of television docu-
Because there are two authors one should expect at
mentaries believe that their markets require. Some read-
least two styles. But the predominant style is chatty and
ers will enjoy this approach: some will not.
repetitious. Metaphors abound.Try this:
For all their commitment to ‘human interest’ the authors sometimes miss dramatic possibilities. The book tells us who suggested the University’s motto (Ancora imparo – ‘I am still learning’ – a statement implying both humility and a determination to keep improving) but they push the information back into the Introduction. In the olden days, not only because of the nobility of the motto but also because of the repeated staff resistance to repeated Palace attempts to bury or replace it, someone would have employed a painter to depict the moment when the motto was acclaimed and approved.
86
Am I still yearning?, Review by Jim McGrath
Two years after the release of the Dawkins Green Paper, the season of frenzied merger negotiations was coming to an end. The band was playing the last waltz, and most of the dancers had paired off. Monash had pledged itself to Chisholm and Gippsland. After a brief courtship it had suspended its courtship with Victoria College, which had then paired up with Deakin, leaving the fate of its Rusden campus still in the balance. Only a few lonely hearts were waiting, with mounting anxiety, for a suitable partner. Then Logan received an urgent phone call from Minister John Dawkins: ‘We’ve got to do something with Pharmacy; no-one will take it’ (p. 210). vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
This is 110 words. You could say as much in fifteen if
dancy and ‘dis-appointment’ that broke out in various parts
you omit the information about Chisholm and Gippsland,
of the University from time to time. When asked what he
already imparted on earlier pages. (It would be good to
had done in the French Revolution, Sieyès famously said
omit it because the passage asks you to imagine Monash
that he had stayed alive. (‘J’ai vécu.’) The Monash equiva-
pairing off with two girls at the same time). You could
lent, for survivors, was ‘I am still earning’. The issue has
mention the other still-independent colleges without
exercised many minds.
using more than thirty. The story wouldn’t suffer if you cut the whole paragraph.
Not enough is heard from or about staff who do not have academic roles. The omission is regrettable, and not
There are digressions. The longest of them is six pages
just because these people have been interested parties (in
about an English academic who accepted the vice-chancel-
both senses), and formed part of communities, and lived
lorship in 1975 and then decided to stay in England. It tells
the (sometimes precarious) life. The main reason is that
us nothing about Monash. (On the other hand a paragraph
many of the unities and continuities within the current
about the reasons for Ian Young’s withdrawal in 2008 –
‘Greater’ Monash result from the services, systems and
before acceptances – might have been informative).
procedures that have been provided or imposed by those
Taken together, the biographical detail, the style and
who are not academics working across the Empire.
the digressions fill a lot of space. So do the nearly 100
I wish that University Unlimited had more about Lar-
pictures, not every one of which is worth the words that
kins. It tells us that his lieutenants sent him several pro-
it has displaced. The publisher has left pp. 87 and 217
posals for making Monash more rational and governable
strangely blank. And I wish that the authors had used
– by subdividing it, or reconfiguring it, or even relinquish-
some of this potentially available space for other things,
ing one or more of the three disappointing campuses –
including things that they say, in their Introduction, that
and that he rejected every proposal. It makes no mention
they didn’t have room for.
of his approach to organisation, and the fact that he had,
A timeline would have been helpful. So would statisti-
by the end of his term, three academic vice-chancellors
cal tables, showing – at the least – changes over time in
and vice-presidents, three non-academic vice-presidents,
the sizes of faculties and campuses. So, too, would charts
sixteen pro-vice-chancellors, ten deans, and various other
showing the structure of Victorian tertiary education
hangers-on – every one of whom was determined to make
before and after the amalgamations.
a difference – as well as to maintain a busy travel sched-
They could have said something about how other uni-
ule. And all it tells us about Larkins’ leadership is that he
versities and colleges responded to Dawkins. For years
wrote a regular column in the University’s weekly ‘news’
University propagandists insisted that Monash was ‘Lead-
bulletin.A few extracts from the column would have been
ing the Way’, and implied that those vice-chancellors who
enlightening.
declined to follow, and those college directors and princi-
The book indicates that some vice-chancellors were
pals who declined to let their colleges be acquired, were
more committed to collegiality than were others, but
timid and their institutions doomed. But was it really so?
there is still not enough about leadership or the lan-
The book says a little about the tug of war between those academics – mainly at Clayton – for whom research was an indispensable part of academic life, and those – mainly in the acquired institutions – for whom teaching was the main or sole concern. (The debate seems odd now,
guage of leadership.And sometimes the book gets it badly wrong. Consider this: ... centralised planning may have been the most effective, if not the most inspiring, form of leadership for the times (p. 266).
when universities increasingly recruit full-time research-
But ‘planning’ is not a form of ‘leadership’. The classi-
ers and increasingly delegate teaching to casual staff.) It
cally recognised ‘functions of management’ are planning,
acknowledges that the acquisition process was painful.
organisation, leadership and control. ‘Leadership’ involves
But it might have said much more about the long process
clarifying goals, communicating a sense of urgency,
of amalgamation as it was lived and felt in individual fac-
making people feel stronger, and getting them to follow
ulties: the tensions, the eventual arrangements that were
you.‘Planning’ is about spelling out steps and processes.
made, the sorts of people who gained and lost because of
The book mentions that Don Watson (the author of
these arrangements, the staff redundancies, and the effect
Death Sentence) thought poorly of Robinson’s pub-
on course structures. As it is the acquisition stories stop –
lished vision statement, but provides no examples of the
or nearly stop – when the agreements are signed.
language that Watson deplored. Yet it seemed to many
It could have said more about the epidemics of redunvol. 54, no. 2, 2012
observers that Logan, Robinson and Larkins, together with Am I still yearning?, Review by Jim McGrath
87
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
the various euphemistically-titled propagandists to whom
don’t tell you what the respective chapters are about.
they delegated much of their leadership role, all thought
Sequencing the book must have been hard because of the
that they were leading an inert but credulous staff who
number of sub-plots and because there are two strands to
needed regular injections of facile inspiration. It seemed
the story, but it could have been done better: a first part,
like this partly because of the repeated attempts to bury
with a preamble and a chapter on each vice-chancellor,
‘Ancora imparo’ and to replace it (if at all) with a succes-
and then a much-subdivided second part about the stu-
sion of jingoistic and know-it-all slogans:‘Leading the Way’,
dent (and even staff) experience. As it is, authors, as well
‘Equity and Diversity’,‘Engaging the World’,‘Improving the
as readers, can lose their places: the quotation from JH
Human Condition’, ‘Go Boldly’.... A bigger reason was the
Newman that appears on p.6 is then introduced, as if for
contemptuous and patronising awfulness of the weekly
the first time, on p.82.The indexer has omitted names and
‘news’ bulletins, which used to remind me of MASH (the
references that deserved inclusion, hasn’t used enough
great Robert Altman film, as distinct from M*A*S*H – the
sub-entries, and doesn’t know the difference between
good television series that followed it), where (mainly)
State College of Victoria and Victoria College (neither of
clever people do (frequently) noble things while inane
which, of course, had anything to do with Victoria Univer-
and cynicism-provoking announcements gush from the
sity). The 1,100 end-notes are truly valuable but painfully
loudspeakers.
difficult to access because they are placed at the end of
I wish that the authors had said more about changes in
the book and classified under chapter numbers (without
the ways in which the University has presented itself to
titles), while the running heads in the text itself are, as you
the public, and about what it has done to make itself more
would expect, chapter titles without numbers.
‘relevant’, and more ‘responsive to market demands’, and
The first half of the story is, unsurprisingly, more coher-
about how Monash is therefore different both from other
ent and better managed than the second. Perhaps the
universities and from what it used to be.
difficulties outlined at the beginning of this review are
The authors mention that Monash had a subsidiary company, Montech, which ‘never thrived’ and was eventu-
insuperable. Some Monash Memories would fit better as a sub-title than The Monash Story.
ally wound up. But there were many other ‘bold and excit-
Monash people who read the book will still find out
ing new University initiatives’, some of them corporate or
things that they hadn’t previously known, including much
pseudo-corporate, some of them academic or quasi-aca-
that is worth knowing, and be reminded of important
demic, which were born under bright lights amid fanfares,
things that they have forgotten. In particular the authors
kept alive for years by artificial means, and eventually
have reminded us that Monash has often been much more
buried surreptitiously. Every institution has its failures.
than M**ASH. But if we are ‘still learning’, we still have a
Members of an institution that is ‘still learning’ need to
lot to learn.
know about them. The book is printed in a clear typeface on good
Jim McGrath is a former Manager of the former Monash Uni-
paper and handsomely bound even in paperback, but its
versity Bookshop, a former President of Monash University
arrangement is still unkind to the reader.The chapter titles
Club, and the author of all 27 issues of The Monash Gazette.
88
Am I still yearning?, Review by Jim McGrath
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Multicultural muddles Transforming a ‘White Australia’: Issues of Racism and Immigration by L. Jayasuriya. ISBN 81-902282-9-3 SSS Publications, New Delhi, 2012, Review by Katharine Betts Australia is a deeply racist nation, burdened by a bloodstained bigoted past, and now stumbling into a multiracial,
While he claims that the old racism of the white Aus-
Asia-centric future.This is the image of his country Laksiri
tralia policy still has a deep hold on Australians much of
Jayasuriya holds and his book is a record of his struggle to
the book is devoted to new racism. This is based on the
make sense of it.
idea of difference: new racists prefer to be with their own
It is an image at one end of a continuum marked by
kind and tend to exclude and ignore people who are dif-
two poles. Towards one pole is a vision, long-held by
ferent. Where old racists worried about hierarchies of
many voters, but not often found in the scholarly litera-
worth based on skin colour, and fussed about racial purity,
ture. It values a cohesive nation of equal citizens, com-
new racists focus on exclusion and ‘the denial of “differ-
mitted to each other’s welfare and the stewardship of
ence”’ (p. xiii). They prefer to mingle with people like
their shared continent. Those who hold it see a nation
themselves, perhaps those brought up on Beatrix Potter
where migrants who want to join the national team and
and Winnie-the-Pooh.They do not despise people who are
share its fate are welcomed and accepted. It is the patri-
different; they just ignore them because they feel more
otic vision.
comfortable with people like themselves. But this prefer-
The view towards the other pole sees the former as
ence is not as harmless as it looks. It leads to the exclusion
oppressive. In contrast to the patriots’ ideal of identifi-
of outsiders, people construed as the other. Members of
cation and belonging, proponents hold that minorities
the dominant group should suppress their sense of differ-
should be helped to maintain their differences. Encourag-
ence and expand their social circles to include people and
ing them to make common cause with their fellow citi-
groups who are different.
zens is assimilationist, racist, and a sign of bullying from
But what about differences seen from the point of view
the dominant group. (See for example Jayasuriya 2012:
of minorities? These differences are different. Rather than
21-2, 32, 39-40, 107.) Now that Australia is ethnically het-
being suppressed and ignored they should be recognised,
erogeneous any emphasis on the emotional ties which
preferably in law. The problem with multiculturalism in
hold us together is dangerous or just code for a ‘shallow
Australia so far is that it has concentrated on culture, the
Anglo-centric sense of Australian consciousness’ (p. 120).
culture of individuals. We have had the ethnic-identities
The only principles that can govern us are those of com-
model of cultural multiculturalism, focused on the individ-
monly accepted laws and procedures. This is the proce-
ual. This springs from political liberalism and the idea of
dural vision, and Jayasuriya takes it as his starting point
the universal equality of individual citizens; an individual’s
(pp. 17, 114, 117).
culture should be honoured but, in the final analysis, we
Given his title it is understandable that the book
are all equals. Such a philosophy turned out not to be the
focuses on racism: the old racism of hierarchies based
best way of incorporating immigrants because, though it
on skin colour, and the so-called new racism of inclu-
‘proved eminently functional for newcomers’, it restricted
sion and exclusion. Both in his view are closely linked
their striving to the private realm. In this way it regulated
to nationalism, especially in Australia (pp. 3, 21-22, 39-40,
and controlled them and it did nothing to prevent the rise
49, 52). But he is particularly concerned with their origin
of new racism (p. 9).
in what he terms ‘British racism’. This is a unique form,
Instead of cultural multiculturalism we need structural
based not on skin colour alone but also on ideas about
multiculturalism (pp. 5, 7-8) with political recognition of
stock or origin. Nevertheless, it is still exceptionally
group rights for ethnic minorities. ‘Put simply, by refram-
colour conscious (pp. 25-30, 51). (The British did initiate
ing citizenship in this manner we acknowledge that when
the abolition of slavery, a point which Jayasuriya men-
a society is socially differentiated, citizenship must equally
tions, but does not dwell on (p. 30).)
be so’.This means differentiated (or multicultural) citizen-
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Multicultural muddles, Review by Katharine Betts
89
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
ship (p. 15) and, having gained it, minorities will be able
and particularisms which are implicit in a multicultural
to participate as groups in the public realm (pp, 2, 90-92).
society’ (p. 85). Equality oppresses minorities because it is
But for this outcome to be achieved the new form of citi-
based on individual rather than group rights. It is oppres-
zenship must be incorporated into a Bill of Rights (p. 18).
sive partly because a person’s culture is not static (if it
Such a change would mean a thoroughgoing restruc-
were that would imply essentialism) but mostly because it
ture of the country’s political institutions (p. 17). But what
does not recognise structurally-based disadvantage. Only
is the problem that this upheaval will resolve? Despite
differentiated citizenship can remedy the injustice of indi-
two chapters devoted to the history of laws against racial
vidual equality.
discrimination, Jayasuriya presents little evidence on the
There are some strange elisions in Jayasuriya’s story.
current prevalence of racism. Rather he suggests that his
How was it, for example, that the deeply racist nation he
new model will help us move towards ‘the knowledge
describes so readily developed a policy of multicultural-
based economy of the Asian century’ (p. 19) and that it
ism, even if it was of the wrong kind? There is no mystery
may help migrants. For example, too few of them occupy
here; it just happened, because ‘it was readily acknowl-
the ‘commanding heights’ of Australian society (p. 122).
edged that the conventional anglo-assimilationism was
And they are disadvantaged and suffer inequalities (p. 8).
in need of some modification’ (p. 4). And the history of
(Oddly enough they are also seen as flouting Australian
multiculturalism he presents comes to an abrupt end in
norms by working too hard and trying to get ahead (pp.
2007. There is nothing about its revival under the Gillard
10, 49).)
Government, and almost no mention of public concern
Though the nature of the problem is unclear, we need
about Muslim immigrants. In Jayasuriya’s eyes it is Asians,
to move away from the ‘narrowly conceived’ idea of uni-
marked by their skin colour, who are the victims of exclu-
versal citizenship and embrace citizenship differentiated
sion. This is despite his claim that the consciousness of
by ethnic group (pp. 14-15). But this bold plan leads to a
difference fuelling new racism is ‘not constructed in
dilemma of difference that Jayasuriya does not confront.
racial or biological terms but in terms of group norms and
When practiced by the dominant group, reacting to dif-
attitudes’ (p. 10). He also claims that reservations about
ference is racist (p. 52). In contrast, insisting that differ-
immigration are not about the size of the intake but about
ence be enshrined in law is anti-racist when advocated by
settlement policy and multiculturalism (p. 115), and that
a minority group, or by scholars who claim to speak for
concern about its impact on the economy and environ-
such groups.
ment is ‘in reality code for anti-Asian racism’ (p. 48). Given
How would the new plan be received by the majority? Jayasuriya does not discuss this directly but he does
this, it is odd that he does not mention the big Australia debate and the 2010 election.
write that for Australians, as for many Europeans, racism
Jayasuriya’s book is not only about racism; it is a work
has entered a new phase and takes ‘the form of a plea for
of general political theory. He sets his story within a
the identity and respect for the rights of majority’ (here
framework bounded by patriotism (conceived as xeno-
he is quoting Parekh) (pp. 10, 47).‘Racist’ pleas for respect
phobic nationalism) on the one side and proceduralism
could escalate if the recognition longed for by the major-
on the other. But he moves the story beyond this frame-
ity is denied to them, but readily conferred on minorities.
work, advocating not a proceduralism based on universal
Indeed, the formal institution of group rights for minori-
rules, but one based on differences. This is a stimulating
ties could result in group-based competition for resources
approach. If at times it seems a little incoherent this may
and considerable disharmony.
be because the patriotic view that he contests has not
And then there is the dark side of equality. Cultural multiculturalism, Jayasuriya claims, is based on the individual,
been sufficiently clearly expressed in the circles in which he moves.
not the group. It is based on the principle of equality and this is ‘problematic for Australian multiculturalism’,
Dr Katharine Betts is Adjunct Associate Professor, Sociology,
because its advocates insist on universalism and treating
in the Faculty of Life and Social Sciences, Swinburne Univer-
people in the same way.This leads ‘to a denial of difference
sity of Technology.
90
Multicultural muddles, Review by Katharine Betts
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Every home should have one! The Joy of English: 100 illuminating conversations about the English language by Jesse Karjalainen ISBN 978 1 84528 478 7. Oxford, UK, How To Books Ltd, 2012. 237 pp. Review by Ian R Dobson The first thing that attracted my attention to this book
right, wrong or preferable. ‘The bite-sized chapters are
was that it was advertised in the Helsinki Times, Finland’s
not complete guides to, say, how to use an apostrophe.
English-language weekly tabloid. This paper provides Fin-
Instead, they look specifically at those parts that usually
land-residing English speakers like me with a refreshing
goes (sic) wrong, such as getting “its” and “it’s” wrong……
and regular link to Finland and the Finnish view of the
Each chapter is ordered so that the most important infor-
world. Perhaps this was the ideal place for such a book
mation is at the beginning’ (p. xv).
to be promoted.
For me, the book starts well, with the first chapter
The second thing was that the author had a Finnish sur-
being devoted to the overuse of ‘very’. ‘Avoid using very,
name. After you have read as much Finglish as I have in
which can be removed from most sentences without any
recent years, one would not have expected to come across
real loss of meaning…’ (p. 5).
a book about English usage and grammar written by a Finn.
A few of the chapters that particularly resonated:
Finnish is about as different in structure from English as a
less versus fewer, a distinction that continues to be lost
language that uses the same alphabet could be. It quickly
on those in charge of the express checkouts in most if not
becomes clear to a native speaker living in Finland that
all Australian supermarkets (Chapter 5).
writing in English is difficult for most Finns. Of course,
compare to [something similar]; compare with [some-
many native speakers of English also struggle with the writ-
thing dissimilar] (Chapter 8).
ten language; just have a look at any recent text that has
different from (Chapter 9).
come from your own university’s marketing office!
male/female versus men’s/women’s (Chapter 33):‘Use
As it turns out, the author, Jesse Karjalainen, is a person
male/female to say what gender something is; use mascu-
with a diverse personal history: he was born in Sweden to
line/feminine to describe the attitude of people or things;
Finnish parents, but grew up in Australia; he studied jour-
and men’s or women’s for “belonging to” or “intended for”’
nalism in Scotland, but now lives in England. He also runs
(p. 78). Spot on! No more ‘male toilets’ or ‘female clothes’.
the whichenglish.com website. Clearly this author is ide-
But no more ‘women professors’, either, I hope.
ally qualified to write a book about English. I wonder why
that versus who and whose (Chapter 41).
his Finnish parents called him ‘Jesse’, rather than the more
And so on, up to Chapter 100 ‘Spell check and proof’.
common ‘Jussi’? Did they pronounce it ‘Yessie’, the way
Has Microsoft Word made automatic ‘corrections’ for you?
a Finn or a Swede would? His surname, as is explained
‘It is handy to have Word change a word that you have spelt
on the publisher’s website, should be pronounced some-
incorrectly…but not when it makes unwanted changes.
thing like ‘carry your lion in’, said quickly, with rolled Rs.
This feature is bound to introduce inconsistencies and
Enough with the introductions!
American spelling.’ (p. 230).Annoying, to say the least!
This is a book for most desks or studies. In his Preface,
Books such as this are highly dependent on their index,
Karjalainen notes that ‘There are hundreds of books about
and the index seems to cover the book’s contents well.This
English, so why write another one?...The Joy of English is
isn’t a book to read from cover to cover at a sitting, and if
aimed at a popular audience and intended as an antidote
your book shelves are anything like mine, you will already
to [English grammar] books that put people off or put
have several guides to writing and using English. Can one
them to sleep’ (p. ix).
have too many? The Joy of English is a worthy addition. I’ve
The organisation of the book is simple: 100 short chap-
been recommending it to my Finnish colleagues! And don’t
ters, typically one to three pages in length. Each chapter
forget to check out whichenglish.com.
starts with a few correct and incorrect examples, fol-
Ian R Dobson is a co-resident of Finland and Australia, a
lowed by several lines that explain the content of that
research director with the University of Helsinki, and editor
chapter, followed by descriptions and more examples of
of the Australian Universities’ Review.
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Every home should have one!, Review by Ian R Dobson
91
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Inter (sic) the future? Interdisciplinary Higher Education: Perspectives and Practicalities by Martin Davies, Marcia Devlin and Malcolm Tight (Eds.) International Perspectives on Higher Education Research Vol. 5. Bingley, UK, Emerald Group Publishing, 2011. ISBN: 9780857423713 Review by Neil Mudford This book is a valuable resource for university staff wish-
This is consistent with the notion that the main function
ing to engage in interdisciplinary research or teaching,
of the work is as a guide for those running interdiscipli-
or to design or manage interdisciplinary teams or degree
nary activity.
programmes. It provides extensive theoretical discussion
A shortcoming of the work is that there are no dis-
of the nature of interdisciplinary activity and a treasure
senting or critical voices. The volume and the series titles
trove of thoughtful reports from Australian and inter-
claim to provide Perspectives but it seems that only per-
national practitioners on the practicalities of engaging
spectives that advance the message of a greater role for
in such work. These two offerings are presented in that
interdisciplinarity appear here. By contrast, the Practicali-
order in the two sections of the book. This greatly helps
ties of the volume title are thoroughly explored.
the clarity of the presentation. The sectional divide is not
The justification for interdisciplinary research and
strict.The theoretical section uses plenty of general exam-
teaching in higher education, and problem solving in the
ples to present the theory and the ‘vignette’ authors of
wider society, is given only brief attention. The support-
Part II relate their experiences back to theory.
ing argument, advanced a number of times, is that the
The theoretical sections of the work explain and dis-
problems and challenges of the world we live in are com-
cuss in great detail the taxonomy of the numerous shades
plex and require the knowledge and skills found across a
of interdisciplinary collaboration in research. There are
number of disciplines. Therefore interdisciplinary teams
a number of schemes presented by various authors. The
are necessary for finding problem solutions and answer-
first degree of movement away from entirely discipline
ing the challenges.
based work is to multidisciplinarity in which each team
Brief though it is, I find this argument persuasive when
member produces their contribution to the joint effort
used to justify interdisciplinary research in which team
using skills, knowledge and methodology drawn from
members with deep knowledge and skills in their disci-
within their home discipline with minimal interaction
plines contribute their expertise. This practice is wide-
with those from other disciplines. Beyond this, there is
spread outside higher education. Any large or complex
a scale of increasingly integrated interdisciplinary activ-
engineering design or construction project works this
ity in which staff engage more intensely with colleagues
way. Indeed, any large organisation works this way, includ-
from other disciplines. At the far end of the spectrum
ing universities in which there are academics, administra-
participants are deeply involved in each other’s methods,
tors, librarians, technical officers and so on.
culture and mind-set.
A number of authors stress that an important pre-
There is some irony to be found at this ‘extreme’ or 100
condition for engaging in interdisciplinary research is a
per cent end of the spectrum. If the collaboration is close
pressing need to do so or rewards that make it well worth-
enough and the outcomes productive enough, a new dis-
while.A good deal of the book is devoted to discussing the
cipline may be produced. If this is the case then the con-
significant barriers to such collaboration, such as the con-
tributing authors may shortly find themselves drawn into
siderable effort required to get to know and understand
a new discipline of interdisciplinarity, a development that
cultures and approaches in other disciplines, the admin-
may have its awkward aspects.
istrative overheads of having staff from several Schools/
The theories concerning the psychology of team inter-
Departments participating and so on. Clearly, with aca-
actions including leadership, group dynamics, identity,
demic workloads high everywhere, there need to be some
belonging and so forth are well covered in this book.
pretty compelling incentives.
92
Inter (sic) the future?, Review by Neil Mudford
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
Davies and Devlin make the point that it is hard to convince researchers to engage in interdisciplinary work
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
non-existent heartfelt need would explain the reported tendencies of staff to let the programmes slide.
because recognition is most readily received for pro-
There is considerable discussion on the obstacles to
gress made by staying narrowly and deeply focussed on
interdisciplinary research posed by the cultural and meth-
research within one’s own discipline. Additionally, those
odological differences between disciplines. This is cited
initiating a deep engagement in interdisciplinary work
as one of the barriers to the more integrated forms of
may feel that making this transition would deprive them
interdisciplinary collaboration. Some authors see interdis-
of their base in their home discipline and that they are
ciplinary education as at least a part cure for this prob-
taking a risk that the project will fail to produce outcomes
lem because students in such programmes are exposed
valued by their peers.
to alternative intellectual approaches and cultures from
A critical voice is particularly needed when what we
the outset.
might call the complex world argument, outlined above,
An alternative to thoroughgoing interdisciplinary pro-
is applied to justify interdisciplinary teaching. The argu-
grammes is to organise such exposure through having
ment’s possible shortcoming for this purpose can be
students in a disciplinary programme take a few courses
appreciated by first accepting the need for an interdis-
in other disciplines on their way through. This would not
ciplinary team approach to world problem solution then
significantly dilute their exposure to their core discipline.
wondering what role interdisciplinary degree programme
This is the practice at the University of New South Wales
graduates might play in such a team. What expertise
(UNSW) where I did most of my teaching. I am unsure
could these graduates bring to the team that could not
how well it works.The UNSW website states that students
be more comprehensively supplied by a sensible mix of
report ‘greatly valuing’ their two General Education (GE)
graduates from discipline-based degree programmes? If
courses, as they are known.This is at odds with my experi-
the problem to be solved is difficult, then surely it needs
ence but, then, I am well accustomed to being at odds with
deep knowledge in the relevant areas. Perhaps the answer
website claims.The engineering students I taught consist-
lies in having the interdisciplinary degree graduates bring
ently reported resenting the GE courses, doing their best
their cross-disciplinary cultural understanding to bear to
to choose the easiest options and generally treating them
fill facilitating, communications or management roles.The
as a distraction, more’s the pity. Only the wisest used them
point is that questions such as this need answers from
as an opportunity to experience some wider intellectual
those advocating interdisciplinary teaching.
diversity in their programme. Still, such an alternative,
A related area that needs more attention is the balance
peppered with more encouragement of some sort, might
between disciplinary depth and interdisciplinary breadth
permit continued deep learning in a discipline while pre-
in interdisciplinary teaching programmes. Davies and
paring students for the wider world of thinking rather
Devlin (p. 23-4) pose the question but the answer only
than have it come as a shock after graduation.
goes as far as pointing to the need for care in balancing
In conclusion, a good book for the theory of interdisci-
the mix. The paucity of guidelines or suggestions in this
plinary activity and how to do it well but a bit weak on
area contrasts with the considerable practical help given
critical analysis of the questions of why you would want
in the work in relation to other areas such as programme
to do it. It may be a canny purchase if you work in a uni-
management etc.
versity in which the CEO’s edict may arrive unexpectedly
Little is said in the work about the genesis of the interdisciplinary teaching programmes examined. Often
at any time. I understand that there are approximately 38 such universities in Australia.
what is said is along the lines that interdisciplinary programmes are becoming more popular or widespread and
Dr Neil Mudford is a Visiting Fellow with UNSW and a Casual
our university is joining in the shift. It would not surprise
Specialist Lecturer with the University of Queensland. Prior to
me in the least if a decent fraction of the growth were
his retirement in 2011, Dr. Mudford was a senior lecturer in
being driven by intervarsity competition for undergrad-
aerospace and mechanical engineering with UNSW Canberra.
uate students with the decision to introduce the pro-
He is a member of the Australian Universities’ Review Edito-
grammes being announced in an edict from on high. The
rial Board.
consequent increase in workload coupled with weak or
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Inter (sic) the future?, Review by Neil Mudford
93
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
Hil of discontent Whackademia: An insider’s account of the troubled university by Richard Hil New South Publishing. University of New South Wales Press Ltd. 2012; ISBN 978 1 74223 291 1 (pbk) Review by Ian R Dobson When I was first exposed to a wonderfully satirical but
readiness, professional careers and the promise of hefty
painfully true article in Campus Review about the state of
incomes…students have come to expect a product –
some aspect or other of Australian university life by Joseph
degree, diploma or doctorate – that will equip them to
Gora, I wondered who this brave and reckless soul could
compete for jobs in the employment market place’ (p. 17).
be. I sought out Joseph to see if he would write an opin-
Whackademia in turn considers marketing, mottos, slo-
ion piece for Australian Universities’ Review. However,
gans, websites (‘Invariably, university websites are plastered
it transpired that there was no ‘Joseph’, but I arranged for
with hi-definition coloured photographs of youthful student
e-contact with his alter ego. From that encounter in 2009,
shoppers in varying states of bliss…, p. 63) and ‘defending
AUR subsequently ran Joseph’s thoughts on ‘sexy’ mottos,
the brand’ (p. 68). Academic ‘busyness’ is discussed, and HCS
the ‘TEQSA juggernaut’, university rankings, and the name-
(headless chicken syndrome), ‘whereby constant regulated
less and faceless ‘ERA 149 club’ that seemed unable to see
motion leads to various psychological problems….HCS has
the stupidity of ranking journals to assess the quality of
been known to lead people to drink excessive quantities of
the papers in those journals. That he should eventually
cheap red wine’ (p. 72). So it’s not all bad, then!
turn his hand to a book was obvious, a necessity, even.
Subsequent chapters consider production-line teaching,
Richard Hil has an excellent turn of phrase when it
research (including dodgy metrics), workload formulae,
comes to explaining that elements of our universities
and the graduates universities are churning out. Teach-
have become a bit silly, and his targets deserve all the deri-
ing workloads to provide for so many students, distance
sion he can heap on them. ‘Although this book records
education (‘teaching 24/7’) and the ‘ceaseless gaze’ of
a lot of complaints about the things that academics find
the various bodies and committees that want to measure
disagreeable, odd, boorish, stifling, restrictive, irritating
everything are considered. Research, including the ‘grants
and downright toxic in today’s university system, it has a
lottery’ (with the 75 per cent miss rate for Australian
higher purpose: namely, to highlight the parlous state of
Research Council Discovery Grants: now there’s a good
Australia’s higher education sector…’ (p. 19). The trouble
return on time investment), the great ERA (Excellence
is that it’s all real; this is not a work of fiction. The past
in Research Australia) delusion and the journals ranking
25 years have produced bureaucratisation, marketisation
fiasco are all put under the microscope. Of course, the
and casualisation, while all around is the rhetoric of excel-
Minister had the good sense to junk journal ranking in
lence. Some think that if we say how excellent our uni-
May 2011, but it represented an obviously flawed system
versity is often enough, it will somehow become so. By
that generated ‘an aura of false objectivity’ (p. 153).Yes, we
now, many of us are dizzy from the spin. The number of
were sold a pup with that one.Within universities there is
students over that period has increased from fewer than
too much administration, and that’s just what academics
400,000 to over 1.3 million, and one might have expected
have to do themselves these days.
a roughly commensurate increase in the number of teach-
In the end, are universities succeeding? ‘Despite indus-
ing staff. Unfortunately, growth in the number of full time
try-relevant curricula, vocationally orientated teaching,
and fractional full time teachers has been modest, leaving
“graduate attributes”, swanky student portfolios and the
the slack to be taken up by staff with the most precarious
rest, many business leaders think that universities are pro-
of casual contracts. Excellent? I don’t think so.
ducing one-dimensional graduates incapable of good com-
Hil introduces us to the concept of the ‘student shopper’: ‘Australian university education is delivered through
munication, teamwork and independent creative thought’ (p. 195).The answer to that question is probably ‘no’.
a quasi-market mixture of public and private funding
I have a couple of observations (rather than criticisms)
that is tethered to particular instrumental goals like job
of Whackademia. First, I would have liked it to have had
94
Hil of discontent , Review by Ian R Dobson
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
an index. To me, it matters not that ‘this book strikes a
Go and buy a copy of Whackademia; most of you will
polemic rather than an academic tone’ (p. 23). I would still
enjoy reading it. Using humour to point out the foibles
have liked something to help me find the gems within.
in government policy and institutional reactions to those
The second observation is that there is a tendency by aca-
policies isn’t as easy as is it sounds, but Richard Hil is
demics to link the efforts of hard-working administrative
extraordinarily good at it. By the time the second print run
staff with those responsible for university governance.
comes out, the copy editors will have corrected the odd
With few exceptions, the big bosses started out as aca-
spelling errors, such as by adding the second ‘l’ to my long-
demics. I’m not convinced that Hil is guilty of this sin, but
time friend Arthur O’Neill when he is mentioned, and put-
it would have been worth making sure that the major-
ting the apostrophe into Australian Universities’ Review.
ity of the university labour force realised that they were
But on that front, let those free of sin cast the first stone!
not being lumped in with the mega-salaried ex-academic
Personally, I hope that Richard Hil moves his creative
decision makers nor even the fat cat administrators they
talent forward. Perhaps he could create ‘Whackademia:
hired to do the critical things like write next season’s silly
The Musical’. He could take inspiration from Professor
slogans. (Dream large? Go Boldly? Yeah, right). In a perfect
Quincy Adams Wagstaff President of Huxley College, USA.
(university) world, there would be fewer administrative
To see what might be possible, invest three minutes of
staff, but it isn’t their fault.With so much diversity, compe-
your life and search YouTube for ‘I’m against it (Horse Feath-
tition and accountability, someone has to fill in the forms.
ers)’.You might even learn Spanish. Or is it Portuguese?
Blame the government!
Ian R Dobson is editor of AUR.
Keeping it in the family Europeanizing Education: Governing a new policy space by Martin Lawn & Sotiria Grek, 2012 ISBN 978-1-873927-61-8, Oxford: Symposium Books Ltd Review by Raj Sharma This book examines the Europeanisation of education,
of the twentieth century were studying with Professor
focusing on the intended and unintended consequences
Rein, the great interpreter of Herbert, and travelling back
of European processes and the relational effects of dispa-
to their own countries to spread the practices of the
rate but powerful European agencies and players in the
new educational sciences. Similarly it is noted that edu-
field.The authors make the point that European education
cational research also transcends national boundaries.The
started before the 1992 Maastricht Treaty. For instance,
authors relate that from the 1950s, and based in western
even during the nineteenth and early twentieth century
Europe, new European research institutions such as the
European societies were constructing their educational
International Association for the Evaluation of Educational
systems and displaying their innovations and educational
Achievement (IEA) were established to draw together key
services in international exhibitions or being observed by
policy actors and educational research specialists. But is
travelling researchers. The latter became associated with
this ‘Europeanisation’ or globalisation or possibly both in
the emergence of such specialist educational centres as
terms of educational research? For instance, the authors
the English Board of Education Department of Special
state that some of these bodies were at least partially
Inquiries that produced major publications on European
funded by the USA with active participation by American
education during the late nineteenth/ early 20th century.
researchers. It is therefore ironic to note that European
It is observed that the phenomenon of exporting of
organisations that developed later, such as the European
educational goods and services also emerged across
Centre for the Development of Education, were focused
Europe during the twentieth century. For instance, this
inter alia on ‘protecting Europe against globalisation’.
publication states that around one-third of the students
These more recent developments included the signing
in the university city of Jena, Germany in the first decade
of the so-called Maastricht Treaty on 7 February 1992 that
vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
Keeping it in the family, Review by Raj Sharma
95
A
U
S
T
R
A
L
I
A
N
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
I
T
I
E
S
’
R
E
V
I
E
W
acknowledged for the first time that education and culture
in the knowledge economy goals of Europe. Thus educa-
were an inherent part of the European integration process.
tion in Europe shifted from its pre-2000 institutionalised
This provided a boost to existing programmes such as
and ordered sequences to become a new fluid, flexible
Erasmus where the number of exchange students across
and cross-national phenomenon, namely, that of learn-
Europe during the 1990s increased to hundreds of thou-
ing. More particularly an interest in developing measures
sands. Further, other new educational programmes such as
of educational performance related to learning through
Socrates and Leonardo were also formed by the late 1990s.
numerical data gained in prominence in order to assure
The authors note that around the time of the Maastricht
the quality of European education. This also required
Treaty, the idea of the European educational dimension
the establishment of benchmarks; for example, in May
began to focus much more on mobility of students and
2003 the European Commission set a benchmark to be
teachers across Europe; the recognition of national diplo-
achieved by 2010, namely, in respect to higher education
mas; cooperation between educational institutions and
there was a requirement for an increase of at least 15 per
the rise of data about education systems of constituent
cent in graduates covering the disciplines of mathemat-
states. However, the 1996 White Paper on Learning Soci-
ics, science and technology. Due to economic and other
ety transformed the focus on the use of technology and
environmental factors, such benchmarks and measures
the creation of European educational software towards
subsequently required updates and changes. The book
the idea of the Information Society.
provides comments that European organisations such as
The book next turns its attention towards the issue of
Eurydice (responsible for qualitative indicators) and Euro-
governing education using, at least in part, the example
stats (responsible for statistical information) have pub-
of the European Educational Research Association (EERA).
lished measures associated with developments across the
The authors observe that EU governance is associated
European educational systems.
with the management of certain key spaces including
The book acknowledges that one of the most power-
regions, cities, networks and borders. They indicate that
ful agents in the momentum towards Europeanisation is
networks represent a common form of governance in
not a European body but a global organisation, namely,
Europe, crossing national boundaries, old government
the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Develop-
divisions and traditions of work and administration. EERA
ment (OECD). An example given of the OECD’s influence
was formed in 1994 with the aim of including all national
and role in terms of the European educational systems
educational research associations in Europe.
reform is the Program for International Student Assess-
The authors suggest that governance is a new paradigm
ment (PISA) which has had an enormous impact through
representing a shift from hierarchy, and referring to a set
the establishment of a new kind of measuring logic about
of institutions and actors that are drawn from, but also
governing education in Europe. It is suggested that the
beyond, government European networking. The book
OECD’s transformation into a powerful agent of transna-
notes that European educational governance is character-
tional governance follows from the comparative focus
ised by ‘soft governance’, use of persuasive power, expert
towards a scientific approach to political decision making,
influence and an instrumentalisation of new forms of
which builds on data collection, ranking and rating of
non-state power to govern at a distance. This ‘governing
member countries.The authors observe that the PISA pro-
by standards’ relies on experts and excludes politics. Edu-
ject has helped to consolidate the OECD’s role as the pre-
cational standards in the European context have shifted
eminent global organisation for developing and analysing
from being descriptive specifications of objects into per-
comparative international educational performance data.
formance requirements, checked through systematic qual-
The book is of relevance to those interested in the
ity management. Indeed the book notes that the major
Europeanisation of education and the broader theme of
processes of standardising European education have
globalisation of education. No doubt scholars in the Aus-
occurred through the development of benchmarks and
tralasian region and indeed those from other regions of
indicator data. For example, the European Credit Transfer
the world can learn from the processes adopted within
and Accumulation system in higher education created a
Europe to achieve greater cohesion in terms of policies
common standard, the credit, consisting of learning out-
and planning of education.
comes and its workload time, which has enabled student mobility across the EU. It is noted in the book that following the signing of the Lisbon Strategy in 2000, education became the key feature
96
Keeping it in the family, Review by Raj Sharma
Dr Raj Sharma is a higher education consultant and former Associate Director (Resource Planning & Analysis) and Senior Research Fellow at Swinburne University, Australia. vol. 54, no. 2, 2012
NTEU members quote CC*NTEU when registering to SAVE $150!
28th & 29th November 2012 Crowne Plaza, Melbourne
Higher Education
Workforce Planning & Policy Improving the evidence base to enhance institutional performance
Strategies to
Key speakers
International keynote Jayne Dowden Director of Human Resources Safety, Health and Environment CARDIFF UNIVERSITY
Jeannie Rea National President NATIONAL TERTIARY EDUCATION UNION
Register 3 delegates and the 4th comes FREE! To register phone +61 2 9239 5700 registration@criterionconferences.com www.higheredworkforce.com aqua.3156
Professor Garry Marchant Deputy Vice-Chancellor and Vice President (Academic) CHARLES STURT UNIVERSITY
Professor Margaret Mazzolini Pro Vice-Chancellor Learning and Teaching VICTORIA UNIVERSITY
Improve teaching – research staff ratios, whilst ensuring quality Remain competitive via improved staff data collection Comply with external staff regulatory & quality requirements Address the ageing leadership workforce shortage
Proudly Endorsed by
es v o r p m i ion , and t a c ‘Edu uctivity s’ e prod oves liv r imp onomist e, Ec
i Jam
www.investinuniversities.org.au Authorised by Grahame McCulloch, General Secretary, National Tertiary Education Union, 120 Clarendon St, South Melbourne. Photo: Andrew Curtis
www.aur.org.au Since 1958, Australian Universities’ Review (AUR) has been encouraging debate and discussion about issues in higher education and its contribution to Australian public life.
AUR
aur
Volume 49, Numbers
AUSTRAL IAN UNI VERSITI ES REVI EW
AUSTRALIA
ISSN 0818-8068
1 & 2, 2007
The future face The crisis in our
The Humaniti
es: the poor
of higher educatio
universities:
n
who’s to blame?
relations of innovatio
How not to fund
N UNIVERSIT
n policy
teaching and
learning
IES REVIEW PUBLISHED
The Howard Era – In Retrospect?
Higher Education Policy’s Groundhog So farewell, Mr Robin Days son: The Monas h plagiarism debac le
ISSN 0818-8068
Volume 46, Number
2, 2004 Published by
NTEU
Want to receive your own copy of Australian Universities’ Review? AUR is published by the National Tertiary Education Union (NTEU) twice a year. NTEU members are entitled to receive a free subscription on an opt-in basis – so you need to let us know. If you are an NTEU member and would like to receive your own copy of AUR, please send us an email at aur@nteu.org.au. Subscription rates for non-members are available at www.aur.org.au. If you would like to become a member of NTEU, please contact the local Branch office at your institution, or join online at www.nteu.org.au.
BY NTEU